Hewlett-Packard HP-UX Family User Manual

PDF

Dokument

Oglas

HP-QX Reference

Vol. 3: Sections 3, 4, 5, 7, and 9

Flio-

HEWLETT

':1:.

PACKARD

HP-UX Reference

Vol. 3: Sections 4, 5, 7, and 9 for

HP Part Number 09000-90008

This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this

document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-

Packard Company. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in paragraph (b)(3)(B) of the Rights in Technical Data and Software clause in DAR 7-104.9(a).

Use of this manual and flexible disc(s) or tape cartridge(s) supplied for this pack is restricted to this product only. Additional copies of the programs can be made for security and back-up purposes only. Resale of the programs in their present form or with alterations, is expressly prohibited.

This software and documentation is based in part on the Fourth Berkeley Software Distribution under license from the

Regents of the University of California.

Hewlett-Packard Company

3404 East Harmony Road, Fort Collins, Colorado 80525

Printing History

New editions of this manual will incorporate all material updated since the

previous

edition.

Update packages may be issued between editions and contain replacement and additional pages to be merged into the manual by the user. Each updated page will be indicated by a revision date at the bottom of the page. A vertical bar in the margin indicates the changes on each page.

Note that pages which are rearranged due to changes on a previous page are not considered revised.

The manual printing date and part number indicate its current edition. The printing date changes when a new edition is printed. (Minor corrections and updates which are incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change.) The manual part number changes when extensive technical changes are incorporated.

July 1985 ... Edition 1. This manual replaces HP-UX Reference Manual 09000-90007 and documents HP-UX Release 5.0 for Series 200, 300 and 500.

November 1985 ... Edition 2. Updated from Edition 1 to reflect Series 200/300 HP-UX Release

5.1 changes. Several omitted pages in Edition 1 were also added.

June 1986 ... Edition 3. Update 1 incorporated.

September 1986 ... Edition 3 Update 1. This update reflects additions and changes incorporated in Series 500 HP-UX Release 5.1. Added command

autobackup(lM) and core files support

(core(5)), changed block size limitations for SDF file formats, and fixed various bugs.

NOTICE

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

HEWLETT-PACKARD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL. INCLUDING. BUT NOT LIMITED TO.

THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewletl·Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

WARRANTY

A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your

Hewlett~Packard product and replacement parts can be obtained from your local

Sales and Service Office. ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Commands intro(1) ................................................................................................................. introduction to Section 1 acctcom ........................................................................................ search and print process accounting files adb ...................... ........ ................. ......... .......... ............ ....... ........... ................................................ debugger adjust .................. ......... ................ .......... ..................... ............................... ................ simple text formatter admin .................. .......... .............. ................................ .............................. create and administer sees files ar ...................................... .................... .............................. ......................... archive and library maintainer arcv .......... ..... ........... ........ ........................................ ........... ................. ....... convert archives to new format as ......... ..................... ....... ........ .... ..... ......... ......... ............. ........... ............................ assembler for MC68000 asa ............................................................... .......... .......... ........... interpret

ASA carriage control characters at .. .................... ............................................ .............. ........ .......... .......... execute commands at a later time aterm ............................ .......... .......... .............................. general purpose asynchronous terminal emulation atrans .............. ........... .............. ........... ... .................. ........... ....... .......... ............ translate assembly language awk ...................... .................... ............................................ text pattern scanning and processing language banner ................. .......... ................ .......... .................... ..................... ............... make posters in large letters basename ..................................................................................................... extract portions of path names bc .................................................................................................... arbitrary-precision arithmetic language bdiff ................................................................................................................................................ .. big diff bfs ........................................................................................................................................ big file scanner bifchmod .............................................................................................................. change mode of a BIF file bifchown ........................................................ ..................................................... change file owner or group bifcp ...................................................................................................................... copy to or from BIF files bifdf ............................ ............................ ................ .................................. report number of free disc blocks biffind ........................................................................ ........................................... find files in a BIF system biffsck .......... ........ .......... .............. ......................... Bell file system consistency check and interactive repair biffsdb .......... ........ .................. ......... .......... ......... .......... ..................... ....... ............. Bell file system debugger bifls ...... ...... .......... ............ ............ ................... ............ ........ ........... .............. list contents of BIF directories bifrnkdir ..................................................................................................................... make a BIF directory bifmkfs .............................................................................................................. construct a Bell file system bifrm ............................................................................................................ remove ElF files or directories bs ....... ........... ....... ..... ....... ....... ........ ..................... .............. compiler/interpreter for modest-sized programs cal. .... ..... ... ....... .... ..... ... ................. ....... ... ...... .......... ............. .......... ............... ......................... print calendar calendar ............... .................. ......................... ..... ............... .................... ........ .... ...... ......... reminder service cat ............................................................................................................ concatenate, copy, and print files cb ............................................................................................................... C program beautifier, formatter cc ........................................................................................................................................... ..... C compiler cd ................. ........ ............ .................. ..... ............. ................ ........................ ........ change working directory cdb ............................................................................................. C,

FORTRAN, Pascal symbolic debugger cdc ........ ...... .......... ............ ...... ...................................... ...... change the delta commentary of an sees delta cflow .......................................................................................................................... generate C flow graph chatr ................................................................................................... change program's internal attributes chmod ...................................................................................................................................... change mode chown ................................................................................................................. change file owner or group chsh .................. ,................................................................................................... change default login shell clear ............................................................................................................................ clear terminal screen cmp ...................... .......... ............. ... .......... ......... ........... ..................... ....... ......... ............... compare two files col ..................................................................................................... filter reverse linefeeds and backspaces comm ............ ........ ............ ................ ........... ................. .................... select/reject common lines of two files compact ................................................................................. compress and uncompress files, and cat them cp ............................................................................................................................ copy, link or move files cpio .... ............................ ................ .......... .................... ............. .................. ..... copy file archives in and out cpp ............................................................................................. ............................ C language preprocessor crontab ......... ........ ....................... ....... ......... ........................ ................ ......... ....... ............... user crontab file csh .................................................................................................................................................... C shell ctags ........... .......................................................................... .............................................. create a tags file

-1-

Table of Contents

cu ....................................................................................................................... call another HP-UX system cut .... ...... ..... .............. ....... ..... ....... ........ ... ............ ................ ....... cut out selected fields of each line of a file cxref ........ ...... ........ ............ ......... ........ .......... ... ...... .... ................ ......... ... generate C program cross-reference date .... ...... ..... ......... ...... .......... ........ ........ ... ... ...... ... ..... ....... ..... ........... ........ ........ ... ..... print and set the date dc ....... ........... ............... ....... ........... ........... ... ......... ..... .... ........ ........... ..... ... ........... ........ ..... ... desk calculator dd .................................................................................... convert, reblock, translate, and copy a (tape) file delta ................................................................................................. make a delta (change) to an sees file deroff ......................................................................................... remove nroff/troff, tbl, and eqn constructs diff ............................................................................................................. ......... differential file comparator diff3 .......................................................................................................... 3-way differential file comparison diffmk ........ ......... ...... ................... ............ ... ........ ......... .................. ................ mark differences between files dircmp .. ....... ......... ............. ............. ............. ......... .................. ......... ........... directory difference comparison du .................. ......... .......... ......... ....... .... .......... ....... ........... .......... ..... ............ ... ........ ... summarize disk usage echo ..... ............................................. ................................. ....................... ............... echo (print) arguments ed ...................... ................................................... ..................................... .................................. text editor edit ............................................................................................. text editor (variant of ex for casual users) enable ................................................................................................................. enable/disable LP printers env ........................... ..................................................................... set environment for command execution err ............................................. ..................... ................................. report error information on last failure ex .............................................. ................................................................................. text editor commands expand ...................................... ...................... .................................. expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa expr ........................... ................................................... ...................... evaluate arguments as an expression fl7 ....................................................................................................................................................... see fc factor ..................... .................... ...................... ................................ factor a number, generate large primes fc ................................................ : ........................................................................... FORTRAN 77 compiler file ................. ............................ ........ ...................................... ................. ...................... determine file type find ......... ........ ........ .................... ............................ ........... ....... ................................ ......... ........ ..... find files findmsg ..................................... ...................... .......................... create message catalog file for modification findstr ........................................ ....................... ................. ...... find strings for inclusion in message catalog fixman ............................................................................... fix manual pages for faster viewing with man(1) fold ............................................. ............................................. fold long lines for finite-width output device gencat .......................................................................................... generate a formatted message-catalog file get ...... ................... ........ ............................... ............................................ ....... get a version of an sees file getopt .......... ......... ...... ........... ........ ... ................. .................... ....... .................... ...... parse command options getprivgrp .................. ...................................................................... ......... ... get special attributes for group grep ........ ........................... ........ ............ ........... ....... ........... .......... ...... ... ... search an

AseII file for a pattern groups show group memberships head ........................................... ....................... .......... ........................................... give first few lines of file help .. .................................................................... ........................ ............ ........... ...................... ask for help hostname ..................... ................................................................. set or print name of current host system hp .............. ........ .......................................... handle special functions of HP 2640 and 2621 series terminals hyphen .. ................... ........ ......... ............................. .......... ......... ......... ...................... find hyphenated words id ............................................................................................................... print user, group IDs and names insertmsg ........................................................... ......... .......... use findstring output to insert calls to getmsg ipcrm .... ........................... ................... ......... remove a message queue, semaphore set, or shared memory id ipcs ....................... .................... ........ .................. ......... report inter-process communication facilities status join ............. .............................. ....... ........................................................ ........ relational database operator kill ......................... ................................... ... .......... ............................................... ......... terminate a process last .................. .......................... ....... ............................................ indicate last logins of users and teletypes

Id ............................. ....................................... ............................................................................. link editor leave ..................................................................................................... remind you when you have to leave lex ............................................. .................................. ..... ...... generate programs for lexical analysis of text

Iifcp .................................................................................................................... '.' copy to or from LIF files

Iifinit ....... ................................................................................................... write LIF volume header on file lifts ................... ....... ................. ....................... ......... ................................ ...... list contents of LIF directory

-2-

Table of Contents

lifrename .................................... ................................ ................................... ..................... rename LIF files lifrm ........................................................... ....................................................................... remove a LIF file line ................................................................................................................. read one line from user input linkinfo .................................................................................................... object file link information utility lint .................................................................................................................. a C program checker/verifier lock .................................................................................................................................. reserve a terminal login . ........ .......................................................................... ............................. .......... ....................... sign on logname . ........................... ....... ...................... .................. ..................................................... get login name lorder .......................................................................... .................... find ordering relation for object library

Ip ................................................................................ ............ send or cancel requests to an LP line printer

Ipstat ........................................................ ........................................................ print LP status information

Is ................................................................................. ........................................ list contents of directories

Isdev .... ................ ........................................................ ............................... list device drivers in the system m4 ...................................................................... ......... ....................................................... macro processor machid .............. .......................... ................................ ......... provide truth value about your processor type mail .................... .......... .................. ............ ........ .............................. ...... ..... send mail to users or read mail mailx ........................................................................... :.............................................. send and receive mail make ..................... ................. .................... ....................................... maintain, update, recompile programs man ...... ....................... ................. ............................... ......................................... on-line manual command mediainit .............................................................. initialize hard disc, flexible disc, or cartridge tape media mesg ................................................................................................... permit or deny messages to terminal mkdir ................................................................................................................................ make a directory mkstr ................ .................. .................. ............................. extract error messages from C source into a file mm .............. ................................................................ ........... print documents formatted with

MM macros more .... .................................. .............................. ....................................... file perusal filter for crt viewing mt ........ .............................................................................................. magnetic tape manipulating program newgrp .... ................ .................................. ........................ ......................................... log in to a new group news ..... ....................................... ............. .......... ......... ........................... ................... ........ print news items nice .. .................................... ........ .................. .............................................. run a command at low priority nl .......... ............................................................... .................... .................................... line numbering filter nm ............................................................................................ print name list (symbol table) of object file nohup .................................................................... run a command immune to hangups, logouts, and quits nroff ........................................................................................................................................... format text od .......... ....................... ........................... ............. ........................................... octal and hexadecimal dump pack .................................................................................................................... compress and expand files pam ...................................................................................... Personal Applications Manager, a visual shell passwd ......................................................... ............................................................. change login password paste ................................................................................................ ........... merge lines in one or more files pc ..... .... ............................... ................................................ ................................................ Pascal compiler pr .......... ............................................ ................... ........... ............................................... ..... .......... print files prealloc ............................................... ................................................... .................. preallocate disc storage prof .................................... .......................... .......................................... ........................ display profile data prs ................................ ........ ........ ........................ ................................... print and summarize an sees file ps .......................... .................................... ........... ........ ... ............... ............................. report process status ptx ................................................................. ....... ....................... ............................. create permuted index pwd ........................................................................................................................ working directory name query .... ........ ........................................................ ........ ................ ......... interactive

IMAGE database access ratfor ................................................................................................................ rational FORTRAN dialect rev...................................... ............................ .......... ................................................... reverse lines of a file revision ...................................................................................................... get HP-UX revision information rm ........................................................................................................................ remove files or directories rmdel ........................................................................................................ remove a delta from an sees file rmnl ...... ................ .............................. ....................................... remove extra new-line characters from file rtprio ................ ............ ........................ ........................ .......... ......... execute process with real-time priority sact .................................................................................................. print current sees file editing activity

-3-

Table of Contents

sccsdiff ...... .................................. .......... .......... ........... ......... .................... compare two versions of sees file sed .............................................................. ................................................................ ..... stream text editor sh .. ........................................ ............................ ......... shell, the standard command programming language size ...................... ............................................................................ ...................................... . object file size sleep .................. ....................................................................................... suspend execution for an interval sip .................................................................................................................... ............... set printer options sort ................ ,......................................................................................................... sort and/or merge files spell ......................................................................................................... ....................... find spelling errors split ................................... ................. ........ ..... .......... ................... .............................. split a file into pieces ssp ...... ............................................................................................ remove multiple line-feeds from output strings .... .......... ............................................ .......................................... find printable strings in binary file strip .................................................................................. .................... remove symbols and relocation bits stty .................................. .......................... ............................................. set the options for a terminal port su ................................................................................................................................ become another user sum ............................................................ .............................. ..... print checksum and block count of a file sync .......................................... ......... ................... ............................. ......... ............. update the super block tabs ....................................... ........ ..................... ........ .................... ........ ................... set tabs on a terminal tail ................................................................................................................... deliver the last part of a file tar ............................................... ....... ........ .................................. ......... ............................ tape file archiver tbl .............................................................. ...................................... ............. format tables for nroff or trofl' tcio ................................................................................................................. CS/80 Cartridge Tape utility tee .......................... ............ ........................................................ ....... ............ ....... ...................... pipe fitting test ............................... ............................. .......... ..... .............. ..................... condition evaluation comman(l time ................................................................................................................................... time a command touch .................................................................................. update access/modification/change times of file tput ............................ ... ................. ........... .......... .................................................. query terminfo database tr .................................................................................................................................. translate characters true .............................................................................................................................. provide truth values tset ............................................. ................................ ................... ........... terminal dependent initialization tsort ..................................................................................................................................... topological sort tty .......................................................................................................................... get the terminal's name ul . ......................................................................................................................................... do underlining umask ................................................................................................................ set file-creation mode mask uname .................... ............................ .............................. .................. print name of current HP-UX version unget ...................... .................... ...................................................... ..... undo a previous get of an sees file uniq ............................................ .......................... ...................... .................... report repeated lines in a file units ................................................................. , ................ .... ......................... ....... unit conversion program upm .................... .................... .......................................... .................. unpack cpio archives from

media uucp ...................................................................................................... HP-UX to HP-UX copy; file transfer uuls .......................................................................... list spooled uucp transactions grouped by transaction uusnap .................................... .......... ........ .............. .............................. show snapshot of the uuep system uustat ........................ ................................ ........................................... uucp status inquiry and job control uuto .......................................................................................................... public HP-UX-to-HP-UX file copy uux .................................................................................................... HP-UX to HP-UX command execution val .................................................................................................................................... validate sees file vi .................................... .... ...................... .......... .......... ............................ ................. ....... visual text editor vis .................... ..................................................... make unprintable characters in a file visible or invisible wait .... ........... ...... ........ ........... .......... .......... .......... .................. .......................... await completion of process wc ...................... ........... ............... ............. .......... ........... .................. ........... word, line, and character count what .................................................................... .......... .................. ....... identify files for sees information whereis ........................................................................... locate source, binary, and/or manual for program who ............................................................................................................... which users are on the system whoami .............. ........................ .................... .......... ...................................... print effective current user id write ............................................................................................. interactively write (talk) to another user xargs .................... ............................ ........ ....................... construct argument list( s) and execute command

-4-

Table of Contents yacc ................................ .......................... ................... ...... ............ ............... yet another compiler-compiler

1M. System Maintenance Utilities accept ... .............................................................................................. ............ allow or prevent LP requests acct .......................................................... overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands acctcms ................................................................ command summary from per-process accounting records acctcon .................................................................................................................. connect-time accounting acctmerg .... ......... ...................................... ................... .......................... merge or add total accounting files acctprc ...... .................... ........................... ...... .............. ................................................... process accounting acctsh ............................................................... ............. .............................. shell procedures for accounting backup .......... ............. ..... .......... ........................................ ............................. backup or archive file system brc ............................................................................................................ system initialization shell scripts captoinfo ............................................................ convert a termcap description into a terminfo description catman .............................. .......... ................................................... ......... create the cat files for the manual chroot ......... ......... ............ ......... .................. ............................ ........... change root directory for a command chsys .................... ........... ... ............................................ .... change to different operating system or version c1ri ............................. ...... .......................... ............. ................................................................... clear i-node c1rsvc ....................................................................................................... clear x.25 switched virtual circuit config ................................................................................................................ configure an

HP-UX system cpset ......... ....................... ........................ ......... ......... .......... ............ install object files in binary directories cron ........... ........................... ........ ............................. ........ ................................................ ..... clock daemon devnm .................. ........ ........... ........ ........ .......... .................. ..................... ................... ...... ........ device name df ..................................... ................. ......... ......... ..................................... report number of free disk blocks diskusg ............................... ..................... ..................................... generate disc accounting data by user ID fsck .... ......................................................... ......... .............. file system consistency check, interactive repair fsclean ........................................................... ................. determine shutdown status of specified file system fsdb .................................. ......... ................................................................................... file system debugger fwtmp ................................................... .......................................... ............... ...... manipulate wtmp records getty .. ................. .......... .......................... ............................. .................. ........... set the modes of a terminal getx25 .............................. , ........................ ........................... ............ ......................................... get x.25 line init ................................... ............... ................................................. ................ process control initialization install ................................................... ................... .................... ................................ ..... install commands kermit ............................................................................................. KERMIT-protocol file transfer program killall ...... ......... ................... ........... ................ .......... ............................. ...... send signal to all user processes link ..... ......................... .............. ....... ......... .......... .................... ......... ... exercise link and unlink system calls

Ipadmin ............................ ........................... ....... ................................... administer the LP spooling system

Ipsched ................................................................... start/stop the LP request scheduler and move requests makekey ..................................................................... ............................. .......... ..... generate encryption key mkdev ....... ........ ............ ........ ................... ........................... ........... .......... .......... ................ make device files mkfs ........................................... ....................................................... ............. ........... construct a file system mklp ............. ............. ................. ................. ........ ...... ....... .......................... configure the

LP spooler system mknod .......................................................... ............................................................ create special, fifo, files mount ...................................................................................... .................. mount and unmount file system mvdir .................... .................... ................... .......... ............................... ......... ...... ............. move a directory ncheck .................................................................... .................................... generate names from i-numbers newfs ..... ............................. ................. ....................................... .......... ........ ..... construct a new file system opx25 ................. ................ ....................... ........................................ ................. execute

HALGOL programs osck ............................................................................................ check integrity of as in SDF boot area(s) oscp .................................................................................... copy, create, append to, split operating system osmark ............................ .... ........................................................ mark SDF as file as loadable/unloadable osmgr .................................. ............................ ............ ........ operating system manager package description pwck ............... ......... .......... ......... ................. ......... ............................. ........... .. password/group file checkers reboot ...................................... ........................................................................................ reboot the system

-5-

Table of Contents revck .................................................................................. check internal revision numbers of HP-UX files rootmark ............................................................................... mark/unmark volume as HP-UX root volume runacct ............ .......................................................................... ....................... ........... run daily accounting sdfinit ......................... ................................... ...................... initialize Structured Directory Format volume setmnt .......... ......... ..... ................ ..................... ....... ................... ............................... establish mnttab table setprivgrp ................................................... ...... ........................................... set special attributes for group shutdown ........ ..................... ................. .......... ........ ....................................... ......... terminate all processing stopsys ........................ ........ ...................................................... stop operating system with optional reboot swapon ....................... ................................. .................. enable additional devices for swapping and paging

'syncer ...... ....... ............ ................ ............ ......... ......... .................... periodically sync for file system integrity tic ....... ................. ................... .................... ........ .......... ................... ................... ........ ..... terminfo compiler tunefs ......................... ............................. ................. ........................................................ tune a file system uconfig ................................................. .......... .................. .......... ............................ ... system reconfiguration umodem ............................................................................ ........ ....

XMODEM protocol file transfer program untic ..................................................... ....... ....... ....................... .................................. terminfo de-compiler uucico ................................................................................................................ uucp copy in and copy out uuclean .......................................................................................................... uucp spool directory clean-up uusub .......................................... ..................... ......................... ............ .................... monitor uucp network uuxqt ................................................................................................................... uucp command execution wall ................................................................................................................................... write to all users whodo ............................................................................................................... which users are doing what

2. System Calls access ............................................................ .......................... ........... .......... determine accessibility of a file alarm ..................................................................................................................... set process's alarm clock brk ........................................................... .................................... ...... change data segment space allocation chdir .......... ..................... ............................ ......... ........ ......... .......... ......... ............. change working directory chmod ..... .......... ..................... .......... .......... .......... ...... .......... ................... ......... ... change access mode of file chown . .......... ......... ................... .................... ................... ................... ...... change owner and group of a file chroot .. ................ ...................................... .................. ......... ............................ .......... change root directory close ........... ............... ................................ ....... ................. .......................................... close a file descriptor creat ............................................................. .......................... ............... create new file, rewrite existing file dup ............................ ..................... .............................. ............................. duplicate an open file descriptor dup2 .. ........................................................................................................ duplicate an open file descriptor ems ....... .......... ....... ............ ......... .................. .................. ...................... .............. Extended Memory System errinfo ............................................................................... .............................. ...................... error indicator errno .............................................. ................... .................... ................... .... error indicator for system calls exec ............... ............................ ........... ....... .......................................................... ..... ............. execute a file exit ................................................................................. .......... ........................................ terminate process fcnt! ................... ....... .......... .................... ........ ......... ... ...... ........ .............................. ......... ........ ... file control fork . ............................................................... .................... .......................................... create a new process fsync ......................... ...................................................... synchronize a file's in-core state with that on disc ftime ... ...... ........ ..................... .......................... .......... ....... ..................... ... get date and time more precisely get groups ... .......... ....................................... ....... .......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ............ get group access list gethostname ........ ....... .... ......... .................. ........ ........... ........ .......... ......... .......... .... get name of current host getitimer ............................................ ........................................................... get/set value of interval timer getpid ....................... ..................................................... get process, process group, and parent process IDs getprivgrp .............................................................................................. get/set special attributes for group gettimeofday ...... ...... ............ ...................................................................................... get/set date and time getuid .................................................................................. get real/effective user, real/effective group IDs ioct! ................................................................... ..................................................................... control device kill .... .......... ............................ ........... .......... ......... .......... .............................. ......... send signal to process( s) link .... .......... ......... ..................................... .................. ..................... ......... ................... ............ link to a file

-6-

Table of Contents

lockf ...... ..................... ...... .................. ........ ........... .............. provide semaphores and record locking on files lseek .................................................................................. ...................... move read/write file pointer; seek memadvise .......... .................. ................................................... advise OS about segment reference patterns memallc ...................................................... ................................................. allocate and free address space memchmd ........................................................................................ change memory segment access modes memlck ...................................... ........ ................................... lock/unlock process address space or segment memvary ............ ........................... ............ ........................ ....................................... modify segment length mkdir .......................................................................................................................... create a directory file mknod .................................................................................. ........... make directory, special or ordinary file mount . ....................................... ........ ................................ ........................ ................... mount a file system msgcti .................................................................... .... ........ ................................ message control operations msgget ............................................................................................................................. get message queue msgop ..... ......... ... ................ ........................... ........ ............ ............................................ message operations nice ........................................ ........................................................................... change priority 'of a process open .................... .................. ....................................................................... open file for reading or writing pause ....................................... .................................... ...... .......................... ..... suspend process until signal pipe ............................................................................................................. create an inter-process channel plock ........................................ .......................................... ................ lock process, text, or data in memory prealloc ........................................................ ..... ........... ..................................... preallocate fast disc storage profil .......................................................................................................................... execution time profile ptrace ...................................................................................................................................... process trace read ........................................................................................................................................ read from file reboot ................. ................... .......................................................................................... reboot the system rmdir ........................................................................................................................ remove a directory file rtprio ........................................................................................................ change or read real-time priority select ............................................................................................................. synchronous I/O multiplexing semctl ......... ........ ........................................................................................... semaphore control operations semget ........................................................................................................................ get set of semaphores semop .................. ............ ....................... ..................... ........... .................. ......... ........ semaphore operations setgroups ....................................................... ............................................................... set group access list sethostname ............................................................................................ .................... set name of host cpu setpgrp ......................................................................................................................... set process group ID setuid ....................................................................................................................... set user and group IDs shmctl ..................................................................................................... shared memory control operations shmget ............................................................................................................. get shared memory segment shmop ................................................................................................................. shared memory operations sigblock .................................................................................................................................... block signals signal ..................................................................................................... set up signal handling for program sigpause ........................................................... automatically release blocked signals and wait for interrupt sigsetmask ............................................................................................................... set current signal mask sigspace .................................................................................................. assure sufficient signal stack space sigvector .............. ......................... ...................................... .................................... software signal facilities stat ......................................................................................................................................... get file status stime ................................................................................................................................ set time and date stty ........................................................................................................................................ control device swapon ......................................................................... add a swap device for interleaved paging/signalling sync ......................................................................................................................... update the super block time ................................................................................................................................................ get time times ............................................ ........................................ ................. get process and child process times trapno ..................................................................................................................... hardware trap numbers truncate ................................................................................................. truncate a file to a specified length ulimit ........................................................................................................................ get and set user limits umask ............. ........ .................................... .......................... ........... .............. get and set file creation mask umount ..................................................................................................................... unmount a file system uname .................................................................................................... get name of current HP-UX system

-7-

Table of Contents

unlink .......................................... ................... ......................................... remove directory entry; delete file ustat ........................................... ........................ .................................................... get file system statistics utime .... ....... ........ ......... .......... ........... ................... ......... ......... ............ set file access and modification times vfork ..... ....... .... ... ..... ..... .... ...... ........ ... ...... ... .......... ..... spawn new process in a virtual memory efficient way vsadv .......................................... ................... ............................... advise system about backing store usage vson .................................................. ............................................... advise as about backing store devices wait ................ .................... ........ ......... ......... ......... ........... ...... ........... ..... wait for child process to terminate write ...................................................................................................................................... write on a file

3. Subroutines

a641 .... ........ .......... .......... ...... ........... ............................. ......... ........ convert between long and base-64 ASCII abort ........ .................................. ........................................ ........................................ generate an rOT fault abs .............................................. ............................................. .................................. integer absolute value assert ......... ....... ...... ..... .......... ..... ............ ........ ............ ....... .......... .......... .............. ........ program verification atof ................... ................. ......... ............. ........ ........... ........ .......... ......... .............. convert ASCII to numbers bessel ...... ......... ...... ............ ......... ... ........ ........ ........ .......... ........ ......... ..... ....... ....... ............ .... bessel functions bsearch ... ....... ........... ..... ............. .......... ......... .......... ................... ......... ........ binary search on a sorted table catread .............. ....................................... ......... ........................... MPEjRTE-style message catalog support clock . ........ ................ ..... ....... .......... .......... ......... .......... .................. ................. ... ........ report CPU time used conv ...... ........... ....... ......... .......... ............................ ................. ........... ......... ................ character translation crypt .................................................................................................................................... DES encryption ctermid ..................... ........... ........ ......... ................... .................. ... ....... ........ generate file name for terminal ctime ........ ...... ........... ......... ................... ......... .......... ................................... convert date and time to ASCII ctype .......... ........ .......... .......... ................. ......... ........... ......... ......... ........ ... ........ ... ..... character classification curses ................................................................................ CRT screen handling and optimization routines cuserid ...... .................. .......... ........ ............. .................... .............. .......... .... character login name of the user dial....... ........ ....... ............ ..................... ......... ...... ........... .... establish an out-going terminal line connection directory ... ........ .......... ........... ..... ............ ........ ............ ....... ........ ......... .......... ................ directory operations drand48 ............. .................................................... generate uniformly-distributed pseudo-random numbers ecvt ......... ........ .......... ........... ................. ................... ........ .......... .......... ........ .................... output conversion end ...... ......... ........ ........... ................. ..... ..... ... ....... ........... ....... .......... ..................... last locations in program erf . ........ .............................................. ......... ....... ... .......... error function and complementary error function exp ............................................................................. exponential, logarithm, power, square root functions fclose . ........... ........ .......... .................. ..................................... ............................. ....... close or flush a stream ferror ...... ..... .................. .............................. ....... ............ ...... .......... .......... .......... stream file status inquiries floor ................................................................................. absolute value, floor, ceiling, remainder functions fopen ......................................................... '" ................ open or re-open a stream file; convert file to stream fread ...................................................................................... buffered binary input/output to a stream file frexp ......................................................................................................... split into mantissa and exponent fseek .......... ........ ......... ........... ........ ......... .......... .... ...... ................................................ .... reposition a stream ftw ... ......... ......... ......... ................... ........... .......... ................. ........ ...................... ................... walk a file tree gamma ............ .................. ... ........ ......... ........ .................... ................ .......... ............... ... log gamma function getc .. ............ ....... ......... .............................. ........ .................... .......... get character or word from stream file getcwd .. ...... ....................... ................ ......... ......................... ...... get pathname of current working directory getenv ........................................................ ..... ......................................... ........ value for environment name getfsent ........................... ....................................................................... get file system descriptor file entry getgrent ................................... ............................................ ...................... .................... get group file entry getlogin ......... ........ .......... .................. ................... .................. ......... ................... ............. ...... get login name getmsg .. ...... ........... ............................ ......... .......... .................. .......... .......... ....... get message from a catalog getopt ............... ........... ................... ......... .......... ......... ........ ........... .................... get option letter from argv getpass .................. .......... ......... .......... ......... .......... .................. .......... .......... ....................... read a password getpw .......... ......................... ....... ..... ......... ........................... ........... ........................... .... get name from urD getpwent ..... ............ ......................... ... ........ .................... ...... ..... .......... .................... get password file entry

-8-

Table of Contents

gets ............. ......... ...... .................... ......... ............ ............................ .............. get a string from a stream file getut .................................... .......................................... ............................................ access utmp file entry gpio_get--status ........................................................................................ return status lines of

GPIO card gpio--set_ctl ........................................................................................ ........ set control lines on

GPIO card hpib_abort .................................................. .......... .............................. stop activity on specified HP-IB bus hpib_bus--status ................................................................. ...................... return status of HP-IB interface hpib_carLppoIL...resp ............................................................... control response to parallel poll on HP-IB hpib_eoi_ctl .............................................................................................. control EO! mode for HP-IB file hpib-.io ............................................................................ perform

I/O with an HP-IB channel from buffers hpib_pass_ctl ..................................... ........ ............. ............................. change active controllers on HP-IB hpib_ppoll ........................ ........ ................................ ............................. conduct parallel poll on HP-IB bus hpib_ppoll-I"esp_ctl .................................................................. control response to parallel poll on HP-IB hpib-I"en_ctl ......................................................................... ...... control the Remote Enable line on HP-IB hpib-I"qst--srvce ........ .......................................................... .... allow interface to enable SRQ line on HP-IB hpib--senLcmnd ..................................................... ................................ send command bytes over HP-IB hpib--spoll .................................................... .......... ................................ conduct a serial poll on HP-IB bus hpib--status_wait .................................................. wait until the requested status condition becomes true hpib_wait_on_ppoll ........................................................ wait until a particular parallel poll value occurs hsearch ....... ...................... ....... ............................ ...... ..... ................ .......... ... ....... manage hash search tables hypot ......... .................... ........ ......... ......... ..... .......................................... ........................ Euclidean distance initgroups ......................................... ................... ................................................. initialize group access list intrapoff ................................................................................................ disable/enable integer trap handler io_burst ........................................ ......... ................... ......... perform low-overhead

I/O on an HP-IB channel io_eol_ctl ....... ....... ................... ......... .......... ........ ............. set up read termination character on special file io_get_terffi-I"eason ....... ......... ............ ................ ................... ......... ... determine how last read terminated io-.interrupt_ctl ....................................................................... enable/disable interrupts for associated eid io_oD-interrupt .......................................................................................... device interrupt (fault) control iO-I"eset ..................................................................................................................... reset an I/O interface io--speeLctl ...... ................. ......... ... ........ ........ ............ ....... .......... inform system of required transfer speed io_timeout_ctl ................................................................................ establish time limit for I/O operations io_width_ctl ................................................ ............................................................ set width of data path l3tol ............................................................... ................. convert between 3-byte integers and long integers langinfo ................ ......................... ....................................... ........ ............ NLS native language information logname ... ............................ .......... ........ .............................. ......... ........... ........ ..... return login name of user lsearch .............................. ..................................................................................... linear search and update malloc .............. ....... ........... ........ .............................. ............... ........... ...................... main memory allocator matherr ..................................... ...................................................................... mathematical error handling memory . ........ ......... ......................... .................... .................... ........ ... ......... ................... memory operations mktemp ......... ......................... ............................... .................. .......... ......... ........... make a unique file name monitor ... ...................................................... ........................................................ prepare execution profile nLconv . ....................................................... .................................... translate characters for use with NLS nLctype . ......... ....... ....... ........... ....... ... ................... ................... ........... classify characters for use with NLS ni--String ...... .............. ..................... ................... ........................... . non-ASCII string collation used by NLS nlist ................................. ................. ............. .................................. .................... get entries from name list perror ... ................. .................. ......... ................... ..................................... ................. system error messages popen .................................................................................................... initiate pipe I/O to/from a process printf ..................... ........................................ ....... ........................................................... output formatters printmsg ................ ........................................ ...... .......... print formatted output with numbered arguments putc .................................................. ................... ................... ... ............ put character or word on a stream putenv ................................................................................................. change or add value to environment putpwent .............................. .......... ............... ........................................................ write password file entry puts ...... .................................................................................... ....................... put a string on a stream file qsort ....... ...... ........... ........... ....... ............................. ............................................. .... ...... ............ quicker sort rand ........ ............ ................. .................. .......... .......... ................... ................... ... random number generator regcmp ......... ............................................. ...................................... compile and execute regular expression

-9-

Table of Contents scanf ............................................................. .................. formatted input conversion, read from stream file setbuf .................................................................................................... ...... assign buffering to a stream file setjmp ............. ............................................................................................. ........... ............... non-local goto sinh ...................................................................... .................. ...................................... hyperbolic functions sleep ................................................. ............. ............................ .................... suspend execution for interval sputl .................................................................... access long integer data in machine-independent manner ssignal ...................................... ........................................................................................... software signals stdio ............................................................................ standard buffered input/output stream file package stdipc ............................... ................. ................................. stamdard inter-process communication package string ................................................................................................................. character string operations strtod .......................................................................................... convert string to double-precision integer strtol ...................................................................................................................... convert string to integer swab .................................................... ....................................................................................... swap bytes system ................................................................ ....................................................... issue a shell command termcap ....................................................................................... access terminal capabilities in termcap(5) tmpfile ............. ....................................... .................................................................. create a temporary file tmpnam ........ .......... .................... ........ .............................. ........ ........ ...... create a name for a temporary file trig .......................................................................................................................... trigonometric functions tsearch .............................................................................................................. manage binary search trees ttyname ........................ ................ ............................ .............................................. find name of a terminal ttyslot .................................. ...................... .............................................. find current user slot in utmp file ungetc .................................................... ...................... .................... push character back into input stream vprintf ................................ .......................................... print formatted output from varargs argument list

4. Special Files ct ................ ................... ..................................... ............................... ................

CS/80 cartridge tape access disc ..................................... ................................................................................... ........... direct disc access graphics ........................................................ ........................................ information for crt graphics devices hpib ............................................. ................ ....................................... ................ hpib interface information iomap ................................................................................................................... physical address mapping lp .......................... ...... ................................................. ................ ........ .......................... printer information mem .............................. .......................................................................................................... core memory modem .................................... ............................ ........................... asynchronous serial modem line control mt .............................................. .................. ............................ ........... magnetic tape interface and controls null ......................................................... ........... ....................................................... null file ("bit bucket") pty ........................................................................................................................... pseudo-terminal driver sttyv6 ................................................................................ version 6/PWD-compatibility terminal interface termio .. ...... .............. ....... ................ ... .............................................. .................... general terminal interface tty ......................................... ......... ................................................................ controlling terminal interface

5. File Formats a.out ......................................................................................................... assembler and link editor output acct ......................................................................................................... per-process accounting file format ar ........................................ ......... ......... ....... ............................... ......... ................. .......... archive file format bif .................................................................. ...................................... Bell Interchange Format file utilties checklist .... ........................................................ ................................... list of file systems processed by fsck coL..seq_8 ............................ ..................................... collating sequence tables for 8-bit NLS character sets coL..seq_16 ............................................................. collating sequence tables for 16-bit

NLS character sets core .............................................................................. .......................................... format of core image file cpio ........................................................................................................................... format of cpio archive dialups ..... .... ............... ............. ........ .............. .............. ........ ........................... .......... dialup security control

-10-

Table of Contents dir ...................................... ...... .................................................................................. SDF directory format disktab ............ .......... .................................... ...................................... ..................... ...... disc description file errfile ......... .... ..... ................... ................... .......... ..................................... ............... system error logging file fs ...................... ......................... ....... ................... .......... ............................... ......... format of system volume fspec ............ ................................. ............ .................. ....... ... ...................... format specification in text files gettydefs ............................................................................. speed and terminal settings used by getty(lM) group ............................... ................................................. ...................................... ...................... group file inittab ........................................................................................................ control information for init(lM) inode ..................... .............. ...................... ...... .............. .............. ........... ......... ......... ...... format of an i-node issue .......................................... ........................................ ........................................ issue identification file lif ..................................... ........................................................ ...... Logical Interchange Format description magic ....................................................................................... magic numbers for HP-UX implementations master ......... ........................... .......... ........ ........... ..................... ....... ........... master device information table mknod ................................ ......... ......... ..... ...... .................. .................................... create a special file entry mnttab ........ ................................ ............. .................. .......... ............................... mounted file system table model . ................ ........ ............................... ..................................................... HP-UX machine identification nlist ......................... ..... ............................ ...... ............................ ................................ nlist structure format passwd .................. ............ ......... ......... ........ ............. ................. ................. .................. ............ password file privgrp ........... ........ ...................................... ......... .................. ............................... privileged values format profile . ........... ..... ................... ... ...... .......... ................................ ...... set up user's environment at login time ranlib .................... ............................ ........ ........... ... .................. table of contents format for object libraries sccsfile ...................... .................................... .............. .................................. ... ......... ...... format of

SCCS file term ... ............... ............................................. ............................ .......................... compiled term file format terminfo .......................................................................................................... terminal capability data base ttytype ................................................................................................. data base of terminal types by port utmp ................................ ................................................................ ............. utmp and wtmp entry format

6. Games

No games are currently supported.

7. Miscellaneous Facilities ascii ............ ......................................................................................... .............. map of

ASCII character set environ .... ......................... ......... .... ......... ......................... .................. ... ....... ... ..... ......... .... user environment fcnt! .... ...................... ............ ......................... ...................... ................. .................... ...... file control options hier .......... ................. ...................................... .......... ................................................... file system hierarchy hpnls ......................................................................................................... Native Language Support model kana8 ........ ........................ ........................ ............ ...... ................ map of

KANAS character set used by

NLS langid .......................... .................................... ....................... language identification variable used by

NLS man .......................................................... ........ ...................... macros for formatting entries in this manual math.. ......... ............................................... ....... ........... ........... ....................... math functions and constants mm .............. ................................................................... the

MM macro package for formatting documents regexp ............ ........................ ........ ..................................... regular expression compile and match routines roman8 .................... ........................................ .................. ..................

ROMANS character set used by

NLS stat ................................................................................................. data returned by stat/fstat system call term ............... ........................................... .................... ............... .... .................. conventional device names types .................................................... ............................................................ primitive system data types values. ................................. ......... ......... .... ... ............... ....... ........... ....... ......... ...... machine-dependent values varargs ........................................................................................................... handle-variable-argument list

-11-

Table of Contents

9. Glossary

-12-

INTRO(3) INTRO(3)

,~~'

NAME intro - introduction to subroutines and libraries

SYNOPSIS

#include <stdio.h>

#include <math.h>

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

The level given is the level for which the library is available, not the level at which the linkable object code appears. The supporting host will contain appropriate libraries for HP-UX/RUN ONLY and HP-UX/NUCLEUS systems.

Origin: System III, System V, UCB

DESCRIPTION

This section describes functions found in various libraries, other than those functions that directly invoke HP-UX system primitives, which are described in Section 2 of this volume. Certain major collections are identified by a letter after the section number:

(3C) These functions, together with those of Section 2 and those marked (3S), constitute the

Standard C Library

llbc,

which is automatically loaded by the C compiler,

cc(l).

The link editor

Id(l)

searches this library under the -Ic option. Declarations for some of these functions may be obtained from #include files indicated on the appropriate pages.

(3M) These functions constitute the Math Library,

libm.

They are automatically loaded as needed by the FORTRAN compiler /77(1). They are not automatically loaded by the C compiler,

cc(l);

however, the link editor searches this library under the -1m option.

Declarations for these functions may be obtained from the #include file <math.h>.

Several generally useful mathematical constants are also defined there (see

math(5».

(3N) These functions constitute the networking library,

libn.

The link editor searches this library under the -In option. Declarations for these functions can be obtained from the

#include file <stdio.h>.

(3S) These functions constitute the "standard I/O package" (see

stdio(3S».

These functions are in the library

libc,

already mentioned. Declarations for these functions may be obtained from the #include file <stdio.h>.

(3X) Various specialized libraries. The files in which these libraries are found are given on the appropriate pages.

DEFINITIONS

character

is any bit pattern able to fit into a byte on the machine. The

null character

is a character with value 0, represented in the C language as '\0'. A

character array

is a sequence of characters. A

null-terminated character array

is a sequence of characters, the last of which is the

null character.

string

is a designation for a

nul/-terminated character array.

The

null string

is a character array containing only the null character. A NULL pointer is the value that is obtained by casting 0 into a pointer. The C language guarantees that this value will not match that of any legitimate pointer, so many functions that return pointers return it to indicate an error. NULL is defined as 0 in <stdio.h>; the user can include an appropriate definition if not using <stdio.h>.

FILES

/lib/libc.a

/lib /libm.a

/lib/libn.a

SEE ALSO intro(2), stdio(3S), math(5). ar(l), cc(l),

m(l),

Id(l), lintel), nm(l), ranlib(l), intro(2), stdio(3S).

DIAGNOSTICS

Functions in the C and Math Libraries (3C and 3M) may return the conventional values 0 or

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

INTRO(3) INTRO(3)

±HUGE (the largest-magnitude single-precision floating-point numbers; HUGE is defined in the

<math.h>

header file) when the function is undefined for the given arguments or when the value is not representable. In these cases, the external variable

ermo

(see

errno(2))

is set to the value

EDOM or

ERANGE.

WARNING

Many of the functions in the libraries call and/or refer to other functions and external variables described in this section and in section 2

(SY8tem Call8).

If a program inadvertantIy defines a function or external variable with the same name, the presumed library version of the function or external variable may not be loaded. The

lint(l)

program checker reports name conflicts of this kind as "multiple declarations" of the names in question. Definitions for sections 2, 3C, and 38 are checked automatically. Other definitions can be included by nsing the -1 option (for example,

-1m

includes definitions for the Math Library, section 3M). Use of

lint

is highly recommended.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

A64L(3C)

A64L (3C)

NAME a641, l64a - convert between long integer and base-64 ASCII string

SYNOPSIS long a641 (s) char *8j char *164a (I) long Ij

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

These functions are used to maintain numbers stored in

base-64

ASCII characters. This is a notation by which long integers can be represented by up to six characters; each character represents a "digit" in a radix-64 notation.

The characters used to represent "digits" are . for 0, / for 1, 0 through 9 for 2-11, A through Z for 12-37, and a through z for 38-63.

The leftmost character is the least significant digit. For example, aD

(38 x 64°)+ (2 x 64

166

A641

takes a pointer to a null-terminated base-64 representation and returns a corresponding long value. If the string pointed to by s contains more than six characters,

a641

will use the first six.

L64a

takes a long argument and returns a pointer to the corresponding base-64 representation.

If the argument is 0,

164a

returns a pointer to a null string.

BUGS

The value returned by

164a

is a pointer into a static buffer, the contents of which are overwritten by each call.

Hewlett-Packard

-1July 2, 1985

ABORT(3C) ABORT(3C)

NAME abort - generate an IOT fault

SYNOPSIS int abort ( )

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUNONL Y

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

Abort

first closes all open files if possible, then causes the SIGIOT signal to be sent to the process.

This usually results in termination with a core dump.

It is possible for

abort

to return control if SIGIOT is caught or ignored, in which case the value returned is that of the

kiU(2)

system call.

SEE ALSO adb(l), exit(2), kill(2), signal(2).

DIAGNOSTICS

If SIGIOT is neither caught nor ignored, and the current directory is writable, a core dump is produced and the message "abort - core dumped" is written by the shell.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

ABS(3C)

NAME abs - return integer absolute value

SYNOPSIS iut abs (i) iut i;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

Abs

returns the absolute value of its integer operand.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/500 and Integral Personal Computer:

The largest negative integer recognized by the system returns itself.

SEE ALSO

/usr/include/ndir.h, close(2), Iseek(2), open(2), read(2).

DIRECTORY (3C)

Hewlett-Packard

- 2 -

November 15, 1985

DRAND48 (

3C)

DRAND48 (

3C)

NAME

drand48, erand48, Irand48, nrand48, mrand48, jrand48, srand48, seed48, lcong48 - generate uniformly distributed pseudo-random numbers

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

SYNOPSIS

double drand48 ( )

double erand48 (xsubi) unsigned short xsubi[3];

long Irand48 ( )

long nrand48 (xsubi) unsigned short xsubi[3];

long mrand48 ( )

long jrand48 (xsubi) unsigned short xsubi[3]; void srand48 (seedval) long seedval; unsigned short *seed48 (seed16v) unsigned short seed16v[3]; void Icong48 (param) unsigned short param[7];

DESCRIPTION

This family of functions generates pseudo-random numbers using the well-known linear congruential algorithm and 48-bit integer arithmetic.

Functions drand48 and erand48 return non-negative double-precision lioating-point values uniformly distributed over the interval $[0.0,-1.0).$

Functions Irand48 and nrand48 return non-negative long integers uniformly distributed over the interval $[0,-2 sup 31 ).$

Functions mrand48 and jrand48 return signed long integers uniformly distributed over the interval $[-2 sup 31 , -2 sup 31 ).$

Functions srand48, seed48 and Icong48 are initialization entry points, one of which should be invoked before either drand48, Irand48 or mrand48 is called. (Although it is not recommended practice, constant default initializer values will be supplied automatically if drand48, Irand48 or

mrand48

is called without a prior call to an initialization entry point.) Functions erand48,

nrand48

and jrand48 do not require an initialization entry point to be called first.

All the routines work by generating a sequence of 48-bit integer values, $X sub i ,$ according to the linear congruential formula

X sub{n+1} -=-(aX sub n' + 'c) sub {roman mod-m} --------n>=O.

The parameter $m'='2 sup 48$; hence 48-bit integer arithmetic is performed. Unless Icong48 has been invoked, the multiplier value $a$ and the addend value $c$ are given by a-mark =-roman 5DEECE66D'sub 16-=-roman 273673163155'sub 8 c-lineup =-roman B'sub 16-=-roman 13'sub 8.

Hewlett-Packard -1July 2, 1985

DRAND48 (

3C )

DRAND48

(3C)

The value returned by any of the functions drand48, erand48, lrand48, nrand48, mrand48 or

jrand48

is computed by first generating the next 48-bit $X sub i$ in the sequence. Then the appropriate number of bits, according to the type of data item to be returned, are copied from the high-order (leftmost) bits of $X sub i$ and transformed into the returned value.

The functions drand48, Irand48 and mrand48 store the last 48-bit $X sub i$ generated in an internal buffer; that is why they must be initialized prior to being invoked. The functions

erand48, nrand48

and jrand48 require the calling program to provide storage for the successive

$X sub i$ values in the array specified as an argument when the functions are invoked. That is why these routines do not have to be initialized; the calling program merely has to place the desired initial value of $X sub i$ into the array and pass it as an argument. By using different arguments, functions erand48, nrand48 and jrand48 allow separate modules of a large program to generate several independent streams of pseudo-random numbers, i.e., the sequence of numbers in each stream will not depend upon how many times the routines have been called to generate numbers for the other streams.

The initializer function srand48 sets the high-order 32 bits of $X sub i$ to the 32 bits contained in its argument. The low-order 16 bits of $X sub i$ are set to the arbitrary value $roman 330E sub 16 .$

The initializer function seed48 sets the value of $X sub i$ to the 48-bit value specified in the argument array. In addition, the previous value of $X sub i$ is copied into a 48-bit internal buffer, used only by seed48, and a pointer to this buffer is the value returned by seed48. This returned pointer, which can just be ignored if not needed, is useful if a program is to be restarted from a given point at some future time use the pointer to get at and store the last $X sub i$ value, and then use this value to reinitialize via seed48 when the program is restarted.

The initialization function Icong48 allows the user to specify the initial $X sub i ,$ the multiplier value $a,$ and the addend value $c.$ Argument array elements param[O-2} specify $X sub i ,$

param[3-5}

specify the multiplier $a,$ and param[6} specifies the 16-bit addend $c.$ After

/cong48

has been called, a subsequent call to either srand48 or seed48 will restore the "standard" multiplier and addend values, $a$ and $c,$ specified on the previous page.

SEE

ALSO

rand(3C).

Hewlett-Packard -2July 2, 1985

ECVT(3C)

NAME ecvt, fcvt, gcvt, IIL-gcvt - convert floating-point number to string

SYNOPSIS char *ecvt (value, ndigit, decpt, sign) double valuej int ndigit, *decpt, *signj char *fcvt (value, ndigit, decpt, sign) double value; int ndigit, *decpt, *signj char *gcvt (value, ndigit, bu£) double value; int ndigitj char *bufj char *nLgcvt (value, ndigit, buf, langid) double value; int ndigitj char *bufj int langid;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

Native Language Support:

8-bit data, customs, messages

DESCRIPTION

Ecvt

converts value to a null-terminated string of ndigit digits and returns a pointer thereto.

The high-order digit is non-zero, unless the value is zero. The low-order digit is rounded. The position of the decimal point relative to the beginning of the string is stored indirectly through

decpt

(negative means to the left of the returned digits). The decimal point is not included in the returned string.

If the sign of the result is negative, the word pointed to by sign is non-zero, otherwise it is zero.

Fevt

is identical to eevt, except that the correct digit has been rounded for printf "%f" (FOR-

TRAN F-format) output of the number of digits specified by ndigit.

Gcvt

converts the value to a null-terminated string in the array pointed to by bul and returns

buf.

It attempts to produce ndigit significant digits in FORTRAN F -format if possible, otherwise

E-format, ready for printing. A minus sign, if there is one, or a decimal point will be included as part of the returned string. Trailing zeros are suppressed.

NLgcvt

differs from gcvt only in that it uses langid to determine what the radix character should be (e.g., '.' or ',').

langid

is not valid, or information for langid has not been installed, the radix character defaults to a period.

SEE ALSO printf(3S), hpnls(7), langid(7).

BUGS

The values returned by ecvt and levt point to a single static data array whose content is overwritten by each call.

Hewlett-Packard -1July 2, 1985

END(3C)

NAME end, etext, edata - last locations in program

SYNOPSIS extern char endj extern char etextj extern char edataj

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

These names refer neither to routines nor to locations with interesting contents. The address of

etext

is the first address above the program text,

edata

above the initialized data region, and

end

above the uninitialized data region. Note that the definition of each of these is implementationdependent. See

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

below.

When execution begins, the program break (the first location beyond the data) coincides with

end,

but the program break may be reset by the routines of

brk(2), malloc(3C),

standard input/output

(stdio(3S»,

the profile

(-p) option of

cc(1),

and so on. Thus, the current value of the program break should be determined by shrk(O) (see

brk(2».

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:

End

is the lowest heap address available to the user.

Etext

and

Edata

are not supported.

Memallc(2)

is more efficient than

malloc(3C)

for setting the program break.

SEE ALSO cc(1), brk(2), malloc(3C), stdio(3S).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 -

July 2, 1985

ERF(3M)

NAME erf, erfc - error function and complementary error function

SYNOPSIS

#include <math.h> double erf (x) double x; double erfc (x) double x;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

Erf

returns the error function of

defined as . ; ;

t dt.

Er/c,

which returns 1.0 -

erJ(x),

is provided because of the extreme loss of relative accuracy if

erJ(x)

is called for large

and the result subtracted from 1.0 (e.g., for

5, 12 places are lost).

SEE ALSO

Iseek(2), fopen(3S), popen(3S), ungetc(3S).

DIAGNOSTICS

Fseek

returns non-zero for improper seeks, otherwise zero. An improper seek can be, for example, an

/seek

done on a file that has not been opened via

/open;

in particular,

/seek

may not be used on a terminal, or on a file opened via

popen(3S).

Ftell

returns -1 for error conditions.

WARNING

Although on HP-UX an offset returned by

/tell

is measured in bytes, and it is permissible to seek to positions relative to that offset, portability to non-UNIX systems requires that an offset be used by

/seek

directly. Arithmetic malY not meaningfully be performed on such an offset, which is not necessarily measured in bytes.

Hewlett-Packard -1July 2,1985

FTW (3C) FTW(3C)

NAME ftw - walk a file tree

SYNOPSIS

#include <ftw.h> int ftw (path, fn, depth) char *path; int (*fn) ( ); int depth;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

Ftw

recursively descends the directory hierarchy rooted in

path.

For each object in the hierarchy,

Itw

calls

In,

passing it a pointer to a null-terminated character string containing the name of the object, a pointer to a stat structure (see

stat(2»)

containing information about the object, and an integer. Possible values of the integer, defined in the <ftw.h> header file, are FTWJ for a file,

FTW-.D for a directory, FTW-.DNR for a directory that cannot be read, and

FTW~S for an object for which

stat

could not successfully be executed. If the integer is FTW -.DNR, descendants of that directory will not be processed. If the integer is FTW ~S, the stat structure will contain garbage. An example of an object that would cause FTW~S

would be a file in a directory with read but without execute (search) permission.

Ftw

visits a directory before visiting any of its descendants.

The tree traversal continues until the tree is exhausted, an invocation of

returns a nonzero value, or some error is detected within

Itw

(such as an I/O error). If the tree is exhausted,

Itw

returns zero. If

returns a nonzero value,

Itw

stops its tree traversal and returns whatever value was returned by

In.

Itw

detects an error, it returns -1, and sets the error type in

errna.

Ftw

uses one file descriptor for each level in the tree. The

depth

argument limits the number of file descriptors so used. If

depth

is zero or negative, the effect is the same as if it were 1.

Depth

must not be greater than the number of file descriptors currently available for use. more quickly if

depth

is at least as large as the number of levels in the tree.

Ftw

will run

t,

which matches the format of /etc/passwd.

FILES

/etc/passwd

SEE ALSO getlogin(3C), getgrent(3C), passwd(4).

DIAGNOSTICS

A NULL pointer is returned on EOF or error.

WARNING

The above routines use <stdio.h>, which causes them to increase the size of programs, not otherwise using standard

I/O, more than might be expected.

BUGS

All infonnation is contained in a static area, so it must be copied if it is to be saved.

Hewlett-Packard

-2July 2, 1985

GETS (3B) GETS(3S)

NAME gets, fgets - get a string from a stream

SYNOPSIS

#include <stdio.h> char *gets (s) char *s; char *fgets (s, n, stream) char *s; int n;

FILE *stream;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Gets

reads characters from the standard input stream, std'in, into the array pointed to by s, until a new-line character is read or an end-of-file condition is encountered. The new-line character is discarded and the string is terminated with a null character.

Fgets

reads characters from the stream into the array pointed to by s, until n-l characters are read, or a new-line character is read and transferred to

tered. The string is then terminated with a null character. or an end-of-file condition is encoun-

BEE ALSO ferror(3S), fopen(3S), fread(3S), getc(3S), puts(3S), scanf(3S).

DIAGNOSTICS

If end-of-file is encountered and no characters have been read, no characters are transferred to

and a NULL pointer is returned. If a read error occurs, such as trying to use these functions on a file that has not been opened for reading, a NULL pointer is returned. Otherwise s is returned.

Hewlett-Packard -1July 2, 1985

GETUT(3C)

NAME getutent, getutid, getutline, pututline, setutent, endutent, utmpname - access utmp file entry

SYNOPSIS

#include <types.h>

#include <utmp.h> struct utmp *getutent ( ) struct utmp *getutid (id) struct utmp *idj struct utmp *getutline (line) struct utmp *line; void pututline (utmp) struct utmp *utmpj void setutent ( ) void endutent ( ) void utmpname (file) char *file;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Getutent, getutid and getutline each return a pointer to a structure of the following type: struct utmp { char char char short short struct short short

} ut_exit; ut_userI8]; ut_pid; ut_type;

User login name

*/ uLidl4);

/etc/inittab id (usually line #)

*/ ut~ineI12);

/* device name (console, Inxx)

/* process id

/* type of entry

*/ exit-Btatus { e_termination; e_exit; ut_time;

Process termination status

Process exit status

The exit status of a process

* marked as DEADJROCESS.

/* time entry was made

};

Getutent reads in the next entry from a utmp-like file. If the file is not already open, it opens it.

If it reaches the end of the file, it fails.

Getutid searches forward from the current point in the utmp file until it finds an entry with a

uLtype matching id->uLtype if the type specified is RUNJVL, BOOT_TIME, OLD_TIME or

NEW_TIME. If the type specified in id is INITJROCESS, LOGINJROCESS, USERJROCESS or

DEADJROCESS, then

getutid will return a pointer to the first entry whose type is one of these four and whose uLid field matches id->uLid. If the end of file is reached without a match, it fails.

Getutline searches forward from the current point in the utmp file until it finds an entry of the type LOGINJROCESS or USERJROCESS which also has a ut_line string matching the

llne->ut_line string.

If the end of file is reached without a match, it fails.

Putut/lne writes out the supplied utmp structure into the utmp file .. It uses getutzd to search forward for the proper place if it finds that it is not already at the proper place. It is expected that

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 -

July 2, 1985

GETUT(3C)

GETUT(3C) normally the user of pututline will have searched for the proper entry using one of the getut routines. If so, pututline will not search. If

pututline

does not find a matching slot for the new entry, it will add a new entry to the end of the file.

Setutent

resets the input stream to the beginning of the file. This should be done before each search for a new entry if it is desired that the entire file be examined.

Endutent

closes the currently open file.

Utmpname

allows the user to change the name of the file examined, from /etc/utmp to any other file. It is most often expected that this other file will be /etc/wtmp. If the file does not exist, this will not be apparent until the first attempt to reference the file is made. Utmpname does not open the file. It just closes the old file if it is currently open and saves the new file name.

FILES

/etc/utmp

/etc/wtmp

SEE ALSO

io_orl-interrupt(31)

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 -

November 15, 1985

IO_ON-INTERRUPT (31)

Series 500 Only

IO_ON-INTERRUPT (31)

NAME io_oILinterrupt - device interrupt (fault) control

SYNOPSIS

#include <dvio.h> int (*io_on---.interrupt (eid, causevec, handler))O int eid; struct interrupt-Btruct *causevec; int (*handler)0; handler (eid, causevec) int eid; struct interrupt-Btruct *causevec;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin: HP

Remarks: Io_orl-interrupt is implemented on the Series 500 only.

DESCRIPTION

Eid

is an entity identifier of an open raw HP-IB bus or GPIO device file, obtained from an open(2),

dup(2), /cntl(2),

or creat(2) call.

Causevec

is a pointer to a structure of the form: struct interrupL..struct { int cause; int mask;

};

The interrupLstruct structure is defined in the file dvio.h.

The cause parameter is a bit vector specifying which of the interrupt or fault events will cause the handler routine to be invoked. The interrupt causes are often specific to the type of interface being considered. As well, certain exception ( error) conditions can be handled using the

io_orl-interrupt

capability. Specifying a zero-valued cause vector effectively turns off the interrupts for that eid.

The mask parameter is used when an HP-IB parallel poll interrupt is being defined. Mask is an integer that specifies which parallel poll response lines are of interest. Mask's value is obtained from an 8-bit binary number, each bit of which corresponds to one of the eight lines. For example, if you want an interrupt handler invoked for a response on lines 2 or 6, the correct binary number is 01000100. This converts to a decimal equivalent of 68, which is the number you should assign to

mask.

When an interrupt that is to be caught occurs during a read, write, open, or ioctl system call on a slow device (like a terminal; but not a file), during a pause system call, during a sigpause(2) system call, or during a wait system call that does not return immediately due to the existence of a previously stopped or zombie process, the interrupt handling function will be executed and the interrupted system call will return a -1 to the calling process with ermo set to EINTR.

Interrupt handlers are not inherited across a /ork(2). All eid for the same device file produced by

dup(2)

share the same handler.

An interrupt for a given eid is implicitly disabled after the occurrence of the event. The interrupt condition can be re-enabled by using io_interrupLctl(3I).

Upon the occurrence of an event specified by cause, the receiving process is to execute the interrupt handler function pointed to by handler. When the handler returns the user process resumes at the point of execution left when the event occurred.

Hewlett-Packard - 1 November 15, 1985

IO_ON-INTERRUPT ( 31) Series

500

Only IO_ON-INTERRUPT (31)

Handler

will be passed two parameters, the eid associated with the event, and a pointer to a

causevec

structure. The cause of the interrupt can be determined by the value returned in the

cause

field of the causevec structure. If the interrupt handler was invoked due to a parallel poll interrupt, then the mask field of the causevec structure will contain the parallel poll response byte XOR-ed with the sense and AND-ed with the mask

RPIB INTERRUPTS

This section describes interrupt causes specific to an HP-IB device. For an HP-IB device the cause is a bit vector which is used as follows: To enable a given event, the appropriate bit (in cause), shown below, must be set to 1:

SRQ

TLK

LTN

TCT

IFC

REN

DCL

GET

PPOLL

SRQ and active controller.

Talker addressed.

Listener addressed.

Controller in charge.

IFC has been asserted

Remote enable

Device clear

Group execution trigger

Parallel poll

GPIO INTERRUPTS

This section describes interrupt causes specific to a gpio device. For a gpio device the cause is a bit vector which is used as follows. To enable a given event, the appropriate bit (in cause), shown below, must be set to 1:

EIR

SIEO

SIEI

External interrupt

Status line 0

Status line 1

RARDW ARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300/500

Eid

is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.

Series 500:

The 5.0 HP _UX system does not support parallel-poll interrupts. The internal HP-IB supplied with the Model 550 cannot support talker-addressed, listener-addressed, controller-in-charge, and remote-enable interrupt. GPIO interrupts on the EIR line are not supported.

RETURN VALUE

lo_olL-interrupt

returns a pointer to the previous handler if the new handler is successfully installed, otherwise it returns a -I and errno is set.

DIAGNOSTICS

lo_olL-interrupt

can fail for any of the following reasons:

Fildes

does not refer to an open file [EBADF]

Fildes

does not refer to a GPIO or a raw HP-IB device file [ENOTTY]

Handler

points to an illegal address [EFAULT]

causevec

points to an illegal address. [EFAULT]

Hewlett-Packard - 2 November 15, 1985

IO_ON-INTERRUPT (31)

Series

500 Only

SEE ALSO

io~nterrupt_ctl(3I), pause(2), sigpause(2)

IO_ON-INTERRUPT (31)

Hewlett-Packard

- 3 -

November 15, 1985

IO-RESET (31)

IO-RESET ( 31 )

NAME iO-I'eset - reset an I/O interface

SYNOPSIS int iO----1"eset (eid); int eid;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin: HP

DESCRIPTION

la_reset

resets the interface associated with the device file that was opened. The specific actions performed by la_reset are hardware dependent. Eid is an entity identifer of an open raw HP-IB bus or GPIO device file obtained from an apen(2), dup(2), jcntl(2), or creat(2) call.

la_reset

also causes an interface to go through its self-test, and returns a failure indication if the interface fails its test.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300/500

Eid

is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.

Series 500:

When an HP-IB interface is reset, the interface is returned to its power on state if system controller, otherwise, the parallel poll response is set to zero and the interrupt mask is set to zero.

When a GPIO interface is reset, the interfae is returned to its power on state.

Series 200/300:

When an HP-IB interface is reset, the interrupt mask is set to 0, the parallel poll response is set to 0, the serial poll response is set to 0, the HP-IB address is assigned, the IFC line is pulsed (if system controller), the card is put on line, and REN is set (if system controller).

When a GPIO interface is reset, the peripheral reset line is pulled low, the PCTL line is placed in the clear state, and if the DOUT CLEAR jumper is installed, the data out lines are all cleared. The interrupt enable bit is also cleared.

Interface self test is not supported.

RETURN VALUE

la_reset

returns 0 (zero) if successful, or

-1 if an error was encountered.

DIAGNOSTICS

la_reset

fails under any of the following circumstances, and sets errna (see errna(2)) to the value in square brackets:

eid

does not refer to an open file [EBADF];

eid

does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY).

Hew lett-Packard - 1 November 15, 1985

NAME io-speeLcti - infonn system of required transfer speed

SYNOPSIS int io---speeLcti (eid, speed); int eid, speed;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin: HP

DESCRIPTION

Io_speeLctl

enables you to select the data transfer speed (within the limits of the hardware) for a data path used for a particular interface. The transfer method (i.e., DMA, fast-handshake) chosen by the system is determined by the speed requirements.

Eid

is an entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an

open(2), dup(2), jcntl(2),

creat(2)

call.

Speed

is an integer specifying the data transfer speed in K-bytes per second (one K-byte equals 1024 bytes).

DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300/500

Eid

is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.

Series 500:

The Series 500 always provides DMA for the fastest possible I/O speed. Therefore,

io_speeLctl(SI)

is a nonoperative condition.

Series 200/300:

For values of

speed

less than 7 the system will use an interrupt transfer. For larger values DMA will be used if available otherwise the system will use an interrupt transfer.

The default transfer method is DMA.

RETURN VALUE

Io_speeLctl

returns 0 if successful, and -1 otherwise.

DIAGNOSTICS

Io_speeLctl

fails under the following conditions, and sets

ermo

to the value enclosed in square brackets:

eid

does not refer to an open file [EBADF].

eid

does not refer to a supported device file [ENOTTY].

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 -

November 15, 1985

NAME io_timeout_ctl - establish a time limit for I/O operations

SYNOPSIS int io_timeout_ctl (eid, time); int eid; long time;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin: HP

DESCRIPTION

Io_timeout_ctl

enables you to assign a timeout value to the specified file descriptor. Eid is an entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2), fcntl(2) , or creat(2) call. Time is a 32-bit integer value specifying the length of the timeout in microseconds.

This timeout applies to future read and write requests on this file descriptor. If a read or write request does not complete within the specified time limit, the request is aborted and returns an error indication. The errno value for a timed-out request is ErO, specifying that a timeout has occurred.

Although the timeout value is specified in microseconds, the resolution of the timeout is systemdependent. For example, a particular system might have a resolution of 10 milliseconds, in which case the specified timeout value is rounded up to the next 10 msec boundary. A timeout value of zero means that the system never causes a timeout. When a file is opened, a zero timeout value is assigned by default.

File descriptors for the same device file obtained by separate open(2) requests have their own timeout values associated with them. File descriptors for the same device file obtained by dup(2) or inherited by a fork(2) request share the same timeout value. In the latter case, if one process changes the timeout, the new timeout is in effect for all such file descriptors.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300/500

Eid

is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.

Series 500:

The timeout resolution is 10 msec. If an I/O operation is aborted due to a timeout, an

errinfo

(2) value of 56 is returned.

Series 200 and 300:

The default timeout for Series 200/300 GPIO interface is 15 seconds. Timeout resolution is 20 msec.

RETURN VALUE

Io_timeouLctl

returns 0 (zero) if successful, or -1 if an error was encountered.

DIAGNOSTICS

Io_timeouLctl

fails under the following circumstances, and sets errno (see errno(2)) to the value in square brackets:

eid

does not refer to an open file [EBADF];

eid

does not refer to a channel device file [ENOTTY].

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 -

November 15, 1985

NAME io_widtLctl - set width of data path

SYNOPSIS iut io_width_ctl (eid, width) lut eid, width;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin: HP

DESCRIPTION

la_widtLet! enables you to select the width of the data path to be used for a particular interface. Eid is an entity identifier of an open device file obtained from an apen(2), dup(2), !ent!(2), or

ereat(2) call. Width is an integer specifying the width of the data path in bits.

The allowable widths are system and hardware dependent. An error is given if an invalid width is specified. Specifying a width with this function sets the width for all users of the device file associated with the given file descriptor. When first opened, the default width is 8 bits.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300/500:

For the GPIO interface only widths of 8 and 16 bits are currently supported. For the

HP-IB interface only width of 8 bits is supported.

RETURN VALUE

la_widtLet! returns 0 if successful, and

-1 if an error was encountered.

DIAGNOSTICS

la_widtLet! fails under the following circumstances, and sets errna (see errna(2)) to the value in square brackets:

eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF);

eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY). the specified

width is not supported on this device file [EINV AL).

Hewlett-Packard - 1 November 15, 1985

L3TOL(3C) L3TOL(3C)

NAME l3tol, Itol3 - convert between 3-byte integers and long integers

SYNOPSIS void l3tol (lp, cp, n) long *lpj char *CPj int nj void ltol3 (cp, lp, n) char *CPj long *lpj int nj

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: Bell File System - HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

L3tol converts a list of n three-byte integers packed into a character string pointed to by cp into a list of long integers pointed to by

lp.

Ltol3 performs the reverse conversion from long integers (lp) to three-byte integers (cp).

These functions are useful for file-system maintenance where the block numbers are three bytes long.

**

non-jnt

0** non-pas

SQRT:

GAMMA:

HYPOT:

SINH:

COSH:

SIN COS TAN:

ASIN, ACOS, ATAN2:

DEFAULT ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURES

DOMAIN SING

TU'lJes of Errors

OVERFLOW UNDERFLOW

EDOM

ERANGE

M -H

M,-H

M,O

M -H

±H

M,O

ABBREVIATIONS

As much as possible of the value is returned.

Message is printed

(EDOM error). M

H HUGE is returned.

-H -HUGE is returned.

±H HUGE or -HUGE is returned.

o

0 is returned.

TLOSS

ERANGE

M,O

PLOSS

ERANGE

•

Hewlett-Packard -2July 9, 1985

MEMORY (3C) MEMORY (3C)

NAME memccpy, memchr, memcmp, memcpy, memset - memory operations

SYNOPSIS

#include <memory.h> char *memccpy (sl, s2, c, n) char *sl, *s2; int c, n; char *memchr (s, c, n) char *s; int c, n; int memcmp (sl, s2, n) char *sl, *s2; int n; char *memcpy (sl, s2, n) char *sl, *s2; int n; char *memset (s, c, n) char *s; int c, n;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX!RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

These functions operate efficiently on memory areas (arrays of characters bounded by a count, not terminated by a null character). They do not check for the overflow of any receiving memory area.

Memccpy

copies characters from memory area 82 into 81, stopping after the first occurrence of character c has been copied, or after n characters have been copied, whichever comes first. It returns a pointer to the character after the copy of c in sl, or a NULL pointer if c was not found in the first n characters of 82.

Memchr

returns a pointer to the first occurrence of character c in the first n characters of memory area s, or a NULL pointer if c does not occur.

Memcmp

compares its arguments, looking at the first n characters only, and returns an integer less than, equal to, or greater t.han 0, according as 81 is lexicographically less than, equal to, or greater than 82.

less than or equal to zero yields equality). This routine uses unsigned char for character comparison on HP-UX. This may not be true for other implementatitons.

Memcpy

copies n characters from memory area s2 to 81. It returns s1.

Memset

sets the first n characters in memory area 8 to the value of character c. It returns s.

NOTE

For user convenience, all these functions are declared in the optional <

memory. h>

header file.

BUGS

Character movement is performed differently in different implementations. Thus overlapping moves may yield surprises.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 -

July 2, 1985

MKTEMP(3C)

NAME mktemp - make a unique file name

SYNOPSIS char *mktemp (template) char *template;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

Mktemp

replaces the contents of the string pointed to by template by a unique file name, and returns the address of template. The string in template should look like a file name with six trailing Xs;

mktemp

will replace the XS with a letter and the current process ID. The letter will be chosen so that the resulting name does not duplicate the name of an existing file.

If there are less than 6 Xs, the letter will be dropped first, and then high order digits of the process ID will be dropped.

RETURN VALUE

Mktemp

returns its argument except when it runs out of letters, in which case the result is a pointer to the empty string "".

#

This flag specifies that the value is to be converted to an "alternate form." For c, d,

B, and u conversions, the flag has no effect. For

0 conversion, it increases the precision to force the first digit of the result to be a zero. For x or X conversion, a non-zero result will have Ox or OX prefixed to it. For e, E, f, g, and G conversions, the result will always contain a decimal point, even if no digits follow the point (normally, a decimal point appears in the result of these conversions only if a digit follows it). For g and G conversions, trailing zeroes will

not

be removed from the result (which they normally are).

The conversion characters and their meanings are: d,o,u,x,X The integer

arg

is converted to signed decimal, unsigned octal, decimal, or hexadecimal notation (x and X), respectively; the letters abcdef are used for x conversion and the letters ABCDEF for X conversion. The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to appear; if the value being converted can be represented in fewer f digits, it will be expanded with leading zeroes. (For compatibility with older versions, padding with leading zeroes may alternatively be specified by prepending a zero to the field width. This does not imply an octal value for the field width.) The default precision is 1. The result of converting a zero value with a precision of zero is a null string.

The float or double

arg

is converted to decimal notation in the style "[-]ddd.ddd", e,E g,G where the number of digits after the decimal point. is equal to the precision specification. If the precision is missing, six digits are output; if the precision is explicitly 0, no decimal point appears.

The float or double

arg

is converted in the style" [-]d.ddde±ddd", where there is one digit before the decimal point and the number of digits after it is equal to the precision; when the precision is missing, six digits are produced; if the precision is zero, no decimal point appears. The E format code will produce a number with E instead of e introducing the exponent. The exponent always contains exactly three digits.

The float or double

arg

is printed in style for e (or in style E in the case of a G format code), with the precision specifying the number of significant digits. The style used depends on the value converted: style e will be used only if the exponent resulting from the conversion is less than -4 or greater than the precision. Trailing zeroes c

% are removed from the result; a decimal point appears only if it is followed by a digit.

The character

arg

is printed. ,

The

arg

is taken to be a string (character pointer j and characters from the string are printed until a null character (\0) is encountered or the number of characters indicated by the precision specification is reached, If the precision is missing, it is taken to be infinite, so all characters up to the first null character are printed. A NULL value for

arg

will yield undefined results.

Print a %; no argument is converted.

In no case does a non-existent or small field width cause truncation of a field; if the result of a conversion is wider than the field width, the field is simply expanded to contain the conversion result. Characters generated by

printf

and

fprintf

are printed as if

putc(3S)

had been called,

EXAMPLES

To print a date and time in the form "Sunday, July 3, 10:02", where

weekday

and

month

are pointers to null-terminated strings:

Hewlett-Packard

-2July 2,1985

PRINTF(3S)

printf(,,%s, %s %d, %d:%.2d", weekday, month, day, .hour, min);

To print

7r to 5 decimal places: printf("pi = %.5f", 4

* atan(l.O));

SEE ALSO

ecvt(3C), putc(3S), scanf(3S), stdio(3S), and vprintf(3S).

PRINTF(3S)

Hewlett-Packard -3July 2, 1985

PRINTMSG ( 3C) PRINTMSG ( 3C)

NAME printmsg, fprintmsg, sprintmsg - print formatted output with numbered arguments

SYNOPSIS

#include <stdio.h> int printmsg (format [ , arg

I ... char *format; int fprintmsg (stream, format [ , arg

I ... )

FILE *stream; char *format; int sprintmsg (s, format [ , arg

I ... ) char *s, *format;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: HP

Native Language Support:

8-bit data, customs, messages

DESCRIPTION

Printmsg , fprintmsg , and sprintmsg are derived from their counterparts in print/{3S), with the amplification that the conversion character % is replaced by the sequence %

digit$. Digit

is a decimal digit n in the range 1-9, and indicates that this conversion should be applied to the nth argument, rather than to the next unused one. All other aspects of formatting are unchanged.

All conversion specifications must contain the %digit$ sequence, and it is the user's responsibility to make sure the numbering is correct. All parameters must be used exactly once.

EXAMPLE

To create a language independent date and time printing routine we would write printmsg(format, weekday, month, day, hour, min);

For American usage format would be a pointer to the string

"%1$s, %2$s %3$d, %4$d:%5$.2d" and for German usage to a string

"%1$s, %3$d %2$s %4$d:%5$.2d" the resulting outputs will be "Sunday, July 3, 10:02", and "Sonntag, 3 Juli 10:02" , assuming that the proper strings have been passed in.

SEE ALSO getmsg(3C), printf(3S), hpnls(7).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 -

July 2, 1985

PUTC(3S) PUTC(3S)

NAME putc, putchar, fputc, putw - put character or word on a stream

SYNOPSIS

#include <stdio.h> int putc (c, stream) int Cj

FILE *streamj int putchar (c) int Cj int fputc (c, stream) int Cj

FILE *streamj int putw (w, stream) int Wj

FILE *streamj

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

Pute

writes the character e onto the output

stream

(at the position where the file pointer, if defined, is pointing).

Putehar(e)

is defined as

pute(e, stdout). Pute

and

putehar

are macros.

Fpute

behaves like

pute,

but is a genuine function rather than a macro; it may therefore be used as an argument.

Fpute

runs more slowly than

pute,

name can be passed as an argument to a function. but it takes less space per invocation and its

Putw

writes the word (i.e., int in C)

to the output

stream

(at the position at which the file pointer, if defined, is pointing). The size of a word is the size of an integer and varies from machine to machine.

Putw

neither assumes nor causes special alignment in the file.

Output streams, with the exception of the standard error stream

stderr,

are by default buffered if the output refers to a file and line-buffered if the output refers to a terminal. The standard error output stream

stderr

is by default unbuffered, but use of

freopen

(see

fopen(3S»)

will cause it to become buffered or line-buffered. When an output stream is unbuffered, information is queued for writing on the destination file or terminal as soon as written; when it is buffered, many characters are saved up and written as a block. When it is line-buffered, each line of output is queued for writing on the destination terminal as soon as the line is completed (that is, as soon as a new-line character is written or terminal input is requested).

Fflush

can also be used to explicitly write the buffer.

Setbuf(38)

setvbuf(3S)

may be used to change the stream's buffering strategy.

SEE ALSO fclose(3S), ferror(3S), fopen(38), fwrite(38), getc(3S), fread(3S), printf(3S), puts(3S), setbuf(3S).

DIAGNOSTICS

On success, these functions each return the value they have written. On failure, they return the constant EOF. This will occur if the file

stream

is not open for writing or if the output file cannot be grown. Because EOF is a valid integer,

ferror(3S)

should be used to detect

putw

errors.

Line buffering may cause confusion or malfunctioning of programs which use standard I/O routines but use read(2) themselves to read from standard input. In cases where a large amount of computation is done after printing part of a line on an output terminal, it is necessary to ffiush(3) the standard output before going off and computing so that the output will appear.

BUGS

Because it is implemented as a macro,

pute

treats incorrectly a

stream

argument with side effects.

Hewlett-Packard -1-

July 2, 1985

PUTC(3S)

particular,

putc(c,

*f++)j

doesn't work sensibly.

Fputc

should be used instead.

Because of possible differences in word length and byte ordering, files written using

putw

are machine-dependent, and may not be read using

getw

on a different (non-HP-UX) processor. For this reason

putw

should be used with care.

Hewlett-Packard -2-

July 2, 1985

PUTENV(3C)

NAME putenv - change or add value to environment

SYNOPSIS int putenv (string) char *string;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

String

points to a string of the form "name=value." Putenv makes the value of the environment variable name equal to value by altering an existing variable or creating a new one. In either case, the string pointed to by string becomes part of the environment, so altering the string will change the environment. The space used by string is no longer used once a new string-defining

name

is passed to putenv.

DIAGNOSTICS

Putenv

returns non-zero if it was unable to obtain enough space via maUoe for an expanded environment, otherwise zero.

SEE ALSO exec(2), getenv(3C), malloc(3C), environ(5).

WARNINGS

Putenv

manipulates the environment pointed to by environ, and can be used in conjunction with

getenv.

However, envp (the third argument to main) is not changed.

This routine uses maUoe(3C) to enlarge the environment.

After putenv is called, environmental variables are not in alphabetical order.

A potential error is to call putenv with an automatic variable as the argument, then exit the calling function while string is still part of the environment.

Hewlett-Packard - 1 -

July 2, 1985

PUTPWENT(3C) PUTPWENT ( 3C )

NAME putpwent - write password file entry

SYNOPSIS

#include <pwd.h>

#include <stdio.h> int putpwent (p, f) struct passwd *Pj

FILE *fj

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/NUCLEUS

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Putpwent

is the inverse of

getpwent(3C).

Given a pointer to a

passwd

structure as created by

getpwent

(or

getpwuid

getpwnam), putpwent

writes a line on the stream

which matches the format of /etc/passwd.

DIAGNOSTICS

Putpwent

returns non-zero if an error was detected during its operation, otherwise zero.

<=

sizeof rebuf) ? rebuf :

NULL;

Hewlett-Packard

-2July 2,1985

SCANF(3S) SCANF(3S)

NAME scanf, fscanf, sscanf - formatted input conversion, read from stream file

SYNOPSIS

#include <stdio.h> int scanf (format [ , pointer

1 char *format; int fscanf (stream, format [ , pointer

FILE *stream; char *format; int sscanf (s, format [ , pointer

1 ... char *s, *format;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Scanf

reads from the standard input stream stdin. Fscanf reads from the named input stream.

Sscanf

reads from the character string s. Each function reads characters, interprets them according to a format, and stores the results in its arguments. Each expects, as arguments, a control string format described below, and a set of pointer arguments indicating where the converted input should be stored.

The control string usually contains conversion specifications, which are used to direct interpretation of input sequences. The control string may contain:

White-space characters (blanks, tabs, new-lines, or form-feeds) which, except in two cases described below, cause input to be read up to the next non-white-space character.

2. An ordinary character (not

%), which must match the next character of the input stream.

3. Conversion specifications, consisting of the character

%, an optional assignment suppressing character *, an optional numerical maximum field width, an optional I (ell) or h indicating the size of the receiving variable, and a conversion code.

A conversion specification directs the conversion of the next input field; the result is placed in the variable pointed to by the corresponding argument, unless assignment suppression was indicated by *. The suppression of assignment provides a way of describing an input field which is to be skipped. An input field is defined as a string of non-space characters; it extends to the next inappropriate character or until the field width, if specified, is exhausted. For all descriptors except

"[" and "c", white space leading an input field is ignored.

The conversion code indicates the interpretation of the input field; the corresponding pointer argument must usually be of a restricted type. For a suppressed field, no pointer argument is given. The following conversion codes are legal:

% d a single

% is expected in the input at this point; no assignment is done. a decimal integer is expected; the corresponding argument should be an integer pointer. u o x an unsigned decimal integer is expected; the corresponding argument should be an unsigned integer pointer. an octal integer is expected; the corresponding argument should be an integer pointer. a hexadecimal integer is expected; the corresponding argument should be an integer pointer. e,f,g a floating point number is expected; the next field is converted accordingly and stored through the corresponding argument, which should be a pointer to a float. The input format for floating point numbers is an optionally signed string of digits, possibly containing a decimal point, followed by an optional exponent field consisting of an E or an e, followed by an optional

+, -, or space, followed by an integer.

Hewlett-Packard - 1 July 2, 1985

SCANF(3S) SCANF(3S) s c a character string is expected; the corresponding argument should be a character pointer pointing to an array of characters large enough to accept the string and a terminating \0, which will be added automatically. The input field is terminated by a white-space character. Note that scanfwill not read a null string. a character is expected; the corresponding argument should be a character pointer. The normal skip over white space is suppressed in this case; to read the next non-space character, use

1s. If a field width is given, the corresponding argument should refer to a character array; the indicated number of characters is read. indicates string data and the normal skip over leading white space is suppressed. The left bracket is followed by a set of characters, which we will call the scanset, and a right bracket; the input field is the maximal sequence of input characters consisting entirely of characters in the scanset. The circumflex ( • ), when it appears as the first character in the scanset, serves as a complement operator and redefines the scanset as the set of all characters not contained in the remainder of the scanset string. There are some conventions used in the construction of the scanset. A range of characters may be represented by the construct first-last, thus [0123456789] may be expressed [0-9]. Using this convention, first must be lexically less than or equal to last, or else the dash will stand for itself.

The dash will also stand for itself whenever it is the first or the last character in the scanset. To include the right square bracket as an element of the scanset, it must appear as the first character (possibly preceded by a circumflex) of the scanset, and in this case it will not be syntactically interpreted as the closing bracket. The corresponding argument must point to a character array large enough to hold the data field and the terminating

\0, which will be added automatically. At least one character must match for this conversion to be considered successful.

The conversion characters d,

U , 0, and x may be preceded by I or h to indicate that a pointer to long or to short rather than to int is in the argument list. Similarly, the conversion characters e, f, and g may be preceded by I to indicate that a pointer to double rather than to float is in the argument list. The I or h modifier is ignored for other conversion characters.

Scanf

conversion terminates at EOF, at the end of the control string, or when an input character conflicts with the control string. In the latter case, the offending character is left unread in the input stream.

Scanf

returns the number of successfully matched and assigned input items; this number can be zero in the event of an early conflict between an input character and the control string.

If the input ends before the first conflict or conversion, EOF is returned.

EXAMPLES

The call: int i, n; float X; char namc[50]; n

= scanf("%d%f%s", &i, &x, name); with the input line:

25 54.32E-1 thompson will assign to n the value 3, to i the value 25, to x the value 5.432, and name will contain thompson\O. Or: int i; float x; char name [50] ;

(void) scanf("%2d%f%*d %[0-9]", &i, &x, name); with input:

56789 0123 56a72 will assign 56 to i, 789.0 to x, skip 0123, and place the string 56\0 in name. The next call to

getchar

(see getc(3S)) will return a.

Hewlett-Packard -2July 2,1985

SCANF(3S) SCANF(3S)

SEE ALSO getc(3S), printf(3S), strtod(3C), strtol(3C).

NOTE

Trailing white space (including a new-line) is left unread unless matched in the control string.

DIAGNOSTICS

These functions return EOF on end of input and a short count for missing or illegal data items.

BUGS

The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is not directly determinable.

Hewlett-Packard -3July 2, 1985

SETBUF(3S)

NAME setbuf, setvbuf - assign buffering to a .stream file

SYNOPSIS

#ioclude <stdio.h> void setbuf (stream, buf)

FILE *stream; char *buf; iot setvbuf (stream, buf, type, size)

FILE *stream; char *buf; iot type, size;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

Setbu/

may be used after a stream has been opened but before it is read or written. It causes the arr8!Y pointed to by

bu/

to be used instead of an automatically allocated buffer. If

bu/

is the NULL pointer input/output will be completely unbuffered.

A constant BUFSIZ, defined in the <stdio.h> header file, tells how big an array is needed: char buf(BUFSIZ];

Setvbu/

may be used after a stream has been opened but before it is read or written.

Type

determines how

stream

will be buffered. Legal values for

type

(defined in stdio.h) are:

-IOFBF

-IOLBF causes input/output to be fully buffered. causes output to be line buffered; the buffer will be flushed when a newline is written, the buffer is full, or input is requested. causes input/output to be completely unbuffered. -IONBF

bu/

is not the NULL pointer, the array it points to will be used for buffering instead of an automatically allocated buffer (from

malloc(3C)

memallc(2)). Size

specifies the size of the buffer to be used. The constant BUFSIZ in <stdio.h> is suggested as a gQod buffer size.

If input/output is unbuffered,

bu/

and

size

are ignored.

By default, output to a terminal is line buffered and all other input/output is fully buffered.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series

500:

The system call

memallc(2)

is used instead of

maUoc.

SEE ALSO fopen(3S), getc(3S), malloc(3C), putc(3S), stdio(3S).

DIAGNOSTICS

If an illegal value for

type

size

is provided,

setvbu/

returns a non-zero value. Otherwise, the value returned will be zero.

NOTE

A common source of error is allocating buffer space as an "automatic" variable in a code block, and then failing to close the stream in the same block.

Hewlett-Packard -1July 2, 1985

SETJMP(3C) SETJMP(3C)

NAME setjmp, longjmp - non-local goto

SYNOPSIS

#include <setjmp.h> int setjmp (env) jmp_buf enVj void longjmp (env, val) jmp_buf enVj int valj int ---Betjmp( env} jmp_buf enVj void ---.longjmp(env, val} jmp_buf enVj int valj

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

These functions are useful for dealing with errors and interrupts encountered in a low-level subroutine of a program.

Betjmp

saves its stack environment in

env

(whose type,

jmp_bul,

is defined in the

<Betjmp.h>

header file) for later use by

longjmp.

It returns the value o.

Longjmp

restores the environment saved by the last call of

Betjmp

with the corresponding

env

argument. After

longjmp

is completed, program execution continues as if the corresponding call of

Betjmp

(which must not itself have returned in the interim) had just returned the value

val.

Longjmp

cannot cause

Betjmp

to return the value O. If

longjmp

is invoked with a second argument of 0,

Betjmp

will return 1. All accessible data have values as of the time

longjmp

was called.

Upon the return from a

Betjmp

call caused by a

longjmp,

the values of any non-static local variables are undefined. Depending on such values renders code using non-static local variables nonportable.

Betjmp

and

_longjmp longjmp

save and restore the signal mask (see

Bigvector(2)),

while

_Betjmp

and manipulate only the stack and registers. This distinction is only significant for programs which use

Bigvector(2), Bigblock(2),

and/or

BigBetmaBk(2).

If a

longjmp

is executed and the environment in which the

Betjmp

was executed no longer exists, errors can occur. The conditions under which the environment of the

Betjmp

no longer exists include: exiting the procedure which contains the

Betjmp

call, and exiting an inner block with temporary storage (e.g. a block with declarations in C, a

with

statement in Pascal). This condition mayor may not be detectable. An attempt is made by determining if the stack frame pointer in

env

points to a location not in the currently active stack. If this is the case,

longjmp

will return a

-1. Otherwise, the

longjmp

will occur, and if the environment no longer exists, the contents of the temporary storage of an inner block are unpredictable. This condition may also cause unexpected process termination. If the procedure has been exited the results are unpredictable.

Passing

longjmp

a pointer to a buffer not created by

Bety"mp,

or a buffer that has been modified by the user, can cause all the problems listed above, and more.

Some implementations of Pascal support a

try/recover

mechanism, which also creates stack marker information. If a

longjmp

operation occurs in a scope which is nested inside a try/recover, and the corresponding

Betjmp

is not inside the scope of the try/recover, the recover block will not be executed and the currently active recover block will become the one enclosing the

Betjmp

(if

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 -

November 15, 1985

SETJMP(3C) SETJMP(3C)

there is one).

NOTE

A call to longjmp to leave the guaranteed stack space reserved by 8ig8pace (2) may remove the guarantee that the ordinary execution of the program will not extend into the guaranteed space.

It may also cause the program to forever loose its ability to automatically increase the stack size, and the program may then be limited to the guaranteed space.

SEE ALSO

sigvector(2), sigblock(2), sigsetmask(2), sigspace(2), signal(2).

WARNING

If long imp is called even though env was never primed by a call to 8etimp, or when the last such call was in a function which has since returned, absolute chaos is guaranteed.

Hewlett-Packard

- 2November 15, 1985

SINH(3M)

NAME sinh, cosh, tanh - hyperbolic functions

SYNOPSIS

#include <math.h> double sinh (x) double

Xj double cosh (x) double

Xj float fcosh (x) tfloat

Xj double tanh (x) double

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY float ftanh (x) tfloat

:I: see important note below

Origin:

System V float fsinh (x) tfloat

DESCRIPTION

Sinh, cosh, and tanh return, respectively, the hyperbolic sine, cosine and tangent of their argument. These are double-precision routines.

IMPORTANT NOTE: The corresponding single-precision routines [sinh, [cosh, and [tanh expect true single-precision arguments, and therefore cannot be called from standard C. They are provided for support of FORTRAN (Pascal does not support or use hyperbolic functions).

DIAGNOSTICS

Sinh and cosh set errno to ERANGE and return HUGE ( sinh may return -HUGE for negative

when the correct value would overflow.

These error-handling procedures may be changed with the function

matherr(3M).

°

is returned if an error was encountered while searching for the terminal name or if none of the above file descriptors is associated with a terminal device.

Hewlett-Packard -1July 2, 1985

UNGETC(3S) UNGETC(3S)

NAME ungetc - push character back into input stream

SYNOPSIS

#include <stdio.h> int ungetc (c, stream) int c;

FILE *stream;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Ungetc

inserts the character c into the buffer associated with an input

stream.

That character, c, will be returned by the next

getc(9S)

call on that

stream. Ungetc

returns c, and leaves the file

stream

unchanged.

One character of pushback is guaranteed, provided something has already been read from the stream and the stream is actually buffered. In the case that

stream

stdin,

one character may be pushed back onto the buffer without a previous read statement.

If c equals EOF,

ungetc

does nothing to the buffer and returns EOF.

Fseek(3S)

erases all memory of inserted characters.

SEE ALSO fseek(3S), getc(3S), setbuf(3S).

DIAGNOSTICS

Ungetc

returns EOF if it cannot insert the character.

Hewlett-Packard -1July 2, 1985

VPRINTF ( 3S ) VPRINTF ( 3S )

NAME vprintf, vfprintf, vsprintf - print formatted output of a varargs argument list

SYNOPSIS

#include <stdio.h>

#include <varargs.h> int vprintf (format, ap) char *format; va~ist ap; int vfprintf (stream, format, ap)

FILE *stream; char *format; va~ist ap; int vsprintf (s, format, ap) char *s, *format; v~ist ap;

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

vprintf, vfprintf, and v8printf are the same as printf, fprintf, and 8printf respectively, except that instead of being called with a variable number of arguments, they are called with an argument list as defined by varargs (5).

EXAMPLE

The following demonstrates how vfprintf could be used to write an error routine.

#include <stdio.h>

#include <varargs.h>

* error should be called like error(function-Ilame, format, arg1, arg2".);

/*VARARGSO*/ void error( v1L-alist)

/* Note that the function-Ilame and format arguments cannot be separately declared because of the definition of varargs.

*/ v1L-dcl

{ v~ist args; char *fmt; va-start (args);

/* print out name of function causing error */

(void)fprintf(stderr, "ERROR in %s: ", v1L-arg(args, char *»; fmt

= v1L-arg( args, char *);

/* print out remainder of message

(void)vfprintf(stderr, fmt, args);

Hewlett-Packard -1July 2,1985

VPRINTF ( 3S ) v 1L-end ( args ) j

(void)abort(

}

SEE

ALSO

printf(3S), varargs(5).

VPRINTF ( 3S )

Hewlett-Packard

-2July 2, 1985

INTRO(4) INTRO(4)

NAME intro - introduction to special files

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Remarks: In general, device drivers are not portable across systems; however, every effort has been made to make their behavior portable. Due to variation in hardware, this is not always possible. Programs which use these drivers directly are at higher than average risk of not being portable.

DESCRIPTION

This section describes various special files that refer to specific HP peripherals and device drivers.

The names of the entries are usually derived from the type of device being described (disc, plotter, etc.), not the names of the special files themselves. Characteristics of both the hardware device and the corresponding HP-UX device driver are discussed where applicable.

The devices are divided into two catagories, unblocked and blocked. An unblocked device is also called a raw or character-mode device. An unblocked device, such as a line printer, uses a character special file.

Blocked devices, as the name implies, transfer data in blocks via the system's normal buffering mechanism. Block devices use block special files.

For specific details about the default special files shipped with your system, consult the System

Administrator Manual for your system.

The desired name is associated with a specific device when

mknod(lM)

is used to create a special file for that device. The following naming convention is recommended for use when creating special files (special file names are are independent of the hardware):

[r] dev~d

[procL.no] [modeLinitial] [sldli] [.] [digit] where: r dev~d if present, indicates that the device is treated as a raw device; otherwise, the file is a block-mode file. consists of one of the following mnemonics:

.digit ct hd mt fd lp dig pit

CS/80 cat ridge tape drive hard disc

9-track tape drive flexible disc line printer digitizer· plotter or graphics CRT display

HP product number for the device; procL.no modeLinitial the letter suffix (if any) associated with the device model number; sldli used with the HP 9895A to specify Single-sided, Double-sided, or IBM media format; used when two or more identical devices are connected to the system; for example, if two HP 2631G printers are connected to the system, their special file names would be

Ip263lg

and

Ip263lg.l

(they could also be named

and

lp.l).

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:

Block special files cannot be opened for reading or writing.

The IBM format capability in the HP 9895A is not officially supported on HP-UX.

Hewlett-Packard -1-

July 10, 1985

CT(4) CT(4)

NAME ct - cartridge tape access

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: HP

DESCRIPTION

This page describes the actions of the general HP-UX cartridge tape drivers when referring to a cartridge tape as either a block-mode or character-mode (raw) device.

Cartridge tapes are designed for use as "streaming" devices, and are not designed to start and stop frequently. Like discs, they are technically "random access" devices, but such access is less efficient and causes more tape and drive wear than streaming mode. While it is possible to use a cartridge tape as a file slfstem or random access storage device, such use will dramatically reduce the life expectancy of tape cartridges and the tape drive itself.

Any CS/80 cartridge tape unit, whether built into a disc drive or operated as a standalone device, can be accessed as a blocked or raw device.

Block special files access cartridge tapes through normal system buffering mechanisms. Buffering is handled such that concurrent accesses through multiple opens or mounts on the same physical device do not get out of phase. Block special files can be read and written without regard to physical cartridge tape records. Each I/O operation results in one or more logical block transactions.

Use of this mode is discouraged because it increases wear on tapes and drives.

Character special files provide a

raw

interface for transferring data directly between the cartridge tape and the user's read or write buffer. A single read or write operation always results in exactly one I/O transaction. This is considerably more efficient than block-mode I/O which can require several transactions to transfer the same amount of information and cannot handle the transfer directly between the drive and user space.

Tcio(l)

is provided on some systems so you can take advantage of the efficiencies of raw I/O, while also making optimal use of the streaming capabilities of the cartridge tape drives. During writes, buffers small transactions into larger data blocks that are optimal for cartridge tapes, and reverses the process during reads. It is particularly designed for use as a complement to

cpio

for handling backups.

During raw I/O, there may be implementation-dependent restrictions on the alignment of the user buffer in memory and its maximum size. Also, each transfer must occur on a record boundary and must read a whole number of records. Record size is hardware dependent, but is usually

1024 bytes. Use of

tcio

(1) hides all these issues.

Each raw access is independent of other raw accesses and of block accesses to the same physical device. Thus, transfers are not guaranteed to occur in any particular order. Having multiple programs access the cartridge tape is, in effect, random access, and is subject to the warnings above.

In raw I/O, each operation is completed to the device before the call returns. For block-mode writes, data may be cached until it is convienient for the system to write it. In addition, blockmode reads potentially do a one (or more) block read-ahead. The interaction of block-mode and raw access to the same cartridge tape is not specified, and in general is unpredictable. 'Because block-mode writes can be delayed, it is possible for a program to generate requests much more rapidly than the drive can actually process them. Flushing a large number of requests could take several minutes, and during that time the system will not have use of the buffers taken by these requests, and thus will suffer a possibly severe performance degradation. If the tape drive and the system disc share a single controller, disc activity may be severely limited or stopped until the buffers are flushed.

The name of a raw device (its character special file name) is typically the same as the name of the corresponding blocked device (its block special file name) prefixed with an "r".

Hewlett-Packard

July 9, 1985

CT( 4) CT(4)

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:

Block-special devices cannot be opened for I/O.

SEE ALSO

mkdev(IM), mknod(IM), tcio(I), intro(4), disc(4), mt(4), and the HP-UX System Administrator

Manual

provided with your system.

Hew lett-Packard -2-

July 9, 1985

DISC ( 4) DISC ( 4)

NAME disc - direct disc access

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: HP

DESCRIPTION

This page describes the actions of the general HP-UX disc drivers when referring to a disc as either a blocked or unblocked (raw or character special) device.

Block special files access discs via the system's normal buffering mechanism. Buffering is done in such a way that concurrent access through multiple opens or mounts of the same physical device do not get out of phase. Block special files may be read and written without regard to physical disc records. Each I/O operation results in one or more logical block transactions.

There is also a raw interface via a character special file which provides for direct transmission between the disc and the user's read or write buffer. A single read or write operation results in exactly one transaction. Therefore raw I/O is considerably more efficient when many bytes are transmitted in a single operation because blocked disc access requires potentially several transactions and does not transmit directly to user space.

In raw I/O, there may be implementation dependent restrictions on the alignment of the user buffer in memory. Also, each transfer must occur on a sector boundary and must read a whole number of sectors. The sector size is a hardware dependent value (1024 bytes is the generally preferred value).

Each raw access is independent of other raw accesses and of block accesses to the same physical device. Thus, transfers are not guaranteed to occur in any particular order.

In both raw and blocked I/O, each operation is completed to the device before the call returns. In addition, blocked I/O potentially does a one (or more) block read-ahead.

The name of a raw device (its character special file name) is typically the same as the name of the corresponding blocked device (its block special file name) prefixed with an "r".

SEE ALSO intro(4), mkdev(1M), mknod(IM), and the HP-UX System Administrator Manual included with your system.

WARNING

On some systems, having both a mounted file system and a block special file open on the same device is asking for trouble; this should be avoided if possible. This is because it may be possible for some files to have private buffers in some systems.

Like discs, the cartridge tape units in command set 80 disc drives are also accessed as blocked or raw devices. However, using a cartridge tape as a file system will severely limit the life expectancy of the tape drive. Tapes should only be used for system back-up and other needs where data must be stored on tape, such as for transport or other uses.

Hew lett-Packard July 9, 1985

GRAPHICS ( 4)

Series

200 and 300 Only

GRAPHICS ( 4)

NAME

CRT graphics - information for CRT graphics devices

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/NON-STANDARD

Origin: HP

Remarks: This information is valid for Series 200 and 300 only.

DESCRIPTION

CRT graphics devices are frame-buffer based raster displays. These devices use memory mapped

I/O to obtain much higher performance than is possible with tty-based graphics terminals. CRT graphics devices should only be accessed through the STARBASE libraries. They cannot be piped or redirected to because they are not serial devices.

Special (device) files for CRT graphics devices are character special files with major number 12.

The minor number for CRT graphics devices is of the form:

OxSSTTXX where SS is a one-byte select code number, TT is a one-byte type specifier, and XX is an unused byte (should be zero).

The type field in the minor number is defined as follows: o auto-configures to one of the following: a) low resolution graphics device at physical address Ox520000 (if present). b) high resolution graphics device at physical address Ox560000 if low resolution device at Ox520000 not present. high resolution graphics device at physical address Ox560000 (unless there is no low resolution device at Ox520000, in which case type 1 is invalid).

2 high or low resolution graphics device at the select code specified by the select code field in the minor number.

Communication with a CRT graphics device is begun with an

open

system call. Multiple processes may concurrently have the graphics device open.

Close

shuts down the file descriptor associated with the graphics device. If the close is for the last system wide open on the device then the graphics device is also unmapped from the user address space; otherwise it is left mapped into the user address space (see GCUNMAP below).

Read

and write system calls are undefined and will always return ENXIO.

loctl

is used to control the graphics device. The valid ioctl commands (see <sys/graphics.h> ) are:

GClD return the identity of the CRT graphics device. The possible identities are:

98204A

9826A

9836A

4 = 9836C

98627A

6 = 98204B

9837

98700

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 November 15, 1985

GRAPHICS (4) Series 200 and 300 Only

GRAPHICS ( 4)

= hp9000s300 displays

GCON,GCOFF turn graphics "on" or "off". May be a no-op for some devices.

GCAON,GCAOFF turn alpha "on" or "off". May be a no-op for some devices.

GCMAP map the CRT graphics device into the user address space at the address specified in the ioctl argument. The argument is 'char **arg'. The value *arg is used as a requested address. The actual mapping address is then returned in *arg.

*arg is 0 then the system selects the first available address (see GCLOCKjGCUNLOCK below).

GCUNMAP remove the mapping of the CRT graphics device from the user address space.

GCLOCK ensure exclusive use of the CRT graphics device.

GCUNLOCK relinquish exclusive use of the CRT graphics device.

For all frame buffers the data bytes scan from left to right and from top to bottom. Some displays map in control areas which must be skipped over to reach the frame buffer. Some devices map individual bits to pixels, (dots on the screen.) Some map bytes or parts of bytes to pixels.

Lsb stands for least significant bit; msb stands for most siguificant bit.

98204A and 9826A

There are 300 lines of 100 bytes each. Only the odd numbered bytes are used. There is a one bit per pixel, with msb left, and lsb right.

9836A and 98204B

There are 390 lines of 64 bytes each. There is a one bit per pixel, with msb left, and lsb right.

9836C Starting Ox800 bytes from the base address, there are 390 lines of 512 bytes each. All bytes are used. There is one byte per pixel. The bottom four bits of each byte are a color map index for that pixel.

98627A

9837

98700

Starting Ox8000 bytes from the base address, there are 3 buffers of Ox8000 bytes each.

The 3 buffers are the data for red, green, and blue. There is one bit per pixel, with msb left, and lsb right. There are 64 bytes per line. The number of lines depends on the setting of control registers.

Starting Oxl0000 bytes from the base address, there are 768 lines of 1024 bytes each.

There is one pixel per byte. The lsb of each byte corresponds to a pixel.

Starting Ox10000 bytes from the base address, there are 768 lines of 1024 bytes each.

There is one pixel per byte. Each byte corresponds to the color map index of a pixel.

Hewlett-Packard - 2 November 15, 1985

GRAPHICS ( 4)

Series 200 and 300 Only

GRAPHICS ( 4 )

Series 300 Displays:

These displays have registers describing the display size. The following code computes frame buffer width and height and determines what portion of the frame buffer is being displayed.

/* unsigned char *base

<base address for display mapping>; buffeLwidth buffeL...height

(base[9} displayeLwidth

(base[13} displayecL..height

(base[17} not-.-Square

(base[5]

+ base[7];

+ base[ll];

«

((base[23} & 1)

1);

+ base[15};

+ base[19};

* /

Starting OxlOOOO bytes from the base address, there are <buffer_width> lines of

<buffer...l1eight> bytcs each. There is one pixel per byte. Each byte corresponds to the color map index of a pixel. On a monochrome display, the byte value is either 0, (black), or 1 (white).

If ((base[23] & 1) == 1) then pixels are twice as high as they are wide, and may be used in pairs to produce square double pixels.

One shared memory descriptor (see

shmget(2))

is used for each graphics device. Each shared memory descriptor is accessible only through its graphics interface. Thus, any attempt to access them through

shmat(2», shmctl(2)), shmdt(2»,

etc. results in EACCESS errors.

ERRORS

[ENXIO}

[ENOSPC]

[ENOMEM}

[ENOTTY}

SEE ALSO mknod(8). no such device or read/write not supported. cannot allocate required resources for mapping. cannot allocate sufficient memory for mapping. bad ioctl command, or an ioctl was attempted on an open file.

Hewlett-Packard

- 3 -

November 15, 1985

HPIB(4) HPIB(4)

NAME hpib - hpib interface information

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/NON-STANDARD

Origin: HP

DESCRIPTION

HP-IB is Hewlett-Packard's implementation of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic

Engineers Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation. For more information about the standard, consult any of the following documents:

IEEE Std 488-1978

IEC Pub 625-1

ANSI MC1.l

A read operation on a device connected to an HP-IB configures the computer as "listener" and the device as "talker". The read operation terminates when the number of bytes requested has been transferred, a pattern termination character is matched, or the device asserts the EOI (end or identify) line. A write operation configures the computer as "talker" and the device as

"listener". The write operation terminates when the number of bytes specified has been transferred and it has asserted EOr.

Devices connected to an HP-IB are addressed using three values. The first value, called the

major value,

is used to select the appropriate device driver. The second value is called the select

code.

The select code refers to the I/O interface card or slot number to which the device is connected. The third value is called the HP-IB address. The HP-IB address is usually set by an in-line or rotary switch on the device itself. Refer to the device reference manual for information on setting the HP-IB address.

This driver is also used to access HP-IB plotters, digitizers and printers in raw mode. A printer in raw mode is used as a graphics device.

The HP-IB address is in the range 0 through 30, unless you want to use the device-independent library (DIL) to talk to an I/O interface card on a raw bus (no automatic addressing). In this case, use HP-IB address 31. For more details on DIL, refer to the

hpib*(3D), io*(3D),

and

gpio*(3D)

manual entries.

Terminating a write operation does not depend on an asserted EOr.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200:

The major value for HP-IB raw mode printers, plotters, and digitizers is always 21 (RAW

HP-IB).

Series 500:

The major value for HP-IB printers, plotters, and digitizers is always 12 for HP 27110 cards and 37 for the Model 550 internal HP-IB.

SEE ALSO intro(4), mknod(lM), documentation for the specific device.

Hewlett-Packard

-1- ,

July 9, 1985

IOMAP(4}

Series 200/300 Implementation IOMAP( 4)

Status: R

NAME iomap -- physical address mapping

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/NON-STANDARD

Origin: HP

Remarks: This information is valid for Series 200 and 300 only.

DESCRIPTION

The iomap mechanism allows the mapping (thus direct access) of physical addresses into the user process address space. For Series 200/300 computers, the physical address space begins at

OxOOOOOO and extends to Oxffffff.

The special (device) files for iomap devices are character special files with major number 10.

The minor number for iomap devices is of the form:

OxAAAANN where AAAA is a two-byte address, and NN is a one-byte field.

The address portion of the minor number is formed by dividing the physical address by 65536.

NN*65536 is the size of the region to be mapped. For example, the minor number for a device at

Ox720000 and 128k in size is Ox007202.

Access to the iomap devices is controlled by the file permissions set on the character special file.

Multiple processes may concurrently have iomap devices opened and mapped. It is the responsibility of the processes to synchronize their accesses.

Read

and

write

system calls are not supported.

Ioctl

is used to control the iomap device. The valid ioctl commands (see <iomap.h> ) are:

IOMAPMAP map the iomap device into the user address space at the address specified in the ioctl argument. If the argument is 0 then the system selects the first available address. Multiple processes may concurrently have the iomap device mapped.

IOMAPUNMAP unmap the iomap device from the user address space.

Close

shuts down the file descriptor associated with the iomap device.

If the close is for the last system wide open on the device then the iomap device is also unmapped from the user address space; otherwise it is left mapped into the user address space (see IOMAPUNMAP above).

One shared memory descriptor (see

shmget(2))

is used for each iomap device. Shared memory descriptors are accessible only through the iomap interface. Consequently, attempts to access them through

shmat(2), shmctl(2), shmdt(2),

etc. result in EACCESS errors.

WARNING

Iomap devices should be created and used with extreme caution. Inappropriate accesses to io devices or ram may result in a system crash.

ERRORS

[ENINVAL] address field out of range, ioctl command invalid.

[ENOMEM]

[ENODEV]

[ENXIO] cannot allocate required memory for mapping. read/write unsupported. no such address.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 November 15, 1985

IOMAP(4}

Series 200/300 Implementation

[ENOSPC]

[ENOTTY]

SEE ALSO mknod(8). cannot allocate required resources for mapping. bad ioctl command, or an ioctl was attempted on an open file.

IOMAP(4}

Hewlett-Packard

- 2-

November

15,

1985

LP{ 4) LP(4)

NAME lp - line printer

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/NUCLEUS

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

All file names in / dey containing the mnemonic lp are special files providing the interface to a particular line printer. A line printer is a character special device which may optionally have an interpretation applied to the data.

If the lp mnemonic is preceded by the character r, then data is sent to the printer in raw mode.

(This could assume, for example, a graphic printer operation.) In raw mode, no interpretation is done on the data to be printed, and no page formatting is performed. The bytes are simply sent to the printer and printed as is.

H the lp mnemonic is not preceded by the character r, then the data is interpreted according to rules discussed below. The driver understands the concept of a printer page in that it has a page length (in lines), line length (in characters), and indent from the left margin (in characters). The default line length, indent, lines per page, open and close page eject, and handling of backspace are set to defaults determined when the printer is opened and recognized by the system the first time. If the printer is not recognized, the default line length is 132 characters, indent is 4 characters, lines per page is 66, one page is ejected on close and none on open, and backspace is handled for a character printer.

The following rules describe the interpretation of the data stream.

A form feed causes a page eject and resets the line counter to zero.

Multiple consecutive form-feeds are treated as a single form-feed.

The new-line character is mapped into a carriage-return/line-feed sequence, and if an offset is specified a number of blanks are inserted after the carriage-return/line-feed sequence.

A new-line that extends over the end of a page is turned into a form-feed.

Tab characters are expanded into the appropriate number of blanks (tab stops are assumed to occur every eight character positions).

Backspaces are interpreted to yield the appropriate overstrike either for a character printer or a line printer.

Lines longer than the line length minus the indent (Le., 128 characters, using the above defaults) are truncated.

Carriage-return characters cause the line to be overstruck.

Two ioctl(2) system calls are available to control the lines per page, characters per line, and indent. At either open or close time, if no page eject is requested, the paper will not be moved.

#include <sys/lprio.h> ioctl (fildes, command, arg) struct lprio *arg;

The commands are:

LPRGET Get the current printer status information and store in the lprio structure referenced by argo

LPRSET Set the current printer status information from the structure referenced by argo

Hewlett-Packard -1July 9, 1985

LP{ 4)

LP(4)

Thus, indent, page width and page length can be set with an external program. If the columns field is set to zero, the defaults are restored at the next open.

FILES

/dev/lp default or standard printer used by some HP-UX commands;

/dev /[r]lp* special files for printers

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:

The number of characters per line (80 or 132) and wrap-around can be selected/enabled via the minor number in the mknod(lM) command. See the System Administrator

Manual

for details.

The LPRGET and LPRSET ioetl commands are not currently supported.

Series 200:

The uppercase-only flag, the no-overprint flag, the raw-mode flag, and no-page-ejecton-open-or-close flag can be selected (enabled) by appropriate use of the minor number in the mknod(lM) command. See the HP-UX System Administrator Manual for details.

Integral PC:

This version of Ip is not supported on the Integral PC. Refer to the Integral Personal

Computer Programmer's Guide

for more information about the Ip implementation on the

Intregral PC.

SEE ALSO

Ip(l), ioctl(2), intro(4).

Hewlett-Packard

July 9,1985

MEM(4)

NAME

mem, lanem - core memory

HP-UX

COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/Optional

Origin: System III

Remarks: Not all HP-UX systems provide the mem and kmem files. Programs which use them cannot expect to be portable from one HP-UX implementation to another.

DESCRIPTION

Mem is a special file that is an image of the core memory of the computer. It may be used, for example, to examine, and even to patch the system.

Byte addresses in mem are interpreted as memory addresses. References to non-existent locations cause errors to be returned.

Examining and patching device registers is likely to lead to unexpected results when read-only or write-only bits are present.

The file kmem is the same as mem except that kernel virtual memory rather than physical memory is accessed.

Mem and kmem should always be protected so that only the super-user can read and write them, othewise both privacy and system security are compromised.

FILES

/dev/mem, /dev/kmem

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:

Mem and kmem are not provided.

Series 200:

Memory does not begin at physical address O. Instead, it occupies the upper portion of the physical address space from Ox900000 through Oxffffff, beginning at address Oxffffff and moving downward. Thus, if one megabyte of RAM is installed, it occupies addresses

OxfOOOOO through Oxffffff.

BUGS

On some machines memory files are accessed one byte at a time, an inappropriate method for some device registers.

Hewlett-Packard -1July 9, 1985

MODEM(4) MODEM (4)

NAME modem - asynchronous serial modem line control

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin: HP

DESCRIPTION

This section describes the two modes of modem line control and the three types of terminal port access. It also discusses the effect of several bits of the

termio

structure which affect modem line control. The modem related

ioctl(2)

system calls are discussed at the end of the document.

There are several terms that are used within the following discussion which will be defined here for reference. "Modem control lines"

(CONTROL) are generally defined as those outgoing modem lines that are automatically controlled by the driver. "Modem status lines"

(STATUS) are generally defined as those incoming modem lines that are automatically monitored by the driver.

CONTROL and

STATUS for a terminal file vary according to the modem line control mode of the file (see Modem line control modes below). An

open(2)

to a port will be considered to be blocked if it is waiting for another file on the same port to be closed. An

open

to a port will be considered to be pending if it is waiting for the

STATUS to be raised. An

open

to a port will be considered to be successful if the

open

system call has returned to the calling process without error.

Open flag bits

The only

open

flag bit recognized by the driver is the

O-.NDELA Y bit. When this bit is set, an

open

call to the driver will never become blocked. If possible, the

open

will be returned immediately as successful, and the driver will continue the process of opening the tty file. If it is not possible, then the

open

will be returned immediately with the appropriate error code as described in the appropriate section.

Termio bits

The CLOCAL bit in the

termio

structure (see termio(4) ) is used to remove the driver's automatic monitoring of the modem lines. However, the user's ability to control the modem lines is determined only by the mode in effect and does not depend on the state of

CLOCAL.

Normally, the driver will monitor and require the STATUS to be raised. An

open

system call will raise the CON-

TROL and wait for the

STATUS before completing unless the

CLOCAL bit is set. (If the

O-.NDELA Y bit is set, the

open

will be returned immediately, but the driver will otherwise continue to monitor the modem lines as normal based on the state of the

CLOCAL bit.) If

CLOCAL is set when the last

close(2)

is issued to the port, the driver will not attempt to break any modem connection which may exist unless the

HUPCL bit is set (see below). Normally, loss of the

STATUS will cause the driver to break the modem connection and lower the

CONTROL; however, if CLOCAL is set, any changes in the STATUS will be ignored. A connection is required before any data may be read or written, unless

CLOCAL is set. Any timers that would normally be in effect

(see Modem line control modes and Modem timers below) will be stopped while

CLOCAL is set.

When the

CLOCAL bit is changed from clear to set, the driver will assume the existence" of an active device (such as a modem) on the port regardless of the STATUS. If any of the CONTROL are raised at that point in time, they will continue in that state. The STATUS will no longer be actively monitored. When the

CLOCAL bit is changed from set to clear, the driver will resume actively monitoring the

STATUS.

If all of the

CONTROL are raised at that point in time, the driver will attempt to begin or continue a modem connection. If any of the CONTROL are not raised, the driver will break the modem connection. If any of the STATUS are not raised, the driver will act as though those signals were lost as described in Modem line control modes below. If the device is a controlling terminal, a

hangup

signal will be sent to the process group.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 -

November 15, 1985

MODEM(4) MODEM(4)

The HUPCL bit in the

termio

structure determines the action of the driver regarding the CON-

TROL when the last

close

system call is issued to a terminal file. If the HUPCL bit is set, the driver will lower the CONTROL at

close

time and the modem connection will be broken. If

HUPCL is not set and a modem connection exists, it will continue to exist, even after the

close

is issued.

Terminal port access types

There are three types of modem access: call-in connections, call-out connections, and direct (no modem control) connections. A given port may be accessed through all three types of connection by accessing different files. The modem access type of a terminal file is determined by the file's major and/or minor device numbers.

The call-in type of access is used when the connection is expected to be established by an incoming call. This is the type that would be used by

getty(lM)

to accept logins over a modem. When an

open

is issued to such a file, the driver may wait for an incoming call and will then raise the

CONTROL based on the current mode (see below) of the port. When the port is closed, the driver may lower the CONTROL depending on the HUPCL bit.

The call-out type of access is used when the connection is expected to be established by an outgoing call. This would be used by programs such as

uucp(l).

When an

open

is issued to such a file, the driver will immediately raise the CONTROL and wait for a connection based on the mode currently in effect. When the port is closed, the driver may lower the CONTROL depending on the HUPCL bit.

The direct type of access is used when no driver modem control is desired. This could then be used for directly connected terminals that use a three-wire connection, or to talk to a modem before a connection has been established. The second case allows a program to give dialing instructions to the modem. Neither the CLOCAL nor the HUPCL bits have any effect on a port accessed through a direct file. (However, both bits may be inherited by other types of files; see

Terminal port access interlock below.) An

open

to a direct file does not affect the CONTROL and does not depend on any particular state of the STATUS to succeed. When the file is closed, the driver will not affect the state of the CONTROL. If a modem connection has been established, it will continue to exist. Setting the speed of a direct file to BO (see

termio(4) ) will be considered an impossible speed change and will be ignored. It will not affect the CONTROL.

Modem line control modes

There are two modes of modem line control: CCITT mode and simple mode. A given port may have only one of these two modes in effect at any given point in time. An attempt to

open

a port with a mode other than the one in effect (from a pending or successful

open

on a different file) will cause the

open

to be returned with an ENXIO error. The modem access type of a terminal file is determined by the file's major and/or minor device numbers.

CCITT mode is used for connections to switched line modems. The CONTROL for CCITT mode are Data Terminal Ready (DTR) and Request to Send (RTS). The STATUS are Data Set Ready

(DSR) , Data Carrier Detect (DCD), and Clear to Send (CTS). Additionally, the Ring Indicate (RI) signal indicates the presence of an incoming call. When aconnection is begun (an incoming call for a call-in file or an

open

issued to a call-out file), the CONTROL are raised and a connection timer (see Modem timers below) is started. If the STATUS become raised before the time period has elapsed, a connection is established and the

open

request is returned successfully. If the time period expires, the CONTROL are lowered and the connection is aborted. For a call-in file, the driver will wait for another incoming call; for a call-out file, the

open

will be returned with an EIO error. Once a connection is established, loss of either DSR or CTS will cause the CONTROL to be lowered and a

hangup

signal to be generated if the device is a controlling terminal.

DCD is lost, a timer is started. If DCD resumes before the time period has expired, the connection will be maintained. However, no data transfer will occur during this time. The driver will stop transmitting characters, and any characters received will be discarded. If DCD is not restored within the allotted time, the connection will be broken as described above for DSR and CTS. If the modem

Hewlett-Packard

- 2 -

November 15, 1985

MODEM(4) MODEM(4) connection is to be broken when the

close

system call is issued (i.e. HUPCL is set), then the CON-

TROL will be lowered and the

close

will be returned as successful. However, no further

opens

will be allowed until after both DSR and CTS have been lowered by the modem, and the hangup timer

(see Modem timers below) has expired. The action taken in response to an

open

during this time will be the same as if the port were still open. (See Terminal port access interlock below.)

When a port is in CCITT mode, the driver has complete control of the modem lines and the user is not allowed to change the setting of the CONTROL or affect which STATUS are actively monitored by the driver (see Modem ioctls below). This is to provide strict adherence with the

CCITT recommendations.

Simple mode is used for connections to devices which require only a simple method of modem line control. This can include devices such as black boxes, data switches, or for system-to-system connections. It can also be used with modems which can not operate under the CCITT recommendations. The CONTROL for simple mode consists of only DTR. The STATUS consists of only DCD .

When an

open

is issued, the CONTROL is raised but no connection timer is started. When the

STATUS becomes raised, a connection is established and the

open

request is returned successfully.

Once a connection is established, loss of the STATUS will cause the CONTROL to be lowered and a

hangup

signal to be generated if the device is a controlling terminal.

When a port is in simple mode, the driver will normally control the modem lines. However, the user is allowed to change the setting of the CONTROL (see Modem ioctls below).

Terminal port access interlock

An interlock mechanism is provided between the three access types of terminal files. It prevents more than one file from being successfully opened at a time, but allows certain

opens

to succeed while others are pending so that a port can be opened through a call-out connection while

getty

has a pending

open

at a call-in connection. The three access types are given a priority that determines which

open

will succeed if more than one file has an

open

issued against it. The three access types are ordered from lowest priority to highest as follows: call-in, call-out, and direct.

If an

open

is issued to a port which already has a successful

open

on it of a lower priority type, the new

open

will be returned with an EBUSY error. (EBUSY will also be returned if a CCITT call-in file is not yet successful, but has received an incoming call indication.) If the lower priority

open

is pending, the new

open

will succeed if possible, or will be left pending if waiting for the

STATUS. If a higher priority

open

has succeeded or is pending, the new

open

will be blocked, unless the new

open

has the O--..NDELA Y flag bit set, in which case the

open

will be returned with an EBUSY error. Once an

open

on one type of file is successful, any pending

opens

on lower priority files will become blocked.

When a file of one priority is closed, a blocked

open

on the next lower priority type file will become active. If all of the STATUS are raised, the

open

will succeed, otherwise the

open

will become pending waiting for the STATUS. If the lower priority

open

is successful (because the connection was maintained when the higher priority file was closed), the port characteristics

(speed, parity, etc.) that were set by the higher priority file will be inherited by the lower priority file. If the connection is not maintained through the

close,

the port characteristics will be set to default values at the next successful

open.

Modem timers

There are four timers currently defined for use with modem connections. The first three of the timers are applicable only to CCITT mode connections. In general, the effect of changing a timer value while the timer is running is system dependent. However, setting the timer value to zero is guaranteed to disable the timer even if it is running.

The connect timer is used to limit the amount of time to wait for a connection to be established once it has been begun. This timer is started when an incoming call has been received on a call-in file, or when an

open

has been issued on a call-out file for which no

opens

are already pending. If

Hewlett-Packard

- 3 -

November 15, 1985

(

"'-

MODEM(4) MODEM(4) the connection is completed in time, the timer is aborted. If the time period expires, the connection is aborted. For a call-in file, the driver will again wait for an incoming call and the

open

will remain pending. For a call-out file, the

open

will be returned with an EIO error.

The carrier detect timer is used to limit the amount of

Lime Lo wait before causing a disconnect if

DCD drops. If carrier is not re-established in this time, a disconnect will occur. If carrier is reestablished before the timeout, the timer will be aborted and the connection maintained. During the period when carrier is not raised, no data will be transferred across the line.

The no activity timer is used to limit the amount of time a connection will remain open with no data transfer across the line. When the data line becomes quiescent with no data transfer, this timer will be started. If data is again transferred over the line in either direction before the time limit, the timer will be aborted. If no activity occurs before the timeout has occurred, the driver will disconnect the line. This can be used to avoid long and costly telephone connections when data transfer has been stopped either normally or abnormally.

The last timer defined, the hangup timer, is used for both CCITT and simple modes. This timer controls the amount of time to wait after disconnecting a modem line before allowing another

open

to be allowed. This time period should be made long enough to guarantee that the connection has been terminated by the telephone switching equipment. If this period is not long enough, the telephone connection may not be broken and a succeeding

open

may complete with the old connection.

Modem ioctls

Several ioetl system calls apply to manipulation of modem lines. They use the following information defined in <sys/modem.h>.

#define NMTIMER 6 typedef unsigned long mflag; struct mtimer { unsigned short m_timers[NMTIMER];

};

Individual modem lines are represented by bits in an unsigned long variable as follows:

MRTS 00010000000 Request to Send

MCTS 00004000000 Clear to Send outbound inbound

MDSR 00002000000 Data Set Ready inbound

MDCD 00000400000 Data Carrier Detect inbound

MDTR 00000000040 Data Terminal Ready outbound

MRI 00000000010 Ring Indicator

MDRS 00000000004 Data Rate Select inbound outbound

The timer values are defined in the array IIL-timers. The relative position of the timer and default initial values and units for each timer are as follows:

MTCONNECT

MTCARRIER

MTNOACTIVITY

MTHANGUP

Reserved

25 s

400 ms o min

250 ms

A value of zero for any timer will disable that timer.

The modem line ioetl system calls have the form: ioctl (fildes, command, arg) unsigned long *arg;

Hewlett-Packard - 4 November 15, 1985

MODEM (4) MODEM (4)

The commands using this form are:

MCGETA Get the current state of both inbound and outbound modem lines and store in the unsigned long referenced by argo A raised line will be indicated by a one bit in the appropriate position.

MCSETA Set the outbound modem lines from the unsigned long referenced by argo

Setting an outbound bit to one causes that line to be raised and zero to be lowered. Setting bits for inbound lines has no effect. Setting any bits while in CCITT mode has no effect. The change to the modem lines is immediate and using this form while characters are still being output may cause unpredictable results.

MCSETAW Wait for the output to drain and set the new parameters as described above.

MCSETAF Wait for the output to drain, then flush the input queue and set the new parameters as described above.

The timer value ioctl system calls have the form: ioctl (fildes, command, arg) struct mtimer *arg;

The commands using this form are:

MCGETT Get the current timer value settings and store in the enced by argo

mtimer

structure refer-

MCSETT Set the timer values from the structure referenced by argo

For any timer, setting the timer value to its previous value has no effect.

FILES

/dev/tty*

/dev/ttyd*

/dev/cul*

/dev/cua*

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:

For the HP27140A 6-port modem multiplexer, the ranges and resolutions of the timers are as follows:

MTCONNECT 0-255 sec, 1 sec resolution

MTCARRIER 0-2550 msec, 10 msec resolution

MTNOACTIVITY 0-1092 min, 1 min resolution

MTHANGUP 0-65535 msec, 10 msec resolution

If a timer is set out of its range, then the maximum value that timer can assume is used instead.

For the HP27128A Asynchronous Serial Interface, the ioctl requests described above are not supported. The timers have fixed values as follows:

MTCONNECT 25 sec

MTCARRIER 400 msec

MTNOACTIVITY 0 min

MTHANGUP 500 msec

This interface only supports the call-in and call-out port access types, and does not support the direct access type.

It is not possible to change the state of the CLOCAL bit when using CCITT mode.

Hewlett-Packard

- 5 -

November 15, 1985

MODEM(4) MODEM(4)

Simultaneous call-in and call-out open atempts in CCITT mode are not allowed.

The default state of the CLOCAL bit upon first open is determined by the state of switch on the interface (See the

System Administrator

Manua~.

SEE ALSO stty(I), mknod(1M), ioctJ(2), termio(4).

HP-UX System Administrator Manual

WARNING

It is occasionally possible that a process may open a call-out file at approximately the same time as an incoming call is received. In some cases, the call-out connection may be satisfied by the incoming call. In general, however, the results are indeterminate. If necessary, the situation can be avoided by the use of two modems and ports, one for call-out connections and the other for receiving incoming calls.

Hewlett-Packard

- 6-

November 15, 1985

MT(4) MT(4)

NAME magtape - magnetic tape interface and controls

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: Magnetic Tape Support HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: UCB and HP

DESCRIPTION

The files / dey /mh and / dey /rmh refer to specific tape drives; the behavior of the specific unit is specified by several bits in the least significant digit of the minor number in the mknod(1M) command.

There are three bits controlling the operation of the tape drive. These bits are usually encoded into the minor number of mknod(8). Refer to the System Administrator Manual for your computer for details. rewind When this bit is cleared, the tape is automatically rewound upon close. This is normally done for units numbered 0-3 and 8-11. mode When this bit is set, the tape drive behaves like the Berkeley tape drivers; when clear the driver behaves like System III. The details are described below. The ioetl operations described below work in both modes on raw tapes only. density When cleared, the tape drive is run at 1600 bpi; when set it is run at 800 bpi. The 800 bpi drives are usually numbered 0-7, and 1600 bpi are usually numbered 8-15.

When opened for reading or writing, the tape is assumed to be positioned as desired.

When a file is opened for writing and then closed, a double end-of-file (double tape mark) is written. If the device has the rewind bit set, the tape is rewound; otherwise, the tape is positioned before the second EOF just written.

When a read-only file is closed and the rewind bit is set, the tape is rewound.

If the rewind bit is not set, the behavior depends on the mode bit. For System III compatibility, the tape is positioned after the EOF following the data just read. For Berkeley compatibility, the tape is not repositioned in any way.

The EOF is returned as a zero-length read.

By judiciously choosing mt files, it is possible to read and write multi-file tapes.

A tape treated as a block device consists of several 512 byte records terminated by an EOF. To the extent possible, the system makes it possible to treat the tape like any other file. Seeks have their usual meaning and it is possible to read or write a byte at a time (although very inadvisable).

The mt files discussed above are useful when it is desired to access the tape in a way compatible with ordinary files. When foreign tapes are to be dealt with, and especially when long records are to be read or written, the raw interface is appropriate. The raw interface is described below.

The special files associated with a raw tape interface are named rmh. Each read or write call reads or writes the next record on the tape. In the write case the record has the same length as the buffer given.

During a read, the record size is passed back as the number of bytes read, up to the buffer size specified. The number of bytes ignored is available in the mt_resid field of the mtget structure via the MTIOCGET call of ioetl. In raw tape I/O, the buffer and size may have implementation

. dependent alignment restrictions. Seeks are ignored, instead the ioetl operations described below are available. An EOF is returned as a zero-length read, with the tape positioned after the EOF, so that the next read will return the next record.

Using loctl With Magnetic Tape

The ioetl system call can be used to manipulate magnetic tapes; refer to the include file

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 -

July 10, 1985

MT(4)

/usr/inelude/sys/mtio.h

for a description of the possible operations.

The following code fragment shows how an

ioetl

call might be used to perform several mag tape operations:

#include <sys/types.h>

#include <sys/mtio.h>

#include <stdio.h> main(argc, argv) int argc; char *argv[];

{ int fd; struct mtop top;

/* open mag tape device file */ top.mt_count = 1; switch( *argv[l]) { case Ill: case

121: case

131:

/* write an eof

*/ top.mt_op

MTWEOF; break;

/* rewind the tape */ top.mt_op = MTREW; break;

/ * backspace record

* / top.mt_op = MTBSR; break; default: fprintf(stderr, "Unknown option: %sO, argv[I]); exit(I); break;

} fd

=

ioctl(fd, MTIOCTOP, &top);

}

This program accepts one argument which selects the operation to perform. The structure template

mtop

is defined in sys/mtio,h, and contains two parameters defining the operation to perform

(mLop)

and how many operations to perform many others not used) are defined in sys/mtio.h.

(mLeount).

All constants used above (plus

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200:

Block magnetic tape is not supported.

The density bit cannot select 800 bpi; 800 bpi is not supported.

The settings of the mode, rewind, and density bits are reflected in the minor numbers used to create the special file names (see

mkdev(8)).

Series 500:

Block magnetic tape is not supported.

The density bit cannot select 800 bpi; 800 bpi is not supported.

FILES

/dev/mt*

/dev/rmh

Hewlett-Packard -2July 10, 1985

MT(4) MT(4)

SEE ALSO

intro(4), mkdev(1M), mknod(lM), and the HP-UX System Administrator Manual included with your system.

Hewlett-Packard -3July 10, 1985

NULL(4)

NAME null- null file ("bit bucket")

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System III

DESCRIPTION

Data written on a null special file is discarded.

Reads from a null special file always return 0 bytes.

FILES

/dev/null

NULL ( 4)

Hewlett-Packard

-1July 9,1985

PTY(4)

NAME pty - pseudo terminal driver

SYNOPSIS pseudo-device pty

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin: Berkeley 4.2

DESCRIPTION

The

pty

driver provides a conununication path between an HP-UX application process and a supporting server process, and behaves much like a terminal/computer communication path. It is structured so that output from either process acts as input to the other, thus the term

pseudo

terminal. The slave-side of

pty

interacts with the application process, and its behavior is defined by

termio(4).

The master-side of

pty

interacts with the server process which controls the application process through

pty

as if

pty

were a hardware terminal interface.

The following

ioctl

requests, defined in <sys/ptyio.h>, apply only to master side of pty:

TIOCBREAK

Causes a break operation to be done on the slave side of the pty. This action is the same as if a user had hit the break key on a real terminal. Takes no parameters.

TIOCSIGSEND

Causes a signal to be sent on the slave side of the pty to the current tty process group of the slave side. The value of the parameter is taken to be the signal number to be sent.

An EINV AL error will be returned and no signal sent if the specified signal number does not refer to a legal signal (see signal(2)). Note that this request allows the server process to send signals to processes that are not owned by the same user id.

TIOCSTOP

Stops data flowing from the slave side of the pty to the master side (e.g. like typing'S).

Takes no parameters.

TIOCSTART

Restarts output (stopped by TIOCSTOP or by typing '8). Takes no parameters.

TIOCPKT

Enable/disable

packet

mode. Packet mode is enabled by specifying (by reference) a nonzero int parameter and disabled by specifying (by reference) a zero int parameter.

When applied to the master side of a pseudo terminal, each subsequent

read

from the master side will return data written on the slave part of the pseudo terminal preceded by a zero byte (symbolically defined as TIOCPKT---.DATA), or a single byte reflecting control status information. In the latter case, the byte is an inclusive-or of zero or more of the bits:

TIOCPKTJLUSHREAD whenever the read queue for the slave side is flushed.

TIOCPKTJLUSHWRITE whenever the write queue for the slave side is flushed.

TIOCPKT --.STOP whenever data flowing from the slave side of the pty to the master side is stopped by means of '8, TIOCSTOP, or TCXONC.

TIOCPKT--.START whenever data flowing from the slave side of the pty to the master side is restarted.

Hewlett-Packard -1July 10, 1985

PTY(4) PTY(4)

TIOCPKT~OSTOP whenever the stop and start characters get set to ·S(Q.

TIOCPKT-.NOSTOP whenever the stop and start characters get set to something other than ·S(Q.

TIOCREMOTE

A mode for the master half of a pseudo terminal, independent of TIOCPKT. This mode causes input to the pseudo terminal to be flow controlled and not input edited (regardless of the terminal mode). Each write to the master side produces a record boundary for the process reading the slave side. In normal usage, a write of data is like the data typed as a line on the terminal; a write of 0 bytes is like typing an end-of-file character (the EOF character as defined in termio(4)). The data read by the slave side is identical to the data written on the master side. Data written on the slave side and read on the master side with TIOCREMOTE enabled is still subject to the normal termio(4) processing.

TIOCREMOTE can be used when doing remote line editing in a window manager, or whenever flow controlled input is required. The request takes one int sized parameter, passed by value. When zero, it disables TIOCREMOTE; when one it enables

TIOCREMOTE. TIOCREMOTE is only effective when TIOCTTY (explained below) is also enabled, and all data buffered in the pseudo terminal will be flushed when this request is made.

TIOCTTY

Enable or disable all termio( 4) processing by pty. When disabled, all data is passed through the pty with no modification. Termio(4) processing (of input and output such as tab expansion) is enabled by specifying (by reference) a nonzero int parameter and disabled by specifying (by reference) a zero int parameter. Default is to be enabled. When

TIOCTTY is disabled, the following pty modes are also inoperable: TIOCBREAK,

TIOCSTOP, TIOCSTART, TIOCPKT, TIOCREMOTE, and TIOCMONITOR. Issuing a TIOCTTY ioctl request will also flush all data buffered in the pseudo terminal, and release any processes currently blocked waiting for data.

When TIOCTTY is enabled (the default case), all termio(4) ioctl requests are handled by the pty driver itself. When TIOCTTY is disabled, slave side termio(4) ioctl requests are either ignored completely or passed to the master side depending upon the state of TIOC-

TRAP below. Slave side non-termio(4) ioctl requests are not affected by the state of

TIOCTTY. They are always ignored completely or passed to the master side depending upon the state of TIOCTRAP below.

Data being written through a pseudo terminal with TIOCTTY disabled will be handled in a manner similar to the way data flows through a pipe. A write request will block in the pty until all of its data has been written into the pty. A read request will block if there is no data available unless the O-.NDELA Y flag is set (see fcntl(2)). When data is available to be read, the read request will return whatever is available, and will not wait for the number of bytes requested to be satisfied. The number of bytes a pty can contain in its internal memory is implementation dependent, but will always be at least 256 bytes in each direction. For example, a write on the slave side of a pty of 1024 bytes might be read on the master side by four read requests returning 256 bytes each. The size of the chunks of data that are read is not guaranteed to be consistent, but no data will be lost.

Opening and closing of the master side acts as a modern connection/disconnection on a real terminal as far as the slave side is concerned. Having no server on the master side will cause opens on the slave side to hang until there is a server. (termio( 4) description of O-.NDELA Y interaction with pty is also supported.) Opens to the master side are exclusive. Attempts to open an already open master side of a pty will return errno(2) error EBUSY. (Attempts to open a non-existent pty will return errno(2) ENXIO.) Closing the master side of a pty sends a 8IGHUP hangup signal to the tty process group number of the corresponding slave side and flushes pending input and

Hewlett-Packard -2July 10, 1985

PTY(4) PTY(4) output.

Any termio(4) ioctl request can also be applied to the master side of the pty, unless TIOCTTY has been disabled.

IOCTL/OPEN/CLOSE TRAPPING

The capabilities that follow give additional flexibility and control for servers connected to the master side.

When trapping of ioctl/open/close is enabled, ioctl(2), open(2), and close(2) requests made to the slave side will notify the server on the master side of each request. The close request will only notify the server and continue to completion, while the open and ioctl requests will not complete until the master side has had a chance to handle them. The master side acknowledges completion via an ioctl to the master side.

If the pty is not enabled to pass ioctl(2), open(2), and close(2) from the slave to the master, then they will be ignored (except for termio(4) related processing).

The following ioctl calls apply only to the master side of a pty and pertain to trapping open, close, and ioctl. They are also defined in <sys/ptyio.h>:

TIOCTRAP

Enable or disable trapping of ioctl, open, and close from the slave side. Trapping is enabled by specifying (by reference) a nonzero int parameter and disabled by specifying

(by reference) a zero int parameter. Default is to be disabled. (termio(4) ioctl requests will not be trapped, unless TIOCTTY is also disabled or TIOCMONITOR is enabled.)

TIOCTRAPSTATUS

Find out if any ioctl/open/close traps are pending. The argument points to an int, that will be set to one if anything is pending and zero if nothing is pending. This ioctl request is used when the preferred method of a select(2) "exceptional condition" is not available.

TIOCREQGET

In response to a select(2) "exceptional condition" on the master side, this ioctl request will read the pending ioctl, open, or close information into memory pointed to by the argument in the form: struct request--info { int request; int argget; int argset; short pgrp; short pid; int errno_error; int return_value;

};

All elements of request--info refer to the slave side of the pty. Enumerating the elements: request is the ioctl command received. argget argset is the ioctl request to apply to master side to receive the trapped ioctl structure if there is one to receive, (a zero value means there is none).

(When nonzero, argget is a TIOCARGGET request with the size field precomputed. ) is the ioctl request to apply to master side to send back the resulting ioctl structure if there is one to send back, (a zero value means there is none).

(When nonzero, argset is a TIOCARGSET request with the size field precomputed. )

Hewlett-Packard

-3July 10, 1985

PTY(4)

PTY(4) pgrp pid errno_error is the process group number of the process doing the operation. is the process id of the process doing the operation. is the

errno

(2) error code (initialized to zero) to be returned by ioctl on the slave side. retum.-value (initialized to zero) is the success value to be returned by ioctl on the slave side when

errno_error

is not set.

For the case that the ioctl argument received on the slave side is not a pointer, its value is stored as four bytes that can be retrieved with an ioctl request to the master side equal to

argget.

When an open or close is being passed,

request

will be set to TIOCOPEN or TIOC-

CLOSE, respectively. For TIOCOPEN and TIOCCLOSE, both

argget

and

argset

will be of zero because there is no ioctl structure. When TIOCTTY is enabled, the termio(4) definition of open/close will be executed first, before being passed to the master side.

Note, while all opens are trapped, only the last close on a particular inode for a pty slave side is trapped by the pty.

If a TIOCREQGET is done before anything has been trapped, this master side ioctl will block until a slave side ioctl, open, or close is trapped.

TIOCREQSET

Done to complete the handshake started by a previous TIOCREQGET. The argument should point to the request~nfo structure as defined by the TIOCREQGET.

Before doing this ioctl, to complete the handshake, the server should set

errno_error

to an errno(2) error value to be passed back to the slave side.

If there is no error,

errno_error

can be left alone because the pty will have initialized it to zero. Also, when there is no error,

retur1L-value

should be set, if other than a zero result is desired. It should be noted that the ability to determine the return value and error code for a request to the slave side is only available for trapped ioctl requests. The server will not be able to set these values if the trapped request is an open or a close.

If the TIOCREQSET request is made and

request

in the passed request~nfo structure does not equal the trapped value, errno(2) EINVAL will be returned. (EINVAL is also returned if there is no trapped ioctl/open/close.)

If the trapped slave-side request has been interrupted by a signal between the time that the server has done the TIOCREQGET and the TIOCREQSET, an EINVAL error will be returned by the TIOCREQSET request.

TIOCMONITOR

Enable or disable read only trapping of termio ioctl requests when TIOCTTY is also enabled. (When TIOCTTY is disabled, TIOCMONITOR has no effect. Also TIOC-

MONITOR is independent of TIOCTRAP.) Trapping is enabled by specifying (by reference) a nonzero int parameter and disabled by specifying (by reference) a zero int parameter. Default is to be disabled.

This allows a server process attached to the master side of the pty to know when characteristics of the line discipline in the pty are changed by an application on the slave side.

The mechanism for handshaking trapped termio(4) requests (when TIOCTTY is enabled) is the same as that for non-termio( 4) ioctl requests; except that any changes or error conditions set by the server on the master side will have no effect.

(It is recommended that termio( 4) ioctl requests be used on the master side to interrogate the configured state of the line discipline in the pty. One reason for this is to compensate for the window of time before TIOCMONITOR is enabled, when termio(4) ioctls were not trapped.)

When using

select(2)

on the master side of a pty, the "exceptional condition" refers to an open, close, or ioctl pending on the slave side. Ready for reading or writing refers to a read, or write

Hewlett-Packard -4July 10, 1985

PTY(4) PTY( 4)

pending respectively, from the point of view of the master side.

Of the ioctls that are subject to being trapped, only one per pty may be handled at one time.

This means that when an application does a non-termio(4) ioctl to the slave side, all other ioctls to the same pty slave side will be blocked until the first one is handshaked back by the master side. (Ioctls that are not trapped, such as termio(4) when TIOCTTY is enabled and TIOCMON-

ITOR is disabled, will not be blocked.) This permits the implementation of indivisible operations by an ioctl call on the slave side that is passed to the server process.

In summary, handshaking of an ioctl/open/close on the master side is done using the following steps:

Slave Side open/close/ioctl Trapped.

This is indicated via a select(2) exceptional condition or via the TIOC-

TRAPSTATUS ioctl request.

TIOCREQGET ioctl request.

This is done to find out what slave open/ciose/ioctl is trapped.

argget

ioctl request.

This optional ioctl is done if

argget

is nonzero and the server wants to do more than just reject the trapped slave ioctl.

argset

ioctl request.

This optional ioctl is done if

argset

is nonzero and the server wants to pass back a modified ioctl structure. It is done after the trapped ioctl is processed via the server on the master side.

TIOCREQSET ioctl request.

This is done to complete the trapped slave open/c1ose/ioctl. In case the trapped request is an iodl,

errno_error

should be set appropriately.

retur1L-value

should be set for trapped slave ioctls if

errno_error

is set to zero.

While a process is waiting in the slave side of the pty for the server to complete a handshake, it is susceptible to receiving signals. The following master side ioctl allows the server process to control how the pty will respond when a signal attempts to interrupt a trapped open or ioctl request.

TIOCSIGMODE

Sets the signal handling state of the pty to the mode specified as the argument. The mode can have three values, which are TIOCSIGBLOCK, TIOCSIGABORT, and TIOC-

SIGNORMAL.

TIOCSIGBLOCK

Causes some signals that are destined for the process whose open/ioctl is trapped to be postponed. The signals that are blocked are those which would otherwise cause the process to jump to an installed signal handler. Signals that are currently being ignored or would cause the slave-side process to be aborted will not be held off. When the server process completes the handshake by means of the TIOCREQSET ioctl request, the slave-side process will return to the calling program, and any pending signals will then be acted upon. Any signals that the user has blocked by means of

sigblock(2)

will continue to be blocked.

TIOCSIGABORT

Forces all signals that interrupt a trapped open/ioctl request to not be restartable. The server process will set this mode when it wants the interrupted requests to return to the calling program with an EINTR error.

TIOCSIGNORMAL

This is the default mode of the pty. If a signal interrupts a trapped open/ioctl request, the user's signal handler routine has the option of specifying whether the request is to be restarted. If the request is to be restarted, it will be executed

Hewlett-Packard -5July

10,

1985

PTY(4) PTY(4) again from the begining, and the server will have to do another TIOCREQGET to start the handshake over again. If the user's signal handler routine specifies that the interrupted request is not to be restarted, then the request will return to the calling program with EINTR upon completion of the signal handler. Note that it is not guaranteed that the restarted request will be the very next one to be trapped.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200:

The largest ioctl argument passable between master and slave sides is currently limited to 128 bytes.

Series 500:

The largest ioctl argument passable between master and slave sides is currently limited to 128 bytes.

The TIOCREMOTE mode is not currently implemented.

FILES

/dev /ptym/pty[pqrstuvw]*

/dev /pty /tty[pqrstuvw]* master pseudo terminals slave pseudo terminals

DIAGNOSTICS

None.

BUGS

It is not possible for the slave side to indicate an end-of-fle condition to the master side.

When using TIOCREMOTE, a single write to the master side of greater than 256 bytes may result in multiple smaller records being read from the slave side instead of only one record.

SEE ALSO termio(4), ioctl(2), select(2), signal(2).

Hewlett-Packard -6July 10, 1985

STTYV6(4) STTYV6(4)

NAME stty - terminal interface for Version 6/PWB compatability

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/STANDARD Version 6 and PWB Compatability

Origin: System V

Remarks: These faclilities are included to aid in conversion of old programs, and should not be used in new code. Use the interface described in termio( 4). Note that these conversions do not work for programs ported from Version 7 UNIX, since some Version 7 flags are defined differently.

DESCRIPTION

These routines attempt to map the Version 6 and PWB stty and gtty calls into the current ioctls that perform the same functions. The mapping cannot be perfect. The way the features are translated is described below. The reader should be familiar with termio (4) before studying this page.

The following data structure is defined in the include file sgtty.h: struct sgttyb { char char char char int sg~speed; sg_ospeed; sg_erase; sg-kill; sg--Rags;

input speed output speed

* /

erase character

kill character

mode flags

* /

The flags, as defined in sgtty.h, are:

#define

HUPCL

XTABS

LCASE

ECHO

CRMOD

RAW

ODDP

EVENP

ANYP

NLDELAY

TBDELAY

CRDELAY

VTDELAY

BSDELAY

#define

CRO

CR1

CR2

CR3

NLO

NL1

NL2

NL3

TABO

TAB1

NOAL

FFO

FF1

010

020

040

0100

0200

0300

001400

002000

030000

040000

0100000

010000

020000

030000

000400

001000

001400

002000

004000

040000

Hewlett-Packard

-1July 10, 1985

STTYV6(4) STTYV6(4)

#define

BSO

BS1 o

0100000

When the

8tty(2)

command

(ioctl

TIOCSETP) is executed, the flags in the old sgttyb structure are mapped into their new equivalents in the termio structure. Then the TCSET A command is executed.

The following table shows the mapping between the old sgttyb flags and the current termio flags. Note that flags contained in the termio structure that are not mentioned below are cleared.

HUPCL (if set) sets the termio HUPCL flag;

HUPCL (if clear) clears the termio HUPCL flag;

XTABS (if set) sets the termio T AB3 flag;

XTABS (if clear) clears the termio T AB3 flag;

TBDELA Y (if set) sets the termio TAB1 flag;

TBDELA Y (if clear) clears the termio TAB1 flag;

LCASE (if set) sets the termio mCLC, OLCUC, and XCASE flags;

LCASE (if clear) clears the termio mCLC, OLCUC, and XCASE flags;

ECHO (if set) sets the termio ECHO flag;

ECHO (if clear) clears the termio ECHO flag;

NOAL (if set) clears the termio ECHOK flag;

NOAL (if clear) sets the termio ECHOK flag;

CRMOD (if set) sets the termio ICRNL and ONLCR flags; also, if CR1 is set, the termio CR1 flag is set, and if CR2 is set, the termio ONOCR and CR2 flags are set;

CRMOD (if clear) sets the termio ONLRET flag; also, if NL1 is set, the termio CR1 flag is set, and if NL2 is set, the termio CR2 flag is set;

RAW (if set) sets the termio CS8 flag, and clears the termio ICRNL and IUCLC flags; also, default values of 6 characters and 0.1 seconds are assigned to MIN and TIME, respectively;

RAW (if clear) sets the termio BRKINT, IGNPAR, ISTRIP, IXON, IXANY, OPOST, CS7, PARENB,

ICANON, and ISIG flags; also, the default values control-D and null are assigned to the control characters EOF and EOL, respectively;

ODDP (if set) if EVENP is also set, clears the termio INPCK flag; otherwise, sets the termio P ARODD flag;

VTDELA Y (if set) sets the termio FFDL Y flag;

VTDELA Y (if clear) clears the termio FFDL Y flag;

Hewlett-Packard -2July 10, 1985

STTYV6(4) STTYV6(4)

BSDELAY (if set) sets the termio BSDL Y flag;

BSDELA Y (if clear) clears the termio BSDL Y flag.

In addition, the termio CREAD bit is set, and, if the baud rate is 110, the CSTOPB bit is set.

When using TIOCSETP, the

ispeed

entry in the sgttyb structure is mapped into the appropriate speed in the termio CBAUD field. The termio crase and kill characters.

erase

and

kill

sgttyb entries are mapped into the

When the

gtty(2) (ioetl

TIOCGETP) command is executed, the

termio(4)

TCGETA command is first executed. The resulting termio structure is then mapped into the sgttyb structure, which is then returned to the user.

The following table shows how the termio flags are mapped into the old sgttyb structure. Note that all flags contained in the sgtty b structure that are not mentioned below are cleared.

HUPCL (if set) sets the sgttyb HUPCL flag;

HUPCL (if clear) clears the sgttyb HUPCL flag;

ICANON (if set) clears the sgttyb RAW flag;

ICANON (if clear) sets the sgttyb RAW flag;

XCASE (if set) sets the sgttyb LCASE flag;

XCASE (if clear) clears the sgttyb LCASE flag;

ECHO (if set) sets the sgttyb ECHO flag;

ECHO (if clear) clears the sgttyb ECHO flag;

ECHOK (if set) clears the sgttyb NOAL flag;

ECHOK (if clear) sets the sgttyb NOAL flag;

PARODD (if set) sets the sgttyb ODDP flag;

PARODD (if clear) clears the sgttyb ODDP flag;

INPCK (if set) sets the sgttyb EVENP flag;

PARODD, INPCK (if both clear) sets the sgttyb ODDP and EVENP flags;

ONLCR (if set) sets the sgttyb CRMOD flag; also, if CR1 is set, the sgttyb CR1 flag is set, and if CR2 is set, the sgttyb CR2 flag is set;

ONLCR (if clear) if CR1 is set, the sgttyb NL1 flag is set, and if CR2 is set, the sgttyb NL2 flag is set;

T AB3 (if set) sets the sgttyb XTABS flag;

T AB3 (if clear) clears the sgttyb XTABS flag;

TAB1 (if set) sets the sgttyb TBDELA Y flag;

Hewlett-Packard -3July 10, 1985

STTYV6(4) STTYV6(4)

TAB1 (if clear) clears the sgttyb TBDELA Y flag;

FFDL Y (if set) sets the sgttyb VTDELA Y flag;

FFDLY (if clear) clears the sgttyb VTDELA Y flag;

BSDL Y (if set) sets the sgttyb BSDELA Y flag;

BSDL Y (if clear) clears the sgttyb BSDELA Y flag.

When using TIOCGETP, the termio CBADD field is mapped into the ispeed and ospeed entries of the sgttyb structure. Also, the termio erase and kill characters are mapped into the

erase

and kill sgttyb entries.

Note that, since there is not a one-to-one mapping between the sgttyb and termio structures, unexpected results may occur when using the older TIOCSETP and TIOCGETP calls. Thus, the TIOCSETP and TIO(]GETP calls should be replaced in all future code by the current equivalents, TCSETA and TCGETA, respectively.

#

erases the last character typed, except that it will not erase beyond the beginning of the line. By default, the character

@ kills (deletes) the entire input line, and optionally outputs a new-line character.

Both these characters operate on a key-stroke basis, independently of any backspacing or tabbing that may have been done. Both the erase and kill characters may be entered literally by preceding them with the escape character (\). In this case the escape character is not read. The erase and kill characters may be changed.

Certain characters have special functions on input. These functions and their default character values are summarized as follows:

INTR

QUIT

ERASE

KILL

(Rubout or ASCII DEL) generates an

interrupt

signal which is sent to all processes with the associated control terminal. Normally, each such process is forced to terminate, but arrangements may be made either to ignore the signal or to receive a trap to an agreed-upon location; see

signal(2).

(Control-lor ASCII FS) generates a

quit

signal. Its treatment is identical to the interrupt signal except that, unless a receiving process has made other arrangements, it will not only be terminated but a core image file (called core) will be created in the current working directory if the implementation supports core files.

(#) erases the preceding character. It will not erase beyond the start of a line, as delimited by a NL, EOF, or EOL character.

(@) deletes the entire line, as delimited by a NL, EOF, or EOL character.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4) TERMIO(4)

EOF (Control-d or ASCII EOT) may be used to generate an end-of-file from a terminal.

When received, all the characters waiting to be read are immediately passed to the program, without waiting for a new-line, and the EOF is discarded. Thus, if there are no characters waiting, which is to say the EOF occurred at the beginning of a line, zero characters will be passed back, which is the standard end-of-file indication.

(ASCII LF) is the normal line delimiter. It can not be changed or escaped.

(ASCII NUL) is an additional line delimiter, like NL. It is not normally used.

EOL

STOP (Control-s or ASCII DC3) can be used to temporarily suspend output. It is useful with

CRT terminals to prevent output from disappearing before it can be read. While output is suspended, STOP characters are ignored and not read.

START (Control-q or ASCII DOl) is used to resume output which has been suspended by a

STOP character. While output is not suspended, START characters are ignored and not read. The start/stop characters can not be changed or escaped.

The character values for INTR, QUIT, ERASE, KILL, EOF, and EOL may be changed to suit individual tastes. The ERASE, KILL, and EOF characters may be escaped by a preceding \ character, in which case no special function is done.

When a modem disconnect is detected, a hang-up signal is sent to all processes that have this terminal as the control terminal. Unless other arrangements have been made, this signal causes the processes to terminate. If the hang-up signal is ignored, any subsequent read returns with an end-of-file indication. Thus, programs that read a terminal and test for end-of-file can terminate appropriately when hung up on.

When one or more characters are written, they are transmitted to the terminal as soon as previously-written characters have finished typing. Input characters are echoed by putting them in the output queue as they arrive.

If a process produces characters more rapidly than they can be typed, it will be suspended when its output queue exceeds some limit. When the queue has drained down to some threshold, the program is resumed.

Several

ioctl(2)

system calls apply to terminal files. The primary calls use the following structure, defined in <termio.h>:

#define NCC struct termio {

8 unsigned short c~flag; unsigned short c_oflag; unsigned short c_cflag; unsigned short c---.lflag; char c---.line; unsigned char c_cc[NCCJ;

};

/* input modes

/ * output modes

* /

/* control modes

/ * local modes

* /

/* line discipline

/* control chars

The special control characters are defined by the array c_cc. The relative positions and initial values for each function are as follows: o

VINTR DEL

1 VQUIT FS

2 VERASE #

3 VKILL

4 VEOF EOT

NUL 5 VEOL

6 reserved

7 reserved

The

c_ifiag field describes the basic terminal input control:

Hewlett-Packard

- 2 November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4) TERMIO(4)

IGNBRK 0000001 Ignore break condition.

BRKINT 0000002 Signal interrupt on break.

IGNPAR 0000004 Ignore characters with parity errors.

PARMRK 0000010 Mark parity errors.

INPCK

ISTRIP

INLCR

0000020 Enable input parity check.

0000040 Strip character.

0000100 Map NL to CR on input.

IGNCR

ICRNL

IUCLC

IXON

0000200 Ignore CR.

0000400 Map CR to NL on input.

0001000 Map upper-case to lower-case on input.

0002000 Enable start/stop output control.

IXANY

IXOFF

0004000 Enable any character to restart output.

0010000 Enable start/stop input control.

IENQAK

0020000 Enable output pacing control.

If IGNBRK is set, the break condition (a character framing error with data all zeros) is ignored, that is, not put on the input queue and therefore not read by any process. Otherwise if BRKINT is set, the break condition will generate an interrupt signal and flush both the input and output queues. If IGNPAR is set, characters with other framing and parity errors are ignored.

If PARMRK is set, a character with a framing or parity error which is not ignored is read as the three-character sequence: 0377, 0, X, where X is the data of the character received in error. To avoid ambiguity in this case, if ISTRIP is not set, a valid character of 0377 is read as 0377, 0377.

If PARMRK is not set, a framing or parity error which is not ignored is read as the character NUL

(0).

If INPCK is set, input parity checking is enabled. If INPCK is not set, input parity checking is disabled. This allows output parity generation without input parity errors.

If ISTRIP is set, valid input characters are first stripped to 7-bits, otherwise all 8-bits are processed.

If INLCR is set, a received NL character is translated into a CR character. If IGNCR is set, a received CR character is ignored (not read). Otherwise if ICRNL is set, a received CR character is translated into a NL character.

If IUCLC is set, a received upper-case alphabetic character is translated into the corresponding lower-case character.

If IXON is set, start/stop output control is enabled. A received STOP character will suspend output and a received START character will restart output. All start/stop characters are ignored and not read. If IXANY is set, any input character, will restart output which has been suspended.

IXOFF is set, the system will transmit START jSTOP characters when the input queue is nearly empty/full.

If IENQAK is set, the system will transmit ASCII ENQ after every 80 characters sent and then wait until the terminal responds with ASCII ACK. The terminal will respond in this way when it has sufficiently emptied its buffer. If the terminal does not respond after 5 seconds, the system will resume transmission anyway. The ASCII ACK that the terminal sends will not get entered into the input queue if it was sent in response to ASCII ENQ.

The initial input control value is all-bits-clear.

The c_oftag field specifies the system treatment of output:

OPOST

OLCUC

ONLCR

OCRNL

ONOCR

0000001 Postprocess output.

0000002 Map lower case to upper on output.

0000004 Map NL to CR-NL on output.

0000010 Map CR to NL on output.

0000020 No CR output at column O.

Hewlett-Packard

- 3 -

November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4) TERMIO(4)

ONLRET

OFILL

OFDEL

NLDLY

NLO

NLl

CRDLY

CRO

CRl

CR2

CR3

TABDLY

TABO

TABl

TAB2

TAB3

BSDLY

BSO

BSl

VTDLY

VTO

VTl

FFDLY

FFO

FFl

0000040

NL performs

CR function.

0000100 Use fill ,characters for delay.

0000200 Fill is

DEL, else

NUL.

0000400 Select new-line delays:

0000400

0003000 Select carriage-return delays:

0001000

0002000

0003000

0014000 Select horizontal-tab delays:

0004000

0010000

0014000 Expand tabs to spaces.

0020000 Select backspace delays:

0020000

0040000 Select vertical-tab delays:

0040000

GlOOOOO

Select form-feed delays:

0100000

OPOST is set, output characters are post-processed as indicated by the remaining flags, otherwise characters are transmitted without change.

If OLCUC is set, a lower-case alphabetic character is transmitted as the corresponding upper-case character. This function is often used in conjunction with

IUCLC.

ONLCR is set, the

NL character is transmitted as the

CR-NL character pair. If

OCRNL is set, the

CR character is transmitted as the

NL character. If

ONOCR is set, no

CR character is transmitted when at column 0 (first position). If

ONLRET is set, the

NL character is assumed to do the carriage-return function; the column pointer will be set to 0 and the delays specified for

CR will be used. Otherwise the

NL character is assumed to do just the line-feed function; the column pointer will remain unchanged. The column pointer is also set to 0 if the

CR character is actually transmitted.

The delay bits specify how long transmission stops to allow for mechanical or other movement when certain characters are sent to the terminal. In all cases a value of 0 indicates no delay. If

OFILL is set, fill characters will be transmitted for delay instead of a timed delay. This is useful for high baud rate terminals which need only a minimal delay. If

OFDEL is set, the fill character is

DEL, otherwise

NUL.

If a form-feed or vertical-tab delay is specified, it lasts for about 2 seconds.

New-line delay lasts about 0.10 seconds. If

ONLRET is set, the carriage-return delays are used instead of the new-line delays. If

OFILL is set, two fill characters will be transmitted.

Carriage-return delay type 1 is dependent on the current column position, type 2 is about 0.10 seconds, and type 3 is about 0.15 seconds. If OFILL is set, delay type 1 transmits two fill characters, and type 2, four fill characters.

Horizontal-tab delay type 1 is dependent on the current column position. Type 2 is about 0.10 seconds. Type 3 specifies that tabs are to be expanded into spaces. If

OFILL is set, two fill characters will be transmitted for any delay.

Hewlett-Packard - 4November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4) TERMIO(4)

Backspace delay lasts about 0.05 seconds. If OFILL is set, one fill character will be transmitted.

The actual delays depend on line speed and system load.

The initial output control value is all bits clear.

The c_cfiag field describes the hardware control of the terminal:

CBAUD

B50

B75

B110

B134

B150

B200

B300

B600

B900

B1200

B1800

B2400

B3600

B4800

0000037 Baud rate:

Hang up

0000001 50 baud

0000002 75 baud

0000003 110 baud

0000004 134.5 baud

0000005 150 baud

0000006 200 baud

0000007 300 baud

OOOOOlD 600 baud

0000011 900 baud

0000012 1200 baud

0000013 1800 baud

0000014 2400 baud

0000015 3600 baud

0000016 4800 baud

B7200

B9600

B19200

B38400

EXTA

EXTB

0000017 7200 baud

0000020 9600 baud

0000021 19200 baud

0000022 38400 baud

0000036 External A

0000037 External B

0000140 Character size: CSIZE

CS5

CS6

CS7

CS8

0 5 bits

0000040 6 bits

0000100 7 bits

0000140 8 bits

CSTOPB 0000200 Send two stop bits, else one.

CREAD

0000400 Enable receiver.

PARENB 0001000 Parity enable.

PARODD 0002000 Odd parity, else even.

HUPCL

0004000 Hang up on last close.

CLOCAL OOlDOOO Local line, else dial-up.

The CBAUD bits specify the baud rate. The zero baud rate, BO, is used to hang up the connection. If BO is specified, the modem control lines (see modem(4) ) will cease to be asserted. Normally, this will disconnect the line. For any particular hardware, impossible speed changes are ignored.

The CSIZE bits specify the character size in bits for both transmission and reception. This size does not include the parity bit, if any. If CSTOPB is set, two stop bits are used, otherwise one stop bit. For example, at 110 baud, two stops bits are required.

If PARENB is set, parity generation and detection is enabled and a parity bit is added to each character. If parity is enabled, the PARODD flag specifies odd parity if set, otherwise even parity is used.

If CREAD is set, the receiver is enabled. Otherwise no characters will be received.

The specific effects of the HUPCL and CLOCAL bits depend on the mode and type of the modem control in effect. See

modem(

4) for the details.

Hewlett-Packard

- 5 November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4) TERMIO(4)

If HUPCL is set, the modem control lines for the port will be disconnected when the last process with the port open closes it or terminates.

If CLOCAL is set, a connection does not depend on the state of the modem status lines.

Under normal circumstances, an open will wait for the type of modem connection requested to complete. However, if the O--.NDELAY bit is specified (see open(2) ) or the CLOCAL bit has been set, the open will return immediately without waiting for the connection. For those files on which the connection has not been established or has been lost, and for which the CLOCAL bit is not set, both

read

and

write

will return a zero character count. For

read,

this is equivalent to an end-offile condition.

The initial hardware control value after open is B300, CS8, CREAD, HUPCL.

The c_lflag field of the argument structure is used by the line discipline to control terminal functions. The basic line discipline (0) provides the following:

ISIG

ICANON

XCASE

ECHO

ECHOE

0000001

0000002

0000004

Enable signals.

Canonical input (erase and kill processing).

Canonical upper/lower presentation.

OOOOOlD Enable echo.

0000020 Echo erase character as BS-SP-BS.

ECHOK 0000040 Echo NL after kill character.

ECHONL

OOOOlDO Echo NL.

NOFLSH 0000200 Disable flush after interrupt or quit.

If ISIG is set, each input character is checked against the special control characters INTR and

QUIT. If an input character matches one of these control characters, the function associated with that character is performed. If ISIG is not set, no checking is done. Thus these special input functions are possible only if ISIG is set. These functions may be disabled individually by changing the value of the control character to an unlikely or impossible value (e.g., 0377).

If ICANON is set, canonical processing is enabled. This enables the erase and kill edit functions, and the assembly of input characters into lines delimited by NL, EOF, and EOL. If ICANON is not set, read requests are satisfied directly from the input queue. A read will not be satisfied until at least MIN characters have been received or the timeout value TIME has expired between characters. This allows fast bursts of input to be read efficiently while still allowing single character input. The MIN and TIME values are stored in the position for the EOF and EOL characters, respectively. The time value represents tenths of seconds.

If XCASE is set, and if ICANON is set, an upper-case letter is accepted on input by preceding it with a \ character, and is output preceded by a \ character. In this mode, the following escape sequences are generated on output and accepted on input:

lor: use:

{

}

For example, A is input as \a, \n as \ \n, and

\N as \ \ \n.

If ECHO is set, characters are echoed as received.

When ICANON is set, the following echo functions are possible. If ECHO and ECHOE are set, the erase character is echoed as ASCII BS SP BS, which will clear the last character from a CRT screen.

If ECHOE is set and ECHO is not set, the erase character is echoed as ASCII SP BS. If ECHOK is set, the NL character will be echoed after the kill character to emphasize that the line will be deleted. Note that an escape character preceding the erase or kill character removes any special

Hewlett-Packard

- 6 -

November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4)

TERMIO(4) function. If ECHONL is set, the NL character will be echoed even if ECHO is not set. This is useful for terminals set to local echo (so-called half duplex). Unless escaped, the EOF character is not echoed. Because EOT is the default EOF character, this prevents terminals that respond to EOT from hanging up.

If NOFLSH is set, the normal flush of the input and output queues associated with the quit and interrupt characters will not be done.

The initial line-discipline control value is all bits clear.

The primary

ioctl(2)

system calls have the form: ioctl (fildes, command, arg) struct termio *arg;

The commands using this form are:

TCGETA Get the parameters associated with the terminal and store in the structure referenced by argo

lermio

TCSETA Set the parameters associated with the terminal from the structure referenced by argo The change is immediate.

TCSETAW Wait for the output to drain before setting the new parameters. This form should be used when changing parameters that will affect output.

TCSETAF Wait for the output to drain, then flush the input queue and set the new parameters.

Additional

ioctl(2)

calls have the form: ioctl (fildes, command, arg) int arg;

The commands using this form are:

TCSBRK Wait for the output to drain. least 0.25 seconds).

arg

is 0, then send a break (zero bits for at

TCXONC

TCFLSH

Start/stop control. If

arg

is 0, suspend output; if 1, restart suspended output.

arg

is 0, flush the input queue; if 1, flush the output queue; if 2, flush both the input and output queues.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300:

Data loss may occur with HP 98626/98644 serial interfaces if the effective combined data rate for all installed serial interfaces exceeds 2400 baud (for example, two interfaces running at 1200 baud and a third at 300 baud is equivalent to 2700 baud combined).

The

c_ifiag

field parameter IXANY (enable any character to restart output) is not supported by the HP 98628B interface card.

The

c_ifiag

field parameter IENQAK (enable output pacing control) is not supported.

Timed delays are not supported.

The HP 98628B interface does not support the following baud rates: 900, 7200, 38400.

The

c_lfiag

field parameter XCASE is not supported.

Series 500:

38400 baud is not supported by the RS-232 interface.

Hewlett-Packard - 7 November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4) TERMIO(4)

European modems are not currently supported.

HP27140 Six-Channel Modem Multiplexer:

Timed output delays (as opposed to fill-character delays) are not supported.

The XCASE flag is not supported.

These baud rates are not supported: 200, 38400, EXTA, and EXTB.

HP27128 Asynchronous Serial Interface, HP27130 Eight-Channel Multiplexer:

These baud rates are not supported: 200, 38400, EXTA, and EXTB.

There is no support for tab expansion, case mapping, or output delays for control characters.

The line kill character is always echoes as <backslash><CR><LF>, so the

ECHOK flag is not setable, and will always have the same state as the ECHO flag.

When type-ahead limit is reached, input is not flushed, but further input is simply ignored.

The P ARMRK flag is not supported.

The echoing of carriage-return and new-line characters may not be quite as expected in the more obscure driver configurations.

The echoing of the EOF character is not suppressed.

The ONLRET, ONOCR, and OCRNL flags are not supported.

The VMIN and VTIME parameters for raw terminal input are not supported.

The ECHONL flag is not supported.

When ECHOE is set and ECHO is clear, a <SP><BS> is not echoes for the erase character.

(27130 only) The CLOCAL flag is permanently set.

(27128 only) The default setting of baud rate, bits per character, parity, and

CLOCAL bit are determined by the switches on the interface.

(27128 only) The "direct connect" cable (female connector) does not contain a

Data Carrier Detect line, so a hangup signal will be sent if the CLOCAL flag is cleared when this cable is being used.

Model 520 Console, HP98700 Terminal, Pseudo Terminal (pty):

Since these devices do not deal with real asynchronous serial data links, the following flags are meaningless: IGNPAR, PARMRK, INPCK, IXOFF, IENQAK,

CBAUD, CSIZE, CSTOPB, PARENB, PARODD, HUPCL, and CLOCAL.

FILES

/dev/tty*

/ dev / console

SEE ALSO stty(I), fork(2), ioctl(2), stty(2), setpgrp(2), signal(2), tty(4), modem(4), mknod(8).

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300:

Data loss may occur with the 98626/98644 if the effective input of all 98626/98644 cards exceeds 2400 baud.

The c_iflag field parameter IXANY (enable any character to restart output) is not supported by the HP 98628B interface card.

Hewlett-Packard - 8 November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4)

The c_iflag field parameter IENQAK (enable output pacing control) is not supported.

Timed delays are not supported.

The

98628B interface does not support the following baud rates: 900, 7200, 38400.

The c_lftag field parameter XCASE is not supported.

Hewlett-Packard - 9 November 15, 1985

TTY(4) TTY(4)

NAME tty - controlling terminal interface

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

The file / dey /tty is, in each process, a synonym for the control terminal associated with the process group of that process, if any. It is useful for programs or shell sequences that wish to be sure of writing messages on the terminal no matter how output has been redirected. It can also be used for programs that demand the name of a file for output, when typed output is desired and it is tiresome to find out what terminal is currently in use.

FILES

/dev/tty

/dev /tty*

s_la

in the superblock. It has five

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 10, 1985

FS(5)

Series 500 Implementation

FS(5)

Each entry consists of 128 bytes. Entry 0 is the i-node of the FA file itself (see

inode(5)

description of the i-node structure). Entry 1 is the i-node for the file system's root directory, for a

Entry 3 through entry n consists of the free map, which keeps track of every free (unused) block of memory on the device. The free map contains a bit for each block on the device. If a bit is set, the corresponding block of memory is free; otherwise, the corresponding block is being used. The free map is zero-padded to guarantee that it ends on a 128-byte boundary.

Entry n+1 through the end of the FA file contains an entry for every file in the system. Each entry is either an i-node, an extent map, or unused. An extent map contains 128 bytes of information, and looks as follows: struct eIIL...Iec { ushort ushort int ino_t ino_t ino_t daddr_t e......next; e-1ast; e_inode; e_boffset;

=2 for extent maps

#

extents in this rec.

/* unused

/* next map in list; none = neg

/ * last map in list; none = neg

* /

/ * owner i-node no.

* /

/ * blk offset of 1st extent from start of file

* / struct { daddr_t int e_extent[13]; e.....startblk; e......numblk;

/ * extent start blk

* /

#

blks in extent

};

FILES

/usr /include /sys/param.h

/usr /include /sys / filsys.h

/usr /include/ sys/ino.h

SEE

ALSO

inode(5), fsck(lM).

Hewlett-Packard -2July 10, 1985

FSPEC(5)

NAME fspec - fonnat specification in text files

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

System V

Remarks: Not supported on the Integral Personal Computer.

DESCRIPTION

It is sometimes convenient to maintain text files on the HP-UX system with non-standard tabs,

(i.e., tabs which are not set at every eighth column). Such files must generally be converted to a standard format, frequently by replacing all tabs with the appropriate number of spaces, before they can be processed by HP-UX system commands. A format specification occurring in the first line of a text file specifies how tabs are to be expanded in the remainder of the file.

A format specification consists of a sequence of parameters separated by blanks and surrounded by the brackets

<:

and

:>.

Each parameter consists of a keyletter, possibly followed immediately by a value. The following parameters are recognized:

ttabs

The t parameter specifies the tab settings for the file. The value of

tabs

must be one of the following:

1. a list of column numbers separated by commas, indicating tabs set at the specified columns;

2. a - followed immediately by an integer n, indicating tabs at intervals of n columns;

3. a - followed by the name of a "canned" tab specification.

Standard tabs are specified by t-8, or equivalently, tl,9,17,25,etc. The canned tabs which are recognized are defined by the

tabs(1)

command.

ssize mmargin

The m parameter specifies a number of spaces to be prepended to each line. The value of

margin

must be an integer. d

The s parameter specifies a maximum line size. The value of size must be an integer.

Size checking is performed after tabs have been expanded, but before the margin is prepended. e

The d parameter takes no value. Its presence indicates that the line containing the format specification is to be deleted from the converted file.

The e parameter takes no value. Its presence indicates that the current format is to prevail only until another fonnat specification is encountered in the file.

Default values, which are assumed for parameters not supplied, are t-8 and mO.

If the s parameter is not specified, no size checking is performed.

If the first line of a file does not contain a format specification, the above defaults are assumed for the entire file. The following is an example of a line containing a fonnat specification:

<:t5,10,15 s72:>

If a fonnat specification can be disguised as a comment, it is not necessary to code the d parameter.

Several HP-UX system commands have been specifically structured so they can correctly interpret file format specifications.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:

Some earlier-design interface cards do not handle tab expansion correctly. This can cause unexpected results.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1 July 9, 1985

FSPEC (5)

#

Make some environment variables global export MAIL PATH TERM

#

Set file creation mask umask 22

#

Tell me when new mail comes in

MAIL= /usr /mail/myname

#

Add my /bin directory to the shell search sequence

PATH=$PATH:$HOME/bin

FILES

$HOME/.profile

/etc/profile

SEE ALSO env(l), login(l), mail(l), sh(l), stty(1), sU(l), environ(7), term(7).

Hewlett-Packard -1July 9,1985

RANLIB(5) RANLIB(5)

NAME ranlib - archive symbol table format for object libraries

SYNOPSIS

#include <ranlib.h>

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin: HP

DESCRIPTION

Any archive containing object files also includes an archive symbol table, thus allowing the linker

to scan libraries in random (rather than sequential) order.

The archive symbol table (if it exists) is always the first file in the archive, but it is never listed.

It is automatically created and/or updated by

aT.

The archive symbol table lists each externally known name in the archive, together with the offset of the archive element that defines that name. This offset is useful as an input argument to

Iseek(2)

fseek(3).

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:

The archive symbol table file contains the symbol table and a name pool of strings (the names of external symbols). This allows for symbols with arbitrarily long names. The rl~dr structure defines the layout of the file, and the rl_ref structure defines the contents of an archive symbol table entry. These structures have the following format: struct rl--11dr { long int rl_tcbas; long int r1_tclen; long int rL-Ilmbas; long int rL.nmlen;

};

offset of table length of table

* /

* / offset of name pool

* /

length of name pool

* / struct r1-I'ef { long int name_pos; long int Iib_pos;

};

index into name pool offset of defining file

* /

Series 200:

The archive symbol table file contains a header, a name pool of strings (the names of external symbols), and the archive symbol table. This allows for symbols with arbitrarily long names. The header contains a short integer which specifies the number of entries, and a long integer which specifies the size of the string table. Following this is the name pool. The last section of the file contains the archive symbol table entries. The structure of these entries is defined below: typedef.long off_t; struct ranlib { union { off_t ran-Btrx; char HalL.1lame;

} ran_un; off_t raIL-off;

};

/* string table index

/* lib member offset

Hewlett-Packard - 1 -

July 9,1985

RANLIB(5)

SEE ALSO

ar(l), Id(l), ar(5).

RANLIB(5)

Hewlett-Packard

-2July 9,1985

SCCSFILE ( 5 ) SCCSFILE ( 5 )

NAME sccsfile - format of SCCS file

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin: System III

DESCRIPTION

An SCCS file is an ASCII file. It consists of six logical parts: the checksum, the delta table (contains information about each delta), user names (contains login names and/or numerical group

IDs of users who may add deltas), flags (contains definitions of internal keywords), comments

(contains arbitrary descriptive information about the file), and the body (contains the actual text lines intermixed with control lines ).

Throughout an SCCS file there are lines which begin with the ASCII SOH (start of heading) character (octal 001). This character is hereafter referred to as the control character and will be represented graphically as @. Any line described below which is not depicted as beginning with the control character is prevented from beginning with the control character.

Entries of the form DDDDD represent a five digit string (a number between 00000 and 99999).

Each logical part of an SCCS file is described in detail below.

Checksum

The checksum is the first line of an SCCS file. The form of the line is:

@hDDDDD

The value of the checksum is the sum of all characters, except those of the first line. The

@h provides a magic number of (octal) 000550 (0168 hex).

Delta table

The delta table consists of a variable number of entries of the form:

@sDDDDD/DDDDD/DDDDD

@d <type> <sees ID> yr/mo/da hr:mi:se <pgmr> DDDDD DDDDD

@iDDDDD .,.

@xDDDDD .. .

@gDDDDD .. .

@m <MR number>

@c <comments> ...

The first line (@s) contains the number of lines inserted/deleted/unchanged respectively.

The second line (@d) contains the type of the delta (currently, normal: D, and removed:

R), the SCCS ID of the delta, the date and time of creation of the delta, the login name corresponding to the real user ID at the time the delta was created, and the serial numbers of the delta and its predecessor, respectively.

The @i, @x, and @g lines contain the serial numbers of deltas included, excluded, and ignored, respectively. These lines are optional.

The @m lines (optional) each contain one MR number associated with the delta; the @c

Hewlett-Packard -1July 9, 1985

SCCSFILE ( 5 ) SCCSFILE ( 5 ) lines contain comments associated with the delta.

The @e line ends the delta table entry.

User names

The list of login names and/or numerical group IDs of users who may add deltas to the file, separated by new-lines. The lines containing these login names and/or numerical group IDs are surrounded by the bracketing lines @u and @U. An empty list allows anyone to make a delta.

Flags-----

Keywords used internally (see line takes the form:

admin(l)

for more information on their use). Each flag

@f<flag> <optional text>

The following flags are defined:

@f t <type of program>

@fv

@fi

@fb

@fm

@ff

<floor>

@fc

@fd

<default-sid>

@fn

@fj

@fl

<lock-releases>

@fq

The t flag defines the replacement for the %Y% identification keyword. The v flag controls prompting for MR numbers in addition to comments; if the optional text is present it defines an MR number validity checking program. The i flag controls the warning/error aspect of the "No id keywords" message. When the i flag is not present, this message is only a warning; when the i flag is present, this message will cause a

"fatal" error (the file will not be gotten, or the delta will not be made). When the b flag is present the

-b

key letter may be used on the

get

command to cause a branch in the delta tree. The m flag defines the first choice for the replacement text of the %M% identification keyword. The f flag defines the "floor" release; the release below which no deltas may be added. The c flag defines the "ceiling" release; the release above which no deltas may be added. The d flag defines the default SID to be used when none is specified on a

get

command. The n flag causes

delta

to insert a "null" delta (a delta that applies

changes) in those releases that are skipped when a delta is made in a

new

release (e.g., when delta 5.1 is made after delta 2.7, releases 3 and 4 are skipped). The absence of the n flag causes skipped releases to be completely empty. The j flag causes

get

to allow concurrent edits of the same base SID. The I flag defines a

list

of releases that are

locked

against editing

(get(l)

with the -e keyletter). The q flag defines the replacement for the

%Q% identification keyword.

Comments

Arbitrary text surrounded by the bracketing lines @t and @T. The comments section typically will contain a description of the file's purpose.

Body-----

The body consists of text lines and control lines. Text lines don't begin with the control character, control lines do. There are three kinds of control lines:

insert,- delete,

and

Hewlett-Packard -2July 9,1985

SCCSFILE ( 5 )

SCCSFILE (

5 )

end,

represented by:

@IDDDDD

@DDDDDD

@EDDDDD

respectively. The digit string is the serial number corresponding to the delta for the controlline.

SEE ALSO

admin(l), delta(l), get(l), prs(l).

sees

User's Guide

in HP-UX Concepts and Tutorials.

Hewlett-Packard -3-

July 9, 1985

TERM(5) TERM(5)

NAME term - format of compiled term file.

SYNOPSIS term

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

Compiled terminfo descriptions are placed under the directory /usr /lib/terminfo. In order to avoid a linear search of a huge HP-UX system directory, a two-level scheme is used:

/usr/lib/terminfo/c/name where

name

is the name of the terminal, and

is the first character of

name.

Thus,

act4

can be found in the file /usr/lib/terminfo/a/act4. Synonyms for the same terminal are implemented by mUltiple links to the same compiled file.

The format has been chosen so that it will be the same on all hardware. An 8 or more bit byte is assumed, but no assumptions about byte ordering or sign extension are made.

The compiled file is created with the

tic

(lM) program, and read by the routine

setupterm.

Both of these pieces of software are part of

curses(3X).

The file is divided into six parts: the header, terminal names, boolean flags, numbers, strings, and string table.

The header section begins the file. This section contains six short integers in the format described below. These integers are (1) the magic number (octal 0432); (2) the size, in bytes, of the names section; (3) the number of bytes in the boolean section; (4) the number of short integers in the numbers section; (5) the number of offsets (short integers) in the strings section; (6) the size, in bytes, of the string table.

Short integers are stored in two 8-bit bytes. The first byte contains the least significant 8 bits of the value, and the second byte contains the most significant 8 bits. (Thus, the value represented is 256*second+first.) The value -1 is represented by 0377, 0377, other negative value are illegal.

The -1 generally means that a capability is missing from this terminal. Machines where this does not correspond to the hardware read the integers as two bytes and compute the result.

The terminal names section comes next. It contains the first line of the terminfo description, listing the various names for the terminal, separated by the' I' character. The section is terminated with an ASCII NUL character.

The boolean flags have one byte for each flag. This byte is either 0 or 1 as the flag is present or absent. The capabilities are in the same order as the file <term.h>.

Between the boolean section and the number section, a null byte will be inserted, if necessary, to ensure that the number section begins on an even byte. All short integers are aligned on a short word boundary.

The numbers section is similar to the flags section. Each capability takes up two bytes, and is stored as a short integer. If the value represented is -1, the capability is taken to be missing.

The strings section is also similar. Each capability is stored as a short integer, in the format above. A value of -1 means the capability is missing. Otherwise, the value is taken as an offset from the beginning of the string table. Special characters in 'X or \c notation are stored in their interpreted form, not the printing representation. Padding information $<nn> and parameter information %x are stored intact in uninterpreted form.

The final section is the string table. It contains all the values of string capabilities referenced in the string section. Each string is null terminated.

Note that it is possible for

setupterm

to expect a different set of capabilities than are actually present in the file. Either the database may have been updated since

setupterm

has been recompiled (resulting in extra unrecognized entries in the file) or the program may have been recompiled

Hewlett-Packard -1-

JUly 9,1985

TERM(5) TERM(5)

more recently than the database was updated (resulting in missing entries). The routine setup-

term

must be prepared for both possibilities - this is why the numbers and sizes are included.

Also, new capabilities must always be added at the end of the lists of boolean, number, and string capabilities.

As an example, an octal dump of the description for the Microterm ACT 4 is included: micro term

I act41 micro term act iv, cr=AM, cudl=A J, ind=' J, bel='G, am, cubl='H, ed=' _, el=", c1ear='L, cup=AT%pl%c%p2%c, cols#80, Iines#24, cufl='X, cuul='Z, home='j,

000 032 001

020

\0 025 \0

\0 212 \0 \0

040

060 v \0 \0 001 \0 \0

100

120

\0 \0 \0 \0 \0 \0 \0 \0 \0 \0 \0 \0 \0

\0 \0 p

\0 377 377 030

\0 377 377 377 377 377

\0 \0 \0

377 377 377

377 377 377 377 \0 \0 002 \0 377 377 377 377 004 \0 006 \0

140 \b

\0 377 377 377 377

\0 026 \0 030 \0 377 377 032 \0

160 377 377 377 377 034

\0 377 377 036 \0 377 377 377 377 377 377

200 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377

520 377 377 377 377

\0 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377

540 377 377 377 377 377 377 007

560 024

600 \b

\0 030 \0 032 \0

\r \0 \f \0 036 c \0

\0 037 \0

\0 035 \0

Some limitations: total compiled entries cannot exceed 4096 bytes.

128 bytes.

The name field cannot exceed

FILES

/usr /lib/terminfo/?

compiled terminal capability data base

SEE ALSO tic(IM), curses(3X), terminfo(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

NAME terminfo - terminal capability data base

SYNOPSIS

/usr /lib/terminfo/?

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin: System V

DESCRIPTION

Terminfo

is a data base describing terminals that is used by programs and subroutines such as

vi(l)

and

curses(3X).

Terminals are described in

terminfo

by giving a set of capabilities which they have, and by describing how operations are performed. Padding requirements and initialization sequences are included in

term info.

Entries in

terminfo

consist of a number of ',' separated fields. White space after each ',' is ignored. The first entry for each terminal gives the names which are known for the terminal, separated by 'I' characters. The first name given is the most common abbreviation for the terminal, the last name given should be a long name fully identifying the terminal, and all others are understood as synonyms for the tenninal name. All names but the last should be in lower case and contain no blanks; the last name may well contain upper case and blanks for readability.

Terminal names (except for the last, verbose entry) should be chosen using the following conventions. The particular piece of hardware making up the terminal should have a root name chosen, thus "hp2621". This name should not contain hyphens, except that synonyms may be chosen that do not conflict with other names. Modes that the hardware can be in, or user preferences, should be indicated by appending a hyphen and an indicator of the mode. Thus, a vt100 in 132 column mode would be vt100-w. The following suffixes should be used where possible:

Suffix Meaning Example

-w

-am

Wide mode (more than 80 columns) vt100-w

With auto. margins (usually default) vt100-am

-nam Without automatic margins

-n

Number of lines on the screen vt100-nam aaa-60

-na

-np

-rv

No arrow keys (leave them in local) clOO-na

Number of pages of memory clOO-4p

Reverse video clOO-rv

CAP ABILITIES

The variable is the name by which the programmer (at the terminfo level) accesses the capability.

The capname is the short name used in the text of the database, and is used by a person updating the database. The Lcode is the two letter internal code used in the compiled database, and always corresponds to the old termcap capability name.

Capability names have no hard length limit, but an informal limit of 5 characters has been adopted to keep them short and to allow the tabs in the source file caps to line up nicely. Whenever possible, names are chosen to be the same as or similar to the ANSI X3.64-1979 standard.

Semantics are also intended to match those of the specification.

(P)

(G) indicates that padding may be specified indicates that the string is passed through tparm withparms as given

(#i).

(*) indicates that padding may be based on the number of lines affected

(# i) indicates the ith parameter.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO ( 5 ) TERMINFO ( 5 )

Variable

Booleans

auto--.-ieft-1Ilargin, auto-fight-1Ilargin, beehive~litch, ceoL.standout~litch, eat-Ilewline_glitch,

erase_overstrike,

generic_type, harLcopy, has-1Ileta....key, has.-status--.-iine, insert-Ilull~litch,

memory_above,

memory_below,

move-1nsert-.lllode,

move.....standout-1Ilode,

over--..Strike,

status--.-iine_esc_ok, teleray _glitch, tilde_glitch, transparent_underline,

XOD-Xoif,

Numbers:

columns,

init_tabs,

lines,

lines_of-1Ilemory , magic_cookie_glitch, padding_baud-I"ate, virtual_terminal, width.....status--.-iine,

Strings: bacLtab, bell,

carriage-return,

change.-scroll-fegion, cleaL.1l.ll_tabs,

clear-Bcreen,

clr_eol, cols it lines

1m xmc pb vt wsl

Cap-

name Code

bw bw am xsb xhp xenl eo gn hc km hs in da db

miT

msgr os eslok xt hz ul xon am xb xs xn eo gn hc km hs in da db mi ms os es xt hz ul xo

Description

cub! wraps from column 0 to last column

Terminal has automatic margins

Beehive (f1=escape, f2=ctrl C)

Standout not erased by overwriting

(hp) newline ignored after 80 cols

(Concept)

Can erase overstrikes with a blank

Generic line type (e.g." ilialup, switch).

Hardcopy terminal

Has a meta key (shift, sets parity bit)

Has extra ··status line"

Insert mode distinguishes nulls

Display may be retained above the

screen

Display may be retained below the

screen

Safe to move while in insert mode

Safe to move in standout modes

Terminal overstrikes

Escape can be used on the status line

Tabs ruin, magic so char (Teleray

1061)

Hazeltine; can not print -'s underline character overstrikes

Terminal uses

xon/xoff handshaking cbt bel cr csr tbc clear el bt bl cr cs ct cI ce co it li

1m sg pb vt ws

Number of columns in a line

Tabs initially every # spaces

Number of lines on screen or page

Lines of memory if

> lines. 0 means

varies

Number of blank chars left by smso or

rmsa

Lowest baud where crlnl padding is needed

Virtual terminal number (UNIX system)

No. columns in status line

Back tab (P)

Audible signal (bell) (P)

Carriage return (P *) change to lines #1 through #2 (vt100)

(PG)

Clear all tab stops (P)

Clear screen and home cursor (P*)

Clear to end of line (P)

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July

9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 ) TERMINFO ( 5 ) do ho vi

CM ve nd

II up vs dc dl ds il i2 i3 ue vb ff fs if ic al ip mh im mp mr mk so us hd as mb md ti dm ec ae me te ed ei se kb ka kC kt cd ch

CC cm clr_eos, columIL-address, commanLcharacter, cursor_address, key_backspace, key_catab, key_clear, key_ctab, cd hpa cmdch cup

cursor_down, cursor---11ome,

cursor~nvisible,

enter-inserL_lIlode,

enter_protected---1llode,

enter-I"everse-Illode,

enter~ecure-IllOde, cudl home

civis

cubl cursor-left, cursor---'llelIl-llddress,

cursof-Ilormal,

cursor-1'ight, cursor_to-1l,

cursor_up, cursor_visible,

deletc-character, delete-1ine, enter_ca---'llode, enter_delete---'llode, enter_diill---'1lode, mrcup

cnorm

cufl

II cuul

cvvis

dchl dll dis-Btatus-1ine, dowIL..half-1ine, dsl hd enteL_alt_charset---'llode, smacs enter_blink---1llode, b!ink enter_bold-fnode, bold smcup smdc dim

smir

prot rev

invis

enter-Btandout---'llode, enter_underline---'llode, erase_chars exit_alt_charset---'llode, exit_attribute---'llode,

exit_c3.--.lIlode,

exit_delete---'llode, exit-insert---'llode, exit-Btandout---'llode, exit_underline---'llode, flash--Bcreen, forIILleed,

smSD

smul ech rmacs sgrO rmcup rmdc

rroir

from--Btatus-1ine, init_lstring, init_2string, init_3string, initJle, inserLcharacter, insert-1ine, insert_padding,

rmso

rmul flash ff fsl isl is2 is3 if ichl ill ip kbs ktbc kclr kctab

Clear to end of display (P*)

Set cursor column (PG)

Term. settable cmd char in prototype

Screen reI. cursor motion row #1 col #2 (PG)

Down one line

Home cursor (if no cup)

Make cursor invisible

Move cursor left one space

Memory relative cursor addressing

Make cursor appear normal (undo vs/vi)

Non-destructive space (cursor right)

Last line, first column (if no cup)

Upline (cursor up)

Make cursor very visible

Delete character (P*)

Delete line (P*)

Disable status line

Half-line down (forward 1/2 !inefeed)

Start alternate character set (P)

Turn on blinking

Turn on bold (extra bright) mode

String to begin programs that use cup

Delete mode (enter)

Turn on half-bright mode

Insert mode (enter);

Turn on protected mode

Turn on reverse video mode

Turn on blank mode (chars invisible)

Begin stand out mode

Start underscore mode

Erase #1 characters (PG)

End alternate character set (P)

Turn off all attributes

String to end programs that use cup

End delete mode

End insert mode

End stand out mode

End underscore mode

Visible bell (may not move cursor)

Hardcopy terminal page eject (P*)

Return from status line

Terminal initialization string

Terminal initialization string

Name of file containing is

Insert character (P)

Add new blank line (P*)

Insert pad after character inserted

(p*)

Sent by backspace key

Sent by clear-all-tabs key

Sent by clear screen or erase key

Sent by clear-tab key

Hewlett-Packard -3-

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO ( 5 ) key_dc, key_dl, key_down, key_eic, key_eol, key_eos, key-fll, key~l, key~lO, key--.f2, key~3, key--E4, key--E5, key--E6, key-IT, key~8, key--1'9, key-home, key_ic, key~l, key---.left, key---.ll, keY-llpage, key_ppage, key--"ight, key-"f,

keY----Br,

key-"tab, key_up, keypad---.locaI, keypad---X1l1it, lab-fll, lab~l, lab~lO, lab--.f2, lab~3, lab~4, lab~5, lab~6, lab-IT, lab--E8, lab--1'9, memory---.lock memory_unlock met~on, met8-off,

newline,

pad_char, parIlL...dch, parIlL...delete---.line, par~ich, par~ndex,

Hewlett-Packard

TERMINFO ( 5 )

If4

If5

1f6

1f7

]f8

Ifl

IflD

1f2

1f3

1f9 meml

memu

smm rmm nel kf2 kf3 kf4 kf5 kf6 kf7 kf8 kf9 khome kich1 kill kcub1 kIl knp kpp kcuf1 kind kri khts kcuu1 rmkx smkx

]fD kdch1 kdll kcud1 krmir kel ked kfO kfl kflO pad dch dl cud ich indn kP kr kF kR kT ku kh kI kA kl kH kN ke ks

II la

19 ml mu mm mo nw kS kO k1 k; k2 k3 k4 k5 k6 k7 k8 kg kD kL kd kM kE pc

Sent by delete character key

Sent by delete line key

Sent by terminal down arrow key

Sent by rmir or smir in insert mode

Sent by clear-to-end-of-line key

Sent by clear-to-end-of-screen key

Sent by function key fO

Sent by function key fl

Sent by function key flO

Sent by function key f2

Sent by function key f3

Sent by function key f4

Sent by function key f5

Sent by function key f6

Sent by function key f7

Sent by function key f8

Sent by function key f9

Sent by home key

Sent by ins char/enter ins mode key

Sent by insert line

Sent by terminal left arrow key

Sent by home-down key

Sent by next-page key

Sent by previous-page key

Sent by terminal right arrow key

Sent by scroll-forward/down key

Sent by scroll-backward/up key

Sent by set-tab key

Sent by terminal up arrow key

Out of "keypad transmit" mode

Put terminal in "keypad transmit" mode

Labels on function key fO if not fO

Labels on function key fl if not fl

Labels on function key flO if not flO

Labels on function key f2 if not f2

Labels on function key f3 if not f3

Labels on function key f4 if not f4

Labels on function key f5 if not f5

Labels on function key f6 if not f6

Labels on function key f7 if not f7

Labels on function key f8 if not f8

Labels on function key f9 if not f9

Enable memory lock

Disable memory lock

Turn on "meta mode" (8th bit)

Turn off "meta mode"

Newline (behaves like cr followed by If)

Pad character (rather than nUll)

Delete #1 chars (PG*)

Delete #1 lines (PG*)

Move cursor down #1 lines (PG*)

Insert # 1 blank chars (PG *)

Scroll forward #1 lines (PG)

-4-

July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 ) TERMINFO ( 5 ) parlIL-insert-1ine,

parnLJ.cft_cursor

par~indexJ

parIIL-up_CUrsof,

pkeYJey, pkey-1ocal, pkeY--->mlit,

print---Bcreen,

prtr_off,

prtr_on,

repeat_char, reset_lstring, reset_2string, reset_3string, reseL..file,

restore_cursor

1 row--B.ddress, save_cursor,

scrolL.forward,

scrolueverse,

set_attributes, set_tab,

set_window,

tab, to---status-1ine, underline_char, up-1lalf-1ine, iniLprog, key_a1, key_a3, key_b2, key_c1, key_c3,

prtr---1lon,

pfx mcO mc4 mc5 rep rs1 rs2 rs3 rf rc vpa il cub cuf

rin

cuu pfkey plloc sc ind ri sgr hts wind ht tsl uc hu iprog ka1 ka3 kb2 kc1 kc3 mc5p ps pf po rp r1 r2 r3

UP pk pI px rf rc cv sc sf sr sa st wi ta ts uc hu iP

K5 pO

Add #1 new blank lines (PG*)

Move cursor left #1 spaces (PG)

Move cursor right #1 spaces (PG*)

Scroll hackward #1 lines (PG)

Move cursor up #1 lines (PG*)

Prog funct key #1 to type string #2

Prog funct key #1 to execute string #2

Prog funct key #1 to xmit string #2

Print contents of the screen

Turn off the printer

Turn on the printer

Repeat char #1 #2 times. (PG*)

Reset terminal completely to sane modes.

N arne of file containing reset string

Restore cursor to position of last sc

Vertical position absolute

(set row) (PG)

Save cursor position (P)

Scroll text up (P)

Scroll text down (P)

Define the video attributes (PG9)

Set a tab in all rows, current column

Current window is lines #1-#2 cols #3-#4

Tab to next 8 space hardware tab stop

Go to status line, column #1

Underscore one char and move past it

Half-line up (reverse 1/2 lincfeed)

Path name of program for init

Upper left of keypad

Upper right of keypad

Center of keypad

Lower left of keypad

Lower right of keypad

Turn on the printer for #1 bytes

A Sample Entry

The following entry, which describes the Concept-lOO, is among the more complex entries in the

terminfo

file as of this writing.

conceptl00 I cl001 concept I c104 I cl00-4p I concept

100, am, bel="G, blank=\EH. blink=\EC, clear=A L$<2*>. cnorm=\Ew,

C018#80. cr="M$<9>. cubi="H, cudl="

J. cufl=\E=, cup=\Eal.pl;'·

'/'+l.ci'.p2j.'

''!.+;'c, cuul=\E;. cvvis=\EW. db, dchl=\E" A$<16*>.

ed=\E"C$<16*>. ,l=\E"U$<16>.

dim=\EE, dl1=\E"B$<3*>.

'0. flaeh=\Ek$<20>\EK. ht=\t$<8>. ill=\E~R$<3*>,

in,

ind:::~

.ind:::~

J$<9>. ip=$<16*>.

is2=\EU\Ef\E7\E5\E8\El

\ENH\EK\E\200\Eo~\200\Eo\47\E. kbs=~h.

kcubl=\E>. kcudl=\E<. kcuf1=\E=, kcuul=\E;, kfl=\E5. kf2=\E6. kf3:::\E7, khome=\E? ,

lines#24,

mir, pb#9S00. prot=\EI, rep=\Er%pl%c%p2%' rev=\ED. rmcup=\Ev $<6>\Ep\r\n, rmir=\E\20D.

'%+%c$< . 2*>. rmkx=\Ex, rmso=\Ed\Ee, rmul=\Eg. rmul=\Eg, sgrO=\EN\200.

Hewlett-Packard

-5-

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO ( 5 ) TERMINFO ( 5 )

smcup"'\EU\Ev Bp\Ep\r,

smir"'\E~P.

smkx=\EX, smso=\EE\ED. smul=\EG. tabs, ul. vt#8, xenl.

Entries may continue onto multiple lines by placing white space at the beginning of each line except the first. Comments may be included on lines beginning with

"#".

Capabilities in

termin/o

are of three types: Boolean capabilities which indicate that the terminal has some particular feature, numeric capabilities giving the size of the terminal or the size of particular delays, and string capabilities, which give a sequence which can be used to perform particular terminal operations.

Types of Capabilities

All capabilities have names. For instance, the fact that the Concept has

automatzc margins

(i.e., an automatic return and linefeed when the end of a line is reached) is indicated by the capability am. Hence the description of the Concept includes am. Numeric capabilities are followed by the character

'#' and then the value. Thus cols, which indicates the number of columns the terminal has, gives the value '80' for the Concept.

Finally, string valued capabilities, such as el (clear to end of line sequence) are given by the twocharacter code, an '=', and then a string ending at the next following ','. A delay in milliseconds may appear anywhere in such a capability, enclosed in $< .. > brackets, as in el=\EK$<3>, and padding characters are supplied by

tputs

to provide this delay. The delay can be either a number, e.g., '20', or a number followed by an

'*', i.e., '3*'. A

,*, indicates that the padding required is proportional to the number of lines affected by the operation, and the amount given is the peraffected-unit padding required. (In the case of insert character, the factor is still the number of

lines

affected. This is always one unless the terminal has xenl and the software uses it.) When a

,*, is specified, it is sometimes useful to give a delay of the form '3.5' to specify a delay per unit to tenths of milliseconds. (Only one decimal place is allowed.)

A number of escape sequences are provided in the string valued capabilities for easy encoding of characters there. Both \E and \e map to an ESCAPE character, 'x maps to a control-x for any appropriate x, and the sequence:; \n \1 \r

\s give a newline, linefeed, return, tab, backspace, formfeed, and space. Other escapes include \ 'for', \ \ for \, \, for comma, \: for :, and \0 for null. (\0 will produce \200, which does not terminate a string but behaves as a null character on most terminals.) Finally, characters may be given as three octal digits after a \.

Sometimes individual capabilities must be commented out. To do this, put a period before the capability name. For example, see the second ind in the example above.

Preparing Descriptions

We now outline how to prepare descriptions of terminals. The most effective way to prepare a terminal description is by imitating the description of a similar terminal in

termin/o

and to build up a description gradually, using partial descriptions with

to check that they are correct. Be aware that a very unusual terminal may expose deficiencies in the ability of the

termin/o

file to describe it or bugs in

vi.

To easily test a new terminal description you can set the environment variable TERMINFO to a pathname of a directory containing the compiled description you are working on and programs will look there rather than in

/usr/lib/termin/o.

To get the padding for insert line right (if the terminal manufacturer did not docnment it) a severe test is to edit

/etc/passwd at 9600 baud, delete 16 or so lines from the middle of the screen, then hit the 'u' key several times quickly. If the terminal messes up, more padding is usually needed. A similar test can be used for insert character.

Basic Capabilities

The number of columns on each line for the terminal is given by the cols numeric capability.

If the terminal is a CRT, then the number of lines on the screen is given by the lines capability. If the terminal wraps around to the beginning of the next line when it reaches the right margin, then it should have the am capability. If the terminal can clear its screen, leaving the cursor in the home position, then this is given by the clear string capability. If the terminal overstrikes

Hewlett-Packard

-6-

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO ( 5 ) TERMINFO ( 5 )

(rather than clearing a position when a character is struck over) then it should have the os capability. If the terminal is a printing terminal, with no soft copy unit, give it both hc and os. (os applies to storage scope terminals, such as TEKTRONIX 4010 series, as well as hard copy and APL terminals.) If there is a code to move the cursor to the left edge of the current row, give this as cr. (Normally this will be carriage return, control M.) If there is a code to produce an audible signal (bell, beep, etc) give this as bel.

If there is a code to move the cursor one position to the left (such as backspace) that capability should be given as cubl. Similarly, codes to move to the right, up, and down should be given as cufl, cuul, and cudl. These local cursor motions should not alter the text they pass over, for example, you would not normally use 'cufl= ' because the space would erase the character moved over.

A very important point here is that the local cursor motions encoded in terminfo are undefined at the left and top edges of a CRT terminal. Programs should never attempt to backspace around the left edge, unless bw is given, and never attempt to go up locally off the top. In order to scroll text up, a program will go to the bottom left corner of the screen and send the ind (index) string.

To scroll text down, a program goes to the top left corner of the screen and sends the ri (reverse index) string. The strings ind and ri are undefined when not on their respective corners of the screen.

Parameterized versions of the scrolling sequences are indn and rin which have the same semantics as ind and ri except that they take one parameter, and scroll that many lines. They are also undefined except at the appropriate edge of the screen.

The am capability tells whether the cursor sticks at the right edge of the screen when text is output, but this does not necessarily apply to a cufl from the last column. The only local motion which is defined from the left edge is if bw is given, then a cubl from the left edge will move to the right edge of the previous row. If bw is not given, the effect is undefined. This is useful for drawing a box around the edge of the screen, for example. If the terminal has switch selectable automatic margins, the terminfo file usually assumes that this is on; i.e., am. If the terminal has a command which moves to the first column of the next line, that command can be given as nel

(newline). It does not matter if the command clears the remainder of the current line, so if the terminal has no cr and If it may still be possible to craft a working nel out of one or both of them.

These capabilities suffice to describe hardcopy and glass-tty terminals. Thus the model 33 teletype is described as

I tty33

I tty

I model 33 teletype. be1="G. C01B#72, crooM. cudi=" J. hc. indo" J. 06. while the Lear Siegler

ADM-3 is described as adm3

16i adm3. am, be1="G, c1ear="Z, C016#80. croOM, cubi="H. cudi=" J, ind=" J • lines#24.

Parameterized Strings

Cursor addressing and other strings reqmrmg parameters in the terminal are described by a parameterized string capability, with printf(3S) like escapes %x in it. For example, to address the cursor, the cup capability is given, using two parameters: the row and column to address to.

(Rows and columns are numbered from zero and refer to the physical screen visible to the user, not to any unseen memory.) If the terminal has memory relative cursor addressing, that can be indicated by mrcup.

The parameter mechanism uses a stack and special

% codes to manipulate it. Typically a sequence will push one of the parameters onto the stack and then print it in some format. Often more complex operations are necessary.

Hewlett-Packard -7July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 ) TERMINFO ( 5 )

The % encodings have the following meanings:

%2d

%3d

%02d

%03d

%s outputs '%' print popO as in printf print popO like %2d print popO like %3d as in printf print popO gives %c print popO gives %s

%p[I-9]

%P[a-z]

%g[a-z]

%'c'

%{nn} push ith parm set variable [a-z] to popO get variable [a-z] and push it char constant c integer constant nn

%+ %- %* %/ %m

%& % I %' arithmetic (%m is mod): push(popO op popOl bit operations: push(popO op popOl

%= %> %<

%! %-

%i logical operations: push(popO op popOl unary operations push( op popOl add 1 to first two parms (for ANSI terminals)

%7 expr %t thenpart %e elsepart %; if-then-else, %e elsepart is optional. else-ifs are possible ala Algol 68:

%7 c1 %t b1 %e c2 %t b2 %e c3 %t b3 %e c4 %t b4 %e %; ci are conditions, bi are bodies.

Binary operations are in postfix form with the operands in the usual order. That is, to get x-5 one would use "%gx%{5}%-".

Consider the HP2645, which, t::> get to row 3 and column 12, needs to be sent \E&a12c03Y padded for 6 milliseconds. Note that the order of the rows and columns is inverted here, and that the row and column are printed as two digits. Thus its

cup

capability is cup=6\E&%p2%2dc%p1 %2dY.

The Microterm ACT-IV needs the current row and column sent preceded by a 'T, with the row and column simply encoded in binary, cup='T%p1%c%p2%c. Terminals which use %c need to be able to backspace the cursor (cub!), and to move the cursor up one line on the screen (cuu!).

This is necessary because it is not always safe to transmit \n 'D and \r, as the system may change or discard them. (The library routines dealing with terminfo set tty modes so that tabs are never expanded, so \ t is safe to send. This turns out to be essential for the Ann Arbor 4080.)

A final example is the LSI ADM-3a, which uses row and column offset by a blank character, thus cup=\E=%p1%' '%+%c%p2%' '%+%c. After sending '\E=', this pushes the first parameter, pushes the ASCII value for a space (32), adds them (pushing the sum on the stack in place of the two previous values) and outputs that value as a character. Then the same is done for the second parameter. More complex arithmetic is possible using the stack.

If the terminal has row or column absolute cursor addressing, these can be given as single parameter capabilities hpa (horizontal position absolute) and vpa (vertical position absolute). Sometimes these are shorter than the more general two parameter sequence (as with the hp2645) and can be used in preference to cup. If there are parameterized local motions (e.g., move n spaces to the right) these can be given as cud, cub, cur, and cuu with a single parameter indicating how many spaces to move. These are primarily useful if the terminal does not have cup, such as the

Hewlett-Packard -8-

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO ( 5 ) TERMINFO ( 5 )

TEKTRONIX 4025.

Cursor Motions

If the terminal has a fast way to home the cursor (to very upper left corner of screen) then this can be given as home; similarly a fast way of getting to the lower left-hand corner can be given as II; this may involve going up with euul from the home position, but a program should never do this itself (unless II does) because it can make no assumption about the effect of moving up from the home position. Note that the home position is the same as addressing to (0,0): to the top left corner of the screen, not of memory. (Thus, the \EH sequence on HP terminals cannot be used for home.)

Area Clears

If the terminal can clear from the current position to the end of the line, leaving the cursor where it is, this should be given as el. If the terminal can clear from the current position to the end of the display, then this should be given as ed. Ed is only defined from the first column of a line.

(Thus, it can be simulated by a request to delete a large number of lines, if a true ed is not available.)

Insert / delete line

If the terminal can open a new blank line before the line where the cursor is, this should be given as ill; this is done only from the first position of a line. The cursor must then appear on the newly blank line.

If the terminal can delete the line which the cursor is on, then this should be given as dU; this is done only from the first position on the line to be deleted. Versions of ill and dU which take a single parameter and insert or delete that many lines can be given as it and dl. If the terminal has a settable scrolling region (like the vt100) the command to set this can be described with the esr capability, which takes two parameters: the top and bottom lines of the scrolling region. The cursor position is, alas, undefined after using this command. It is possible to get the effect of insert or delete line using this command - the se and rc (save and restore cursor) commands are also useful. Inserting lines at the top or bottom of the screen can also be done using ri or ind on many terminals without a true insert/delete line, and is often faster even on terminals with those features.

If the terminal has the ability to define a window as part of memory, which all commands affect, it should be given as the parameterized string wind. The four parameters are the starting and ending lines in memory and the starting and ending columns in memory, in that order.

If the terminal can retain display memory above, then the da capability should be given; if display memory can be retained below, then db should be given. These indicate that deleting a line or scrolling may bring non-blank lines up from below or that scrolling back with ri may bring down non-blank lines.

Insert/Delete Character

There are two basic kinds of intelligent terminals with respect to insert/delete character which can be described using terminfo. The most common insert/delete character operations affect only the characters on the current line and shift characters off the end of the line rigidly. Other terminals, such as the Concept 100 and the Perkin Elmer Owl, make a distinction between typed and untyped blanks on the screen, shifting upon an insert or delete only to an untyped blank on the screen which is either eliminated, or expanded to two untyped blanks. You can determine the kind of terminal you have by clearing the screen and then typing text separated by cursor motions. Type abc def using local cursor motions (not spaces) between the abc and the def.

Then position the cursor before the abc and put the terminal in insert mode. If typing characters causes the rest of the line to shift rigidly and characters to fall off the end, then your terminal does not distinguish between blanks and untyped positions.

If the abc shifts over to the def which then move together around the end of the current line and onto the next as you insert, you have the second type of terminal, and should give the capability in, which stands for insert null. While these are two logically separate attributes (one line vs. multiline insert mode, and special

Hewlett-Packard -9July 9, 1985

TERMINFO (5) TERMINFO ( 5 ) treatment of untyped spaces) we have seen no terminals whose insert mode cannot be described with the single attribute.

Terminfo can describe both terminals which have an insert mode, and terminals which send a simple sequence to open a blank position on the current line. Give as smir the sequence to get into insert mode. Give as rmir the sequence to leave insert mode. Now give as ichl any sequence needed to be sent just before sending the character to be inserted. Most terminals with a true insert mode will not give ichl; terminals which send a sequence to open a screen position should give it here. (If your terminal has both, insert mode is usually preferable to ichl. Do not give both unless the terminal actually requires both to be used in combination.) If post insert padding is needed, give this as a number of milliseconds in ip (a string option). Any other sequence which may need to be sent after an insert of a single character may also be given in ip.

If your terminal needs both to be placed into an 'insert mode' and a special code to precede each inserted character, then both smir/rmir and ichl can be given, and both will be used. The ich capability, with one parameter,

will repeat the effects of ichl

times.

It is occasionally necessary to move around while in insert mode to delete characters on the same line (e.g., if there is a tab after the insertion position). If your terminal allows motion while in insert mode you can give the capability mir to speed up inserting in this case. Omitting mir will affect only speed. Some terminals (notably Datamedia's) must not have mir because of the way their insert mode works.

Finally, you can specify dchl to delete a single character, dch with one parameter,

to delete

n characters,

and delete mode by giving smdc and rmdc to enter and exit delete mode (any mode the terminal needs to be placed in for dchl to work).

A command to erase

characters (equivalent to outputting

blanks without moving the cursor) can be given as ech with one parameter.

Highlighting, Underlining, and Visible Bells

If your terminal has one or more kinds of display attributes, these can be represented in a number of different ways. You should choose one display form as standout mode, representing a good, high contrast, easy-on-the-eyes, format for highlighting error messages and other attention getters. (If you have a choice, reverse video plus half-bright is good, or reverse video alone.) The sequences to enter and exit standout mode are given as smso and rmso, respectively.

If the code to change into or out of standout mode leaves one or even two blank spaces on the screen, as the

TVI 912 and Teleray 1061 do, then xmc should be given to tell how many spaces are left.

Codes to begin underlining and end underlining can be given as smul and rmul respectively. If the terminal has a code to underline the current character and move the cursor one space to the right, such as the Microterm Mime, this can be given as uc.

Other capabilities to enter various highlighting modes include blink (blinking) bold (bold or extra bright) dim (dim or half-bright) invis (blanking or invisible text) prot (protected) rev

(reverse video) sgrO (turn off all attribute modes) smacs (enter alternate character set mode) and rmacs (exit alternate character set mode). Turning on any of these modes singly mayor may not turn off other modes.

If there is a sequence to set arbitrary combinations of modes, this should be given as sgr (set attributes), taking 9 parameters. Each parameter is either 0 or 1, as the corresponding attribute is on or off. The 9 parameters are, in order: standout, underline, reverse, blink, dim, bold, blank, protect, alternate character set. Not all modes need be supported by sgr, only those for which corresponding separate attribute commands exist.

Terminals with the "magic cookie" glitch (xmc) deposit special "cookies" when they receive mode-setting sequences, which affect the display algorithm rather than having extra bits for each character. Some terminals, such as the HP 2621, automatically leave standout mode when they move to a new line or the cursor is addressed. Programs using standout mode should exit standout mode before moving the cursor or sending a newline, unless the msgr capability, asserting

Hewlett-Packard -10July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 ) TERMINFO ( 5 ) that it is safe to move in standout mode, is present.

If the terminal has a way of flashing the screen to indicate an error quietly (a bell replacement) then this can be given as flash; it must not move the cursor.

If the cursor needs to be made more visible than normal when it is not on the bottom line (to make, for example, a non-blinking underline into an easier to find block or blinking underline) give this sequence as cvvis. If there is a way to make the cursor completely invisible, give that as civis. The capability cnorm should be given which undoes the effects of both of these modes.

If the terminal needs to be in a special mode when running a program that uses these capabilities, the codes to enter and exit this mode can be given as smcup and rmcup. This arises, for example, from terminals like the Concept with more than one page of memory. If the terminal has only memory relative cursor addressing and not screen relative cursor addressing, a one screensized window must be fixed into the terminal for cursor addressing to work properly. This is also used for the TEKTRONIX 4025, where smcup sets the command character to be the one used by terminfo.

If your terminal correctly generates underlined characters (with no special codes needed) even though it does not overstrike, then you should give the capability ul. If overstrikes are erasable with a blank, then this should be indicated by giving eo.

Keypad

If the terminal has a keypad that transmits codes when the keys are pressed, this information can be given. Note that it is not possible to handle terminals where the keypad only works in local

(this applies, for example, to the unshifted HP 2621 keys). If the keypad can be set to transmit or not transmit, give these codes as smkx and rmkx. Otherwise the keypad is assumed to always transmit. The codes sent by the left arrow, right arrow, up arrow, down arrow, and home keys can be given as kcubl, kcufl, kcuul, kcudl, and khome respectively. If there are function keys such as ro, fl, ... , flO, the codes they send can be given as kID, 'kfl, ... , kflO. If these keys have labels other than the default ro through flO, the labels can be given as lID, Ifl, ... , IflO.

The codes transmitted by certain other special keys can be given: kll (home down), kbs (backspace), ktbc (clear all tabs), kctab (clear the tab stop in this column), kcJr (clear screen or erase key), kdchl (delete character), kdll (delete line), krmir (exit insert mode), kel (clear to end of line), ked (clear to end of screen), kichl (insert character or enter insert mode), kill (insert line), knp (next page), kpp (previous page), kind (scroll forward/down), kri (scroll backward/up), khts (set a tab stop in this column). In addition, if the keypad has a 3 by 3 array of keys including the four arrow keys, the other five keys can be given as kal, ka3, kb2, kcl, and kc3. These keys are useful when the effects of a 3 by 3 directional pad are needed.

Tabs and Initialization

If the terminal has hardware tabs, the command to advance to the next tab stop can be given as ht (usually control I). A "backtab" command which moves leftward to the next tab stop can be given as cbt. By convention, if the teletype modes indicate that tabs are being expanded by the computer rather than being sent to the terminal, programs should not use ht or cbt even if they are present, since the user may not have the tab stops properly set. If the terminal has hardware tabs which are initially set every n spaces when the terminal is powered up, the numeric parameter it is given, showing the number of spaces the tabs are set to. This is normally used by the

tset

command to determine whether to set the mode for hardware tab expansion, and whether to set the tab stops. If the terminal has tab stops that can be saved in nonvolatile memory, the terminfo description can assume that they are properly set.

Other capabilities include isl, is2, and is3, initialization strings for the terminal, iprog, the path name of a program to be run to initialize the terminal, and if, the name of a file containing long initialization strings. These strings are expected to set the terminal into modes consistent with the rest of the terminfo description. They are normally sent to the terminal, by the

tset

program, each time the user logs in. They will be printed in the following order: isl; is2; setting tabs

Hewlett-Packard -11-

July 9,1985

TERMINFO (

5 )

TERMINFO ( 5 ) using tbc and hts; if; running the program iprog; and finally is3. Most initialization is done with is2. Special terminal modes can be set up without duplicating strings by putting the common sequences in is2 and special cases in isl and is3. A pair of sequences that does a harder reset from a totally unknown state can be analogously given as rsl, rs2, rf, and rs3, analogous to is2 and if. These strings are output by the

reset

program, which is used when the terminal gets into a wedged state. Commands are normally placed in rs2 and rf only if they produce annoying effects on the screen and are not necessary when logging in. For example, the command to set the vt100 into SO-column mode would normally be part of is2, but it causes an annoying glitch of the screen and is not normally needed since the terminal is usually already in SO column mode.

If there are commands to set and clear tab stops, they can be given as tbc (clear all tab stops) and hts (set a tab stop in the current column of every row). If a more complex sequence is needed to set the tabs than can be described by this, the sequence can be placed in is2 or if.

Delays

Certain capabilities control padding in the teletype driver. These are primarily needed by hard copy terminals, and are used by the

tset

program to set teletype modes appropriately. Delays embedded in the capabilities cr, ind, cub!, ff, and tab will cause the appropriate delay bits to be set in the teletype driver. If pb (padding baud rate) is given, these values can be ignored at baud rates below the value of pb.

Miscellaneous

If the terminal requires other than a null (zero) character as a pad, then this can be given as pad.

Only the first character of the pad string is used.

If the terminal has an extra "status line" that is not normally used by software, this fact can be indicated. If the status line is viewed as an extra line below the bottom line, into which one can cursor address normally (such as the Heathkit h19's 25th line, or the 24th line of a vt100 which is set to a 23-line scrolling region), the capability hs should be given. Special strings to go to the beginning of the status line and to return from the status line can be given as tsl and fsl. (fsl must leave the cursor position in the same place it was before tsl.

If necessary, the se and rc strings can be included in tsl and fsl to get this effect.) The parameter tsl takes one parameter, which is the column number of the status line the cursor is to be moved to. If escape sequences and other special commands, such as tab, work while in the status line, the flag eslok can be given. A string which turns off the status line (or otherwise erases its contents) should be given as dsl. If the terminal has commands to save and restore the position of the cursor, give them as sc and rc. The status line is normally assumed to be the same width as the rest of the screen, e.g., cols. If the status line is a different width (possibly because the terminal does not allow an entire line to be loaded) the width, in columns, can be indicated with the numeric parameter wsl.

If the terminal can move up or down half a line, this can be indicated with hu (half-line up) and hd (half-line down). This is primarily useful for superscripts and subscripts on hardcopy terminals. If a hardcopy terminal can eject to the next page (form feed), give this as ff (usually control

L).

If there is a command to repeat a given character a given number of times (to save time transmitting a large number of identical characters) this can be indicated with the parameterized string rep. The first parameter is the character to be repeated and the second is the number of times to repeat it. Thus, tparm(repeat_char, 'x', 10) is the same as 'xxxxxxxxxx'.

If the terminal has a settable command character, such as the TEKTRONIX 4025, this can be indicated with cmdch. A prototype command character is chosen which is used in all capabilities.

This character is given in the cmdch capability to identify it. The following convention is supported on some UNIX systems: The environment is to be searched for a

CC variable, and if found, all occurrences of the prototype character are replaced with the character in the environment variable.

Hewlett-Packard -12 July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 ) TERMINFO ( 5 )

Terminal descriptions that do not represent a specific kind of known terminal, such as switch,

dialup, patch,

and network, should include the gn (generic) capability so that programs can complain that they do not know how to talk to the terminal. (This capability does not apply to vir-

tual

terminal descriptions for which the escape sequences are known.)

If the terminal uses xon/xoff handshaking for flow control, give xon. Padding information should still be included so that routines can make better decisions about costs, but actual pad characters will not be transmitted.

If the terminal has a "meta key" which acts as a shift key, setting the 8th bit of any character transmitted, this fact can be indicated with km. Otherwise, software will assume that the 8th bit is parity and it will usually be cleared. If strings exist to turn this "meta mode" on and off, they can be given as smm and rmm.

If the terminal has more lines of memory than will fit on the screen at once, the number of lines of memory can be indicated with 1m. A value of Im#O indicates that the number of lines is not fixed, but that there is still more memory than fits on the screen.

If the terminal is one of those supported by the

UNIX virtual terminal protocol, the terminal number can be given as vt.

Media copy strings which control an auxiliary printer connected to the terminal can be given as mcO: print the contents of the screen, mc4: turn off the printer, and mc5: turn on the printer.

When the printer is on, all text sent to the terminal will be sent to the printer. It is undefined whether the text is also displayed on the terminal screen when the printer is on. A variation mc5p takes one parameter, and leaves the printer on for as many characters as the value of the parameter, then turns the printer off. The parameter should not exceed 255. All text, including mc4, is transparently passed to the printer while an mc5p is in effect.

Strings to program function keys can be given as pfkey, pfloc, and pfx. Each of these strings takes two parameters: the function key number to program (from 0 to 10) and the string to program it with. Function key numbers out of this range may program undefined keys in a terminal dependent manner. The difference between the capabilities is that pfkey causes pressing the given key to be the same as the user typing the given string; pfloc causes the string to be executed by the terminal in local; and pfx causes the string to be transmitted to the computer.

Glitches and Braindamage

Hazeltine terminals, which do not allow ,-, characters to be displayed should indicate hz.

Terminals which ignore a linefeed immediately after an am wrap, such as the Concept and vt100, should indicate xenl.

If el is required to get rid of standout (instead of merely writing normal text on top of it), xhp should be given.

Teleray terminals, where tabs turn all characters moved over to blanks, should indicate xt (destructive tabs). This glitch is also taken to mean that it is not possible to position the cursor on top of a "magic cookie", that to erase standout mode it is instead necessary to use delete and insert line.

The Beehive Superbee, which is unable to correctly transmit the escape or control C characters, has xsb, indicating that the fl key is used for escape and f2 for control C. (Only certain Superbees have this problem, depending on the ROM.)

Other specific terminal problems may be corrected by adding more capabilities of the form xx.

Similar Terminals

If there are two very similar terminals, one can be defined as being just like the other with certain exceptions. The string capability use can be given with the name of the similar terminal. The capabilities given before use override those in the terminal type invoked by use. A capability can be cancelled by placing xx@ to the left of the capability definition, where xx is the capability.

Hewlett-Packard -13 July 9, 1985

TERMINFO (

5 )

TERMINFO ( 5 )

For example, the entry

2621-nl, smkx@, nnkx@, use=2621, defines a 2621-nl that does not have the smkx or rmkx capabilities, and hence does not turn on the function key labels when in visual mode. This is useful for different modes for a terminal, or for different user preferences.

FILES

/usr/lib/terminfo/?

files containing terminal descriptions

SEE ALSO tic(1M), curses(3X), printf(3S), term(5).

Hewlett-Packard -14 July 9,1985

TTYTYPE(5) TTYTYPE(5)

NAME tty type - data base of terminal types by port

SYNOPSIS

/ etc / tty type

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin: UCB

Remarks: Not supported on the Integral Personal Computer.

DESCRIPTION

Ttytype

is a database containing, for each tty port on the system, the kind of terminal that is attached to that port. There is one line per port, containing the terminal kind (as a name listed in

termin/o(5)},

a space, and the name of the tty, less the initial" /dev/". For example, for an HP

2622 terminal on tty02:

2622 tty02

This information is read by

tset(1}

and by

/ogin(1}

to initialize the TERM variable at login time.

&

1047

1053

1054 , 1055 1056 . 1057

/

1062 2 1063 3 1064 4 1065 5 1066 6 1067 7

1070 8 1071 9 1072 1073 ;

1074

1075 = 1076

1077

1100@

1101 A 1102 B 1103 C 1104

1105 E 1106

1107

1110 H 1111

I 1112

1113 K 1114 L 1115M 1116N 11170

1120 P 1121

1122 R 1123 S 1124 T

1125 U 1126 V 1127 W

1130 X 1131 Y 1132 Z 1133 [ 1134

\ 1135

1136 •

1137 _

1140 '

1141 a

1142 b 1143 c 1144 d 1145 e 1146 f 1147 g

1150 h 1151 1152 1153 k 1154 I

1155 m 1156 n 1157

1160 p

1161 q 1162 r 1163 s 1164 1165 u 1166 v 1167 w

1170 x 1171 y

1172 1173 1174 1175

1176 -

1177 del

00 nul 01 soh

02 stx 03 etx

04 eot 05 enq 06 ack 07 bel

08 bs

09 ht

Oa nl Ob vt

Oc np Od cr Oe so Of si

10 dIe 11 del 12 dc2

13 dc3

14 dc4

15 nak 16 syn 17 etb

18 can 19 em 1a sub 1b esc Ie fs

20 sp

21 !

22 ..

(

30 0

31 1

32 2 33 3 34 4

1d gs

25 %

2d -

35 5

Ie rs

1f us

&

2e .

36 6

/

37 7

39 9

41 A

3b ;

43 C

3d =

45 E

3f ?

48 H 49

I 4a J 4b K 4c L 4d M 4e N 4£ 0

58 X

60 '

59 Y

61 a

52 R

5a Z

62 b

53 S

5b [

63 c

54 T

5c \

64 d

55 U 56 V

1 5e

65 e 66

57 W

5f _

67 g

68 h 69 6a 6b k

6c 6d m 6e n 6f

70 p

78 x

71 q

79 y

72 r

73 s

7b {

75 u

7d }

76 v

77 w

7£ del

FILES

/usr/pub/ascii

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

ENVIRON (7) ENVIRON (7)

NAME environ - user environment

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: HP-UX/NUCLEUS

Origin: System III

DESCRIPTION

An array of strings called the "environment" is made available by

exec(2)

when a process begins.

By convention, these strings have the form "name=value". The following names are used by various commands:

PATH The sequence of directory prefixes that

sh(l), time(I), nice(I), nohup(I),

etc., apply in searching for a file known by an incomplete path name. The prefixes are separated by colons (:).

Login(l)

sets PATH=:/bin:/usr/bin.

HOME Name of the user's login directory, set by

login(l)

from the password file

passwd(5).

TERM The kind of terminal for which output is to be prepared. This information is used by

TZ commands (such as mm(l) or

vi(l))

that are able to exploit special capabilities of that terminal.

Time zone information. The minimum format is tznamediffwhere tzname is an "alphabetic" string giving the time zone name or abbreviation, and

dzff

is the (positive or negative, and possibly fractional) difference in hours from GMT. NOTE: west is positive, east is negative. If a summer time zone adjustment (such as Daylight Savings in the US) is to be applied the format is

tznamediffdstzname

where dstzname is the name of the

"Daylight Savings" time zone.

LANG Language selection. This is one of the names listed in

langid(7).

It is used to select the character set, lexicai order, up and down shift tables, and other information which varies from one area to another.

Further names may be placed in the environment by the

export

command and "name=value" arguments in

sh(l),

by the

setenv

command in

csh(l),

by the

env(l)

command, or by

exec(2).

It is unwise to conflict with certain shell variables that are frequently exported by .profile files:

MAIL, PS1, PS2, IFS.

SEE ALSO env(l), login(l), sh(l), exec(2), ctime(3C), getenv(3C), profile(5), tztab(5), hpnls(7), term(7).

Hewlett-Packard -1July 9, 1985

FCNTL(7)

NAME fcnt! - file control options

SYNOPSIS

#include <fcntI.h>

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Basic calls: HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

Real time extensions: HP-UX/STANDARD - Real Time

System III, System V, UCB, and HP

DESCRIPTION

The

Jentl(2)

function provides for control over open files. This include file describes

requests

and

arguments

Jentl

and

open(2).

/* Flag values accessible to open(2) and fcnt!(2) */

/* (The first three can only be set by open) */

#define O-RDONL Y 0

#define 0_

#define O-RDWR 2

#define

O~DELA

#define O-.APPEND

#define O_SYNCIO

010

0100000

/* Non-blocking I/O */

/* append (writes guaranteed at the end)

/* Do write through caching

Flag values accessible only to open(2)

#define O_CREAT 00400

#define O_TRUNC 01000

#define O--.EXCL 02000

/* Open with file create (uses third open arg)*/

/* Open with truncation

/* Exclusive open */

/* fcntl(2) requests */

#define L..DUPFD

#define F _GETFD

#define F _SETFD

#define F _GETFL

#define F _SETFL

/ *

Duplicate fildes

Get fildes flags

/ *

Set fildes flags

Set file flags

* /

Get file flags

* /

t

is the title,

is the section number, c is extra commentary, e.g., "local", n is new manual name. Invokes .DT (see below).

Place subhead

text,

e.g., SYNOPSIS, here .

Place sub-subhead

text,

e.g., Options, here .

Make

text

bold .

text

italic .

Make

text

1 point smaller than default point size .

Concatenate roman

with italic b, and alternate these two fonts for up to six arguments. Similar macros alternate between any two of roman, italic, and bold:

.IR .RB .BR .IB .BI

. P

. HP in

.TP in

. IP tin

.RS in

.RE

.PMm

. DT

.PD

Begin paragraph with hanging indent .

Begin indented paragraph with hanging tag. The next line that contains text to be printed is taken as the tag. If the tag does not fit, it is printed on a separate line.

Same as . TP in with tag

often used to get an indented paragraph without a tag .

Increase relative indent (initially zero). Indent all output an extra in units from the current left margin.

Return to the kth relative indent level (initially, k=l; k=O is equivalent to k=l); if k is omitted, return to the most recent lower indent level.

Produces proprietary markings; where m may be P for PRIVATE, or N for

NOTICE.

Restore default tab settings (every 5 ens in nroff) .

Set the interparagraph distance to

vertical spaces. If

is omitted, set the interparagraph distance to the default value (lv in nroff).

The following strings are defined:

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

MAN(7) MAN(7)

"(Reg.)" in nroff.

Change to default type size.

Trademark indicator.

The following number registers are given default values by . TH:

Left margin indent relative to subheads (default is 5 ens in nroff).

Line length including IN.

Current interparagraph distance.

CAVEATS

In addition to the macros, strings, and number registers mentioned above, there are defined a number of internal macros, strings, and number registers. Except for names predefined by nroff and number registers d,

and y, all such internal names are of the form XA, where X is one of

), J, and }, and

stands for any alphanumeric character.

If a manual entry needs to be preprocessed by tbl(I), it must begin with a special line (described in man

(1»), causing the man command to invoke the appropriate preprocessor( s).

The programs that prepare the Table of Contents and the Permuted Index for this Manual assume the

NAME

section of each entry consists of a single line of input that has the following format: name[, name, name ... J \- explanatory text

The macro package increases the inter-word spaces (to eliminate ambiguity) in the

SYNOPSIS

section of each entry.

FILES

/usr /lib/tmac/tmac.an

/usr/lib/macros/cmp.n.[dtJ.an

/usr /lib /macros/ucmp.n.an

t:t

N tilde

¥ inv. exclamation general currency

Japanese yen

Dutch guilder a. a circumflex

0 circumflex a a accent acute

0 accent acute

A a accent grave o

0 accent grave a a umlaut

"A A umlaut degree

0 0 crossbar a a degree fII

1>..

A crossbar umlaut umlaut

0 0

E accent acute

/3 sharp s

I..

A accent acute

~ d a tilde d stroke

I accent grave

0 0

S accent grave tilde s caron

Y umlaut

THORN

long dash lone half

2 masc. ordinal

•

solid

± plus/minus

261 177 bl

263 179 b3 degree

265 181 b5 c;: c cedilla

267 183 b7 i'I n tilde

271 185 b9

(, inv. question

273 187 bb

British pound

275 189 bd

13 section

277 191 bf

U.S. cent

301 193 cl ~ e circumflex

303 195 c3

0. u circumflex

305 197 c5 e e accent acute

307 199 c7

11 u accent acute

311 201 c9 ~ e accent grave

313 203 cb

315 205 cd

U

u accent grave e e umlaut

317 207 cf

(i u umlaut

321 209 dl

1 i circumflex

323 211 d3

IE AE ligature

325 213 d5 f i accent acute

327 215 d7

III ae ligature

331 217 d9

1 i accent grave

333 219 db

U umlaut

335 221 dd i i umlaut

337 223 df

0 circumflex

341 225 el

~ A tilde

343 227 e3

D stroke

345 229 e5 r.

I accent acute

347 231 e7 a

0 accent acute

351 233 e9 fj 0 tilde

353 235 eb S

S caron

355 237 ed

U accent acute

357 239 ef y y umlaut

361 241 f1 P thorn

363 243 f3

365 245 f5

367 247 f7 t one fourth

371 249 f9 JI. femin. ordinal

373 251 fb

« open gUillemets

375 253 fd

»

close gUillemets

377 255 f f

FILES

/usr/lib/nls/*

*/

execl( v8-alist) v8-dcl

{ v3-list ap; char *file; char *args[MAXARGS]; int argno = 0; v8-Start(ap); file

= v8-arg(ap, char *); while «args[argno++] = v8-arg(ap, char *» != (char *)0)

, v8-end(ap); return execv (file, args);

Hewlett-Packard - 1 July 9, 1985

VARARGS(7) VARARGS(7)

SEE ALSO

exec(2), printf(3S).

BUGS

It is up to the calling routine to specify how many arguments there are, since it is not always possible to determine this from the stack frame. For example, execl is passed a zero pointer to signal the end of the list. Print! can tell how many arguments are there by the format.

It is non-portable to specify a second argument of char, short, or float to VlL-arg, since arguments seen by the called function are not char, short, or float. C converts char and short arguments to int and converts float arguments to double before passing them to a function.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9, 1985

INTRO(8)

NAME intro - introduction to system maintenance procedures

DESCRIPTION

This section outlines certain procedures that will be of lIltere,L to those charged with the task of system maintenance. Included are discussions on such topics as boot procedures, recovery from crashes, file backups, etc.

SEE ALSO

Section 1M. No manual pages are included in Section 8 for this printing. Commands formerly in this section have been moved to Section 1M.

Hewlett-Packard -1-

July 9,1985

INTRO(9) INTRO(9)

NAME

intro - introduction to glossary section

DESCRIPTION

This section contains a glossary of common HP-UX terms. References to other HP-UX documentation are included as appropriate. References to entities such as

wait(2), shell,

Jopen(3S)

refer to entries in the HP-UX Reference manual. References to items in italics but having no parenthetical suffixes refer to other entries in the glossary. Finally, any references to italicized manuals refer to separate manuals that are included with your system.

Hewlett-Packard July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

. a (" dot-oh'')

absolute path name access access groups address affiliation a.out archive

ASCII asynchronous fO backup block

Hewlett-Packard

GLOSSARY (9)

A general name for an object file; also the format of an unlinked object file. See

a.out.

A path name beginning with a slash

(f). It indicates that the file's location is given relative to the root directory

(f),

and that the search begins there.

Access to system resources is governed by three entities: the effective user ID, the effective group ID, and the group access list.

The group access list is an additional set of group ID's used only in determining resource accessibility. Access checks are performed as described below in file access permissions.

In the context of peripheral devices, a set of values which specify the location of an I/O device to the computer. The exact details of the formation of an address differ between systems. On the

Series 200 and 500, the address is composed of up to four elements: the select code, bus address, unit number (id), and volume number (id).

See

terminal affiliation.

a.out is the default output file name used by the linker, Id(I), and the C compiler,

cc(I).

It is also the format of executable object code files on HP-UX. The format is machine-dependent, and is described in the a. out( 5) reference page for each implementation. Object code which is as yet unlinked is in the same format, but is referred to as a

("dot-oh") file.

A file which is made up of the contents of other files (such as a group of object (usually

.0)

files to be used by the linker,

Id(l)).

An archive file is created and maintained by ar(l), or by similar programs, such as tar(1) or cpio(I). (Note that tar(l) and

cpio(l) files are not usually

files.) An archive is often called a library.

An acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. It consists of a set of characters including letters, numerals, punctuation, and control characters, each of which is represented internally by 7 bits (0 - 127).

An 10 operation for which the user process need not wait for completion before continuing execution.

The process of making a copy of all or part of the file system in order to preserve it should files be accidentally removed or destroyed (due to a power failure, hardware error, user mishap, etc.). This is a highly recommended practice.

(1) The fundamental unit of information HP-UX uses for access and storage allocation on a mass storage medium. The size of a block varies between implementations. On the Series 200 it varies from 1K to 8K bytes; for the Series 500, see

logical block size.

(2) On media such as 9 track tape which write variable length strings of data, block is equivalent to the size of those strings.

Block is often used to distinguish from record with a block containing several records, with the number of records being the

-1-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

block special file

boot or boot-up

boot area boot ROM bus address

OS/80

OS-80 character special file child process command command interpreter

Hewlett-Packard

GLOSSARY (9)

blocking factor.

A special file associated with a mass storage device (such as a disc or a CS-80 tape cartridge drive) that transfers data by first putting it in the buffer cache and then passing it to the user process.

If the user process requests data from a mass storage device that already has the data in the buffer cache, then no I/O to the mass storage device is necessary. Block special files may be mounted.

The process of loading, initializing, and running an operating system.

On the Series 200, a portion of a mass storage medium (block zero) on which the volume header and a small "bootstrap" program used in booting the operating system reside. The boot area is reserved exclusively for use by HP-UX.

On the Series 500, the portion of an SDF mass storage medium which contains an operating system.

A program residing in ROM (Read Only Memory) that executes each time the computer is powered-up. The function of the boot

ROM is to run tests on the computer's hardware, find all devices accessible through the computer, and then load either a specified operating system or the first operating system found according to a specific search algorithm.

A number which makes up part of the address HP-UX uses to

"find" a particular device. The bus address is determined by a switch setting on a peripheral device which allows the computer to distinguish between two devices connected to the same interface. A bus address is sometimes called a "device address".

A family of mass storage devices that communicate via a common protocol,

OS/80

(Command Set '80) command set. This family includes hard discs, removable discs, and tape devices.

A special file associated with devices which transfer data by a means other than by using the buffer cache. Examples are printers, terminals, nine-track magnetic tapes, and discs accessed in "raw" mode (see raw disc).

A new process created by an existing process via the fork(2) or

vfork(2) system call. The new process is thereafter known to the existing process as its child process. The existing process is the

parent process of the new process. See parent process and fork.

A stand-alone unit of executable code (a program), or a file containing a list of other programs to execute in order (a shell script). In HP-UX, commands are executed through a command interpreter called a shell, often sh(1) or csh(l). Arguments following the command name are passed on to the command program. You can write your own commands, either as executable programs, or as shell scripts (written in the shell programming language).

A program which reads lines of text from standard input (typed at the keyboard or redirected from a file), and interprets them as requests to execute other programs. A command interpreter for

-2July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9) GLOSSARY (9)

configuration control character crash current directory current working directory daemon data encryption default search path delta sh(1)

and

csh(1).

The ability to "customize" your kernel with the drivers, code, and tunable parameter values desired.

A member of a character set which produces action in a device other than printing or displaying a character. In the ASCII character set, control characters are those in the range 0 through

31, and 127. Control characters can be generated by holding down [CTRL], [CONTROL], or [CNTL] (depending on what the control key is labeled on your keyboard) and pressing a character key. These two-key sequences are often written as ctrl-d, for example, or 'D, where ' stands for the control key. Both representations assume that the control key is held down while the second key is pressed.

The unexpected shutdown of a program or system. If the operating system crashes, this is a "system crash", and requires the system to be re-booted.

See

working directory.

See

working directory.

A process which runs in the background, and which is usually immune to termination instructions from a terminal. Its purpose is to perform various scheduling, clean-up, and maintenance jobs.

Lpsched(l)

is an example of a daemon that exists to perform these functions for line printer jobs queued by

Ip(1).

An example of a permanent daemon (Le. it never should die) is

cron(1m).

A method for encoding information in order to protect sensitive or proprietary data. For example, all users' passwords are automatically encrypted by HP-UX. The encryption method used by HP-UX converts ASCII text into a base-64 representation using the alphabet " /, 0-9, A-Z, a-z. See

passwd(5)

numerical equivalents associated with this alphabet. for the

The sequence of directory prefixes that

sh(1), time(1),

and other

HP-UX commands apply in searching for a file known by an incomplete path name (Le. a path name not beginning with a slash, /). It is defined by the environment variable PATH (see

environ(7)). Login(1)

sets PATH equal to :/bin:/usr /bin, which means that your working directory is the first directory searched, followed by /bin, followed by /usr /bin. You can redefine the search path by modifying the value of PATH. This is usually done in fete/profile, and/or in the .profile file found in your home directory (for the Bourne shell), or

csh. login ,

.login,

cshrc

(for the C-shell

csh).

A term used in the Source Code Control System (SCCS) to describe a unit of one or more textual changes to an SCCS file.

Eac~ time you edit an SCCS file, the changes you make to the file are stored separately as a delta. Then, using the

get(

1) command, you can specify which deltas are to be applied to or excluded from the SCCS file, thus yielding a particular version of the file. (Contrast this with the

editor, which incorporates your changes into the file immediately, prohibiting you from obtaining a previous version of that file.) See

sees, sees

Hewlett-Packard

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

demon device file directory effective group ID effective user ID

Hewlett-Packard

GLOSSARY (9)

file.

See

daemon.

See

special file.

A file which provides the mapping between the names of files and their contents. For every file name contained in a directory, that directory contains a pointer to the file's

i-node

called a

link.

A file may have several links appearing anywhere on the same file system. Each user is free to create (using

mkdir(

1)) as many directories as he needs, providing that the parent directory of the new directory gives him permission to do so. Once a directory has been created, it is ready to contain ordinary files and other directories. An HP-UX directory is named and behaves exactly like an ordinary file, with one exception: no user (including the super-user) is allowed to write data on the directory itself; this privilege is reserved for the HP-UX operating system.

By convention, a directory contains at least two links, " and ""' referred to as

dot

and

dot-dot

respectively. Dot refers to the directory itself and dot-dot refers to its parent directory. For purposes of deletion, a directory containing only " and.. is considered empty. (In the root directory,

"I", ".", and ",," are identical.)

Every process has an effective group ID that is used to determine file access permissions. A process's effective group ID is determined by the file (command) that process is executing. If that file's set-group-ID bit is set (located in the mode of the file - see

mode),

then the process's effective group ID is set equal to the file's group ID. This makes the process appear to belong to the file's group, perhaps enabling the process to access files which must be accessed in order for the program to execute successfully.

If the file's set-group-ID bit is not set, then the process's effective group lD can only be set by an explicit call to

getuid(2)

setuid(2).

The id is always inherited from parent across a

fork(2).

The

setuid/getuid

bit determines whether it is inhereted across

exec(2).

See

group, real group ID,

and

set-group-ID bit.

A process has an effective user ID that is used to determine file access permissions (and other permissions with respect to system calls, iF the effective user ID is 0 - that of the super-user). A process's effective user ID is determined by the file (command) that process is executing. If that file's set-user-ID bit is set

(located in the mode of the file - see

mode),

then the process's effective user ID is set equal to the file's user ID. This makes the process appear to be the file's owner, enabling the process to access files which must be accessed in order for the program to execute successfully. (Many HP-UX commands which are owned by

root,

such as

mail(1),

have their set-user-ID bit set so other users can execute these commands.) If the file's set-group-ID bit is not set, then the process's effective group ID can only be set by an explicit call to

getuid(2)

inherited from parent across a or

setuid(2). fork(2).

The

The id is alwatys

setuid/getuid

bit determines whether it is inhereted across

and

set-user-ID bit. exec

(2). See

real user

-4July 9,1985

GLOSSARY (9)

environment end-of-file file file access permissions

GLOSSARY (9)

The set of defined shell variables (some of which are PATH,

TERM, SHELL, EXINIT, HOME, etc.) which define the conditions under which your commands run. These conditions can include your terminal characteristics, your home directory, and your default search path. Each shell variable setting in the current process is passed on to all child processes that are created, provided that each shell variable setting has been exported via the

export

command (see

sh(1))

setenv(l)

with

esh(l).

Unexported shell variable settings are meaningful only to the current process, and any child processes created are given the default settings given certain shell variables in

jete/profile

and/or

$HOME/profile

(when using the Bourne shell) or

/ete/csh.login, .login,

eshrc

(when using the C-shell).

(1) the data returned when attempting to read past the logical end of a file via

stdio(3S)

routines. In this case end-of-file is not properly a character. (2) The character [CTRL]-[D]. (3) A character defined by

stty(l)

ioctl(2)

(see

termio(4)).

to act as end-of-file on your terminal. Usually this is [CTRL]-[D]. (4)

The indication (as the function result) which indicates end of data when using

read(2).

An HP-UX file is simply a group of logically related bytes of information. These bytes, for example, could be a bytes of executable code or bytes of data. Thus, directories, ordinary files, special files, etc. can all be considered files. Every file must have a file name (see

file name)

which enables the user (and many of the HP-UX commands) to reference the contents of the file. The size of a file is exactly the number of bytes the file contains - the system imposes no particular structure on the contents of a file

(although some programs do). Files may be accessed serially or randomly (indexed by byte offset). The interpretation of file contents and structure is up to the programs that access the file.

Every file in the file system has a set of access permissions.

These permissions are used in determining whether a process may perform a requested operation on the file (such as opening a file for writing). Access permissions are established at the time a file is created. They may be changed at some later time through the chmod(2) call.

File access is broken down according to whether a file may be: read, written, or executed. Directory files use the execute permission to control if the directory may be searched.

File access permissions are interpreted by the system as they apply to three different classes of users: the owner of the file, those users in the file's group, anyone else. Every file has an independent set of access permissions for each of these classes.

When an access check is made, the system decides if permission should be granted by checking the access information applicable to the caller.

Read, write, and execute/search permissions on a file are granted to a process if:

The process's effective user ID is super-user.

Hewlett-Packard -5-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

file descriptor file name file pointer

Hewlett-Packard

GLOSSARY (9)

The process's effective user ID matches the user ID of the owner of the file and the appropriate access bit of the

"owner" portion (0700) of the file mode is set.

The process's effective user ID does not match the user

ID of the owner of the file, and either the process's effective group ID matches the group ID of the file, or the group ID of the file is in the process's group access list, and the appropriate access bit of the "group" portion

(070) of the file mode is set.

The process's effective user ID does not match the user

ID of the owner of the file, and the process's effective group ID docs not match the group ID of the file, and the appropriate access bit of the "other" portion (07) of the file mode is set.

Otherwise, the corresponding permissions are denied.

A small integer identifier, which is used to refer to a file that has been opened for reading and/or writing, and is an index into the user's table of open files. The opened file must be identified by its file descriptor when using system calls to read or write the file.

The value of a file descriptor has a range from 0 to a system defined maximum. For systems at

HP-UX

STANDARD and above, the minimum value for this number is 60. For systems below

HP-UX

STANDARD the minimum value is 20. No file descriptor may have a value outside the range 0-59 or 0-19, depending on the implementation.

A file descriptor is obtained through system calls such as

open(2), creat(2), dup(2), fcntl(2)

pipe(2).

The file descriptor is used as an argument by calls such as

read(2), write(2), ioctl(2),

and

close(2).

A string of up to 14 characters which is used to refer to the contents of an ordinary file, special file, or directory. These characters may be any ASCII character except ASCII values 0 (null) and 47 (slash -

!, or

I).

Note that it is generally unwise to use

?, [,

1 as part of file names because of the special meaning the shell attaches to these characters (see to begin a file name with -,

sh(1)).

It is also not wise

+, or

=, because some programs assume that these characters indicate that a command argument follows. Although permitted, it is advisable to avoid the use of characters which do not have a printable graphic on the hardware you commonly use, or which are likely to confuse the hardware.

A data element, obtained through any of the

fopen(3S)

standard

I/O library routines, which "points to" (refers to) a file opened for reading and/or writing, and which keeps track of where the next I/O operation will take place in the file (in the form of a byte offset relative to the beginning of the file). After obtaining the file pointer, it must thereafter be used to refer to the open file when using any of the standard I/O library routines. (See

stdio(3S)

for a list of these routines.)

-6-

July 9,1985

GLOSSARY (9)

file system filter fork group group access list hierarchical directory home directory host name

Hewlett-Packard!

GLOSSARY (9)

The supporting data structures, HP-UX directory structure, and associated files that reside on one or more mass storage volumes.

Refer to the

System Administrator Manual

supplied with your system for details concerning file system implementation and maintenance.

A command which reads data from the standard input, performs a transformation on the data, and writes it to the standard output.

An HP-UX system call

(fork(2))

which, when invoked by an existing process, causes a new process to be created. The new process is called the

child process;

the existing process is called the

parent process.

The child process is created by making an exact copy of the parent process. The parent and child processes are able to identify themselves by the value returned by their corresponding

fork

call (see

fork(2)

for details).

group

is a set of a or more users who are usually logically related in some way (e.g., all users who are working on a particular project) and who generally require the sharing of data between each other. The members of a group are defined in the file

/etc/passwd

via a numerical

group ID

(users with identical group IDs are members of the same group). An ASCII

group name

is associated with each group ID in the file

/etc/group

(the members of each group can be listed in /etc/group, also, but this information is purely for user benefit, and is of little use to the system). A group ID is associated with every file in the file system, and the mode of each file contains a set of permission bits which apply only to groups of which the file owner is a member.

Thus, if you are a member of the group associated with. the file, and if the appropriate permissions are given to your group in the file's mode, you may access the file. See

real group ID, effective group ID,

accessgroups,

privilegedgroup,

and

set-group-ID bit.

The group access list is an additional set of group ID's used only in determining resource accessibility. Access checks are performed as described in file access permissions.

A directory (or file system) structure in which each directory may contain other directories as well as files.

The directory name given by the value of the shell variable

HOME. When you first log in,

login(l)

automatically sets

HOME equal to your login directory (see

login directory).

You may change its value at any time, however. This is usually done in the

.profile

file contained in your login directory. Setting

HOME in no way affects your login directory, but simply gives you a convenient way of referring to what should be your most commonly-used directory.

An ASCII string of at most 8 characters (of which only 6 are supported by all the various manufactuer's UNIX systems) which uniquely identifies an HP-UX system on a

uucp

network. The host name for your system may be viewed and/or set with the

hostname(1)

command. Systems without a defined host name are described as "unknown" on the

uucp

network. Do not confuse a host name with a

node name,

which is a string that

-7-

JUly 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

i-node image init

uniquely identifies an HP-UX siYstem on a Local Area Network

(LAN). Although your host and node names m~

(and this is often advisable), they are set and used by totally different software. See no de name.

Each ordinary or special file, or directory has associated with it an i-node. The i-node contains, among other things, the file's size, protection mask, the number of links, and pointers to the disc blocks where the file's contents can be found. Each connection between an i-node and its entry in one or more directories is called a link.

The current state of your computer (or your portion of the computer, on a multi-user system) during the execution of a command. Often thought of as a "snapshot" of the state of the machine at any particular moment during execution.

A special process (the initialization process) usually with a process ID 01 1. It is the ancestor of every other process in the system and is used to start login processes.

interleave factor

Internal Terminal Emulator (ITE)

The "device driver" code contained in the HP-UX kernel and associated with the computer's built-in keyboard and display or a particular keyboard and display connected to the computer, depending on the Series and Model of your HP-UX computer.

See system console and the System Adminstrator Manual supplied with your system for details.

interrupt signal

A number which determines the order in which sectors on a mass storage medium are accessed. It can be optimized to make data acquisition more efficient.

The signal sent by SIGINT (see signal(2)). This signal generally terminates whatever program you are running. The key which sends this signal can be redefined with ioctl(2) or stty(1) (see ter-

mio(4)).

It defaults to the ASCII DEL (rubout) character (the

[DEL] key) or the [BREAK] key. [CONTROL]-[C] is often used instead.

intrinsic

I/O redirection kernel library

See system call.

A mechanism provided by the HP-UX shell for changing the source of data for standard input and/or the destination of data for standard output and standard error. See sh(1).

The HP-UX operating system. The kernel is the executable code responsible for managing the computer's resources, such as allocating memory, creating processes, and scheduling programs for execution.

An archive file containing a set of subroutines and variables which may be accessed by user programs. For example,

/lib/libc.a

is a library containing all functions of section 2, and all functions of section 3 marked (3C) and (3S), in the HP-UX

Reference. Similarly, /lib/libm.a is a library containing all functions in section 3 marked (3M) in the HP-UX Reference. See

intro(3).

Hewlett-Packard -8-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

£IF link linker logical block size login login directory

An acronym for Logical Interchange Format. A standard format for mass storage implemented on many Hewlett-Packard computers to aid in media transportability. The lif*(1) commands are used to perform various functions using LIF.

A directory entry for any type of file. The information constituting a link includes the name of the file, and where the contents of that file may be found on a mass storage medium. One physical file may have several links to it. If the links appear in different directories, the file mayor may not have the same name in each.

If the links appear in one directory, however, each link must have a unique name in that directory. Multiple links to directories are not allowed (except for the super-user). See cpr 1), link( 1),

link(2),

and unlink(2). Also, to prepare a program for execution, see linker.

The linker combines one or more object programs into one program, searches libraries to resolve user program references, and builds an executable file in a. out format. This executable file is ready to be executed through the program loader, exec(2). The linker is invoked with the ld(l) command. The linker is often called a link editor.

The smallest unit of memory which can be allocated on a Series

500 SDF volume; a multiple of the physical sector size. This value is set at system initialization time; see sdfinit(lM).

The process of gaining access to HP-UX. This consists of successful execution of the login sequence defined by login(l) which varies depending on the system configuration. It includes providing a login name and possibly one or more passwords.

The directory in which you are placed immediately after you log in. This directory is defined for each user in the file /etc/passwd.

The shell variable HOME is set automatically to your login directory by login(1) immediately after you log in. See home

directory. magic number major number

The first word of an a.out(5) or archive file. This word contains the system ID, which tells what machine (hardware) the file will run on, and the file type (executable, shareable executable, archive, etc.).

A number used exclusively to create special files that enable I/O to/from specific devices. This number indicates which device driver to use for the device. Refer to mknod(1M) and the System

Administrator Manual

supplied with your system for details.

message queue identifier

struct ushort ushort ushort ushort

A message queue identifier (msqid) is a unique positive integer created by a msgget(2) system call. Each msqid has a message queue and a data structure associated with it. The data structure is referred to as msqiLds and contains the following members: ipc_perm msg_perm; msg_qnum; msg_qbytes; msg--.lspid; msg--.lrpid;

/* operation permission struct

/* number of msgs on q

/* max number of bytes on q

* pid of last msgsnd operation

* /

* pid of last msgrcv operation

* /

Hewlett-Packard -9-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY ( 9)

GLOSSARY (9) time_t msg-Btime; time_t msg-I'time; time_t msg_ctime; ushort cuid; ushort cgid; ushort uid; ushort gid; ushort mode;

/* last msgsnd time

/ * last msgrcv time

* /

/ * last change time

* /

/ *

Times measured in secs since

* /

00:00:00

GMT,

Jan.

1970

Msg_perm is a ipc_perm structure that specifies the message operation permission (see below). This structure includes the following members:

/ * creator user id

* /

/ * creator group id

* /

/* user id

/* group id

/* r/w permission

Msg_qnum is the number of messages currently on the queue.

Msg_qbytes is the maximum number of bytes allowed on the queue.

Msg~spid formed a

msgsnd

operation. Msg~rpid is the process id of the last process that performed a

msgrcv

operation. Msg-Btime is the time of the last the last

msgrcv msgsnd

operation, msg-I'time is the time of operation, and msg_ctime is the time of the last

msgctl(2)

structure. operation that changed a member of the above

message operation permissions

In the

msgop(2)

and

msgctl(2)

system call descriptions, the permission required for an operation is given as "{token}", where

"token" is the type of permission needed interpreted as follows:

metacharacter

00400

00200

Read by user

Write by user

00060 Read, Write by group

00006

Read, Write by others

Read and Write permissions on a msqid are granted to a process if one or more of the following are true:

The process's effective user ID is super-user.

The process's effective user ID matches msg_perm.[c]uid in the data structure associated with

msqid

and the appropriate bit of the "user" portion (0600) of msg_perm.mode is set.

The process's effective user ID does not match msg_perm.[c]uid and the process's effective group ID matches msg_perm.[c]gid and the appropriate bit of the

"group" portion (060) of msg_perm.mode is set.

The process's effective user ID does not match msg_perm.[c]uid and the process's effective group ID does not match msg_perm.[c]gid and the appropriate bit of the "other" portion (06) of msg_perm.mode is set.

Otherwise, the corresponding permissions are denied.

A character which has special meaning to the HP-UX shell. The set of metacharacters includes: *,?,!, [, ],

>, ;,

I, ., " ", and

Refer to

sh(l)

for the meaning associated with each.

Hewlett-Packard

-10 -

July 9,1985

GLOSSARY (9)

minor number mode mountable file system multi-user state new-line node name

GLOSSARY (9)

A number used exclusively to create special files that enable I/O to/from specific devices. This number is passed to the device driver and is used to select which device in a family of devices is to be used, and possibly some operational modes. The exact format and meaning of the minor number is both system and driver dependent. Refer to the System Administrator Manual supplied with your system for details. See address.

On the Series 200 and 500, for HP-IB devices, this number indicates the HP-IB address, select code, and the unit and/or volume numbers.

A 16-bit word associated with every file in the file system, stored in the i-node. The least-significant 12 bits of this word determine the read, write, and execute permissions for the file owner, file group, and all others, and contain the set-user-ID, setgroup-ID, and "sticky" (save text image after execution) bits.

The least-significant 12 bits are settable by the chmod(1) command if you are the file's owner or the super-user. The sticky bit can only be set by the super-user. These 12 bits are sometimes referred to as permission bits. The most-significant 4 bits specify the file type for the associated file and are set as the result of

creat(2), open(2),

or mknod(2) system calls.

A (blocked special) file system contained on some mass storage medium with its own root directory and an independent hierarchy of directories and files. See block special file and mount(1).

The condition of the HP-UX operating system in which terminals in addition to the system console are allowing communication between the system and its users. By default, the Series 200 multi-user state is state 2, and the Series 500 multi-user state is state 1. Do not confuse the multi-user system with the multiuser state. A multi-user system is a system which may have more than one user actively communicating with the system when it is in the multi-user state. Multi-user states-there can be more than one multi-user state in inittab- remove the single-user restriction imposed by the single-user state. See

single-user state.

See inittab(5).

The character with an ASCII value of 10 (line-feed) used to separate lines of characters.

It is represented by \n in the C language and in various utilities. The terminal driver (see tty( 4)) normally interprets the carriage-return/line-feed sequence sent by a terminal as a single new-line character.

A string of up to 31 characters, not including control characters or spaces, that uniquely identifies a node on a Local Area Network (LAN). The node name for each system is set by the

npowerup

command, which is one of the commands supplied with the optional LAN/9000 product. Do not confuse a node name with a host name, which is a string that uniquely identifies an

HP-UX system on a uucp network. Your node and host names can be identical, but they are used and set by totally different software. See host name, LAN/9000 User's Guide, and

LAN/9000 Node Manager's Guide.

Hewlett-Packard -11July 9,1985

GLOSSARY (9) GLOSSARY (9)

ordinary file orphan process

OSF owner parent directory parent process password path name

A type of HP-UX file containing ASCII text (e.g. program source), binary data (e.g. executable code), etc. Ordinary files can be created by the user through I/O redirection, editors, or

HP-UX commands.

Whenever a parent process terminates for any reason and leaves behind one or more child processes that are still active, those child processes are called orphan processes. Init( 1M) inherits

(becomes the effective parent of) all orphan processes.

An acronym for Operating System File. An OSF resides in the

SDF boot area on a Series 500 system, and contains all or part of an operating system. See

osmgr(1M), oscp(1M), osck(1M), and

osmark(1M).

The owner of a file is usually the creator of that file. However, the ownership of a file can be changed by the super-user or the current owner with the chownllj cUlllmand ur the chown(2) system call. The file owner is able to do whatever he wants with his files, including remove them, copy them, move them, change their contents, etc. He is also able to change the files' modes.

A directory's parent directory is the directory one level above it in the file hierarchy. All directories except the root directory

have one (and only one) parent directory. The parent directory is sometimes referred to as the

superior directory.

Whenever a new process is created by a currently-existing process (via fork(2) or vfork(2)) , the currently-existing process is said to be the parent process of the newly-created process.

Every process has exactly one parent process (except the init process - see init) , but each process can create several new processes with the fork(2) system call. The parent process ID of any process is the process ID of its creator.

A string of ASCII characters used to verify the identity of a user.

Passwords can be associated with users and groups. If a user has a password, it is automatically encrypted and entered in the second field of that user's line in the /etc/passwd file. A user may create or change a password for himself with the

passwd(1)

command.

(sometimes written as one word, pathname). A sequence of directory names separated by slashes, and ending with any file name. All file names except the last in the sequence must be directories. If a path name begins with a slash

U),

it is an

abso-

lute path name (see absolute path name); otherwise it is a relative path name (see relative path name). A path name defines the path to be followed through the hierarchical file system in order to lind a particular file.

More precisely, a path name is a null-terminated character string constructed as follows:

<path-name>: :=<file-name> I <path-prefix> <file-name> I /

<path-prefix> ::= <rtprefix> I / <rtprefix>

<rtprefix>::=<dirname>/I<rtprefix><dimame>/

Hewlett-Packard

- 12July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

permission bits pipe privileged groups proc1 process process group process group ID process group leader

Hewlett-Packard

GLOSSARY

(9) where <file-name> is a string of 1 to 14 characters other than the ASCII slash and null, and <dirname> is a string of 1 to 14 characters (other than the

ASCII slash and nUll) that names a directory or network special file with RFA (Remote File Access).

A slash by itself names the root directory.

Unless specifically stated otherwise, the null path name is treated as if it named a non-existent file.

The nine least-significant bits of a file's mode. These bits determine read, write, and execute permissions for the file's owner, the file's group, and all others. See chmod(2) for further details.

An inter-process I/O channel used to pass data between two processes.

It is commonly used by the shell to transfer data from the standard output of one process to the standard input of another. On a command line, a pipe is signaled by a vertical bar

(I).

The output from the command(s) on the left of the vertical bar is channeled directly into the standard input of the command(s) on the right. The pipe(2) intrinsic function allows user programs to take advantage of this feature.

A privileged group is a group which has had a setprivgrp (see

getprivgrp(2)) operation performed on it giving it access to some system calls otherwise reserved for the super-user.

See init.

An invocation of a program, or the execution of an image. No command can be executed without a process in which it can execute. Alternately, a process cannot exist without a command or image in some stage of execution. Several processes can all be running the same program, but each may have different data and be in different stages of execution.

An association of one or more processes is called a process group.

A process's membership in a particular process group is established by a numerical process group ID. Each process can belong to only one process group. Every process group has a process group leader. See process group ID and process group

leader.

A positive integer in the range 1 - 30 000 associated with every active process, which establishes that process's membership with a particular process group. All members of a process group have the same process group ID. A process group ID is always the process ID of the process group leader. This grouping permits the signalling of related processes. See kill(2), process group, and

process group leader.

A process group leader is a process whose process group ID and process ID are equal. A process becomes a process group leader through the setpgrp(2) system call. All processes created by the process group leader become members of that process group. All processes created by the init process (see in it) are process group leaders. For example, when you log in on the system, the shell you receive to interpret your commands is a process group leader, and all subsequent process's created by your shell are members of

- 13-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

process ID program prompt quit signal raw disc real group ID real user ID

Hewlett-Packard

GLOSSARY (9) your shell's process group. See

group. process group ID

and

process

Each active process in the system is uniquely identified by a positive integer called a process ID. The range of this ID is from

1 to 30000. This permits the selective sending of signals to processes with

kill(1), kill(2),

signal(2).

The process ID of any user process is available with the

ps(1)

command. If a background process is created, the shell reports its process ID to you when execution has begnn.

A sequence of instructions, either binary (as machine object code) or text (as source code or shell scripts), that define an algorithm that can be carried out by a computer. C, FORTRAN, Pascal, and BASIC source; awk source; shell scripts; and executable object

(a.out(5))

are all examples of programs.

The character(s) displayed by the shell on the display indicating that the system is ready for a command. The prompt is usually a dollar sign ($) for ordinary users and a pound sign

(#) for the super-user, but the user can re-define it to be any string by setting the shell variable

PSl

in his

.profile

file.

The signal sent by

SIGQUIT.

See

signal(2).

The quit signal is generated by typing the character defined by the teletype handler as your quit signal. (See

stty(1), ioctl(2),

and

termio(4).)

The default is the ASCII FS character (ASCII value 28, generated by typing [CONTROL]-[\].) This signal usually causes a running program to terminate and generates a file containing the "core image" of the terminated process. The core image is useful for debugging purposes. (Some systems do not support core images, and on those systems no such file is generated.)

The name given to a disc for which there exists a character special file which allows direct transmission between the disc and the user's read or write buffer.

A positive integer which is assigned to every user on the system.

The association of a user and his real group ID is done in the file

/etc/passwd.

The modifier "real" is used because a user can also have an

effective

group ID (see

effective group ID).

The real group ID can then be mapped to a group name in the file

/etc/group,

although it need not be. Thus, every user is a member of some group (which may be nameless), even if that group has only one member.

Every time a process creates a child process (via

jork(2)),

that process has a real group ID equal to the parent process's real group ID.

A positive integer which is assigned to every user on the system.

A real user ID is assigned to every valid login name in the file

/etc/passwd.

The modifier "real" is used because a user can also have an

effective

user ID (see

effective user ID).

Every time a process creates a child process (via

jork(2)),

that process has a real user ID equal to the parent process's real user

ID.

- 14July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

regular expression relative path name root directory root volume saved user ID saved group ID sees

Hewlett-Packard

GLOSBARY(9)

A string of zero or more characters; the characters contained in the string may all be literal, which means that the regular expression matches itself only, or one or more of the characters may be a metacharacter, which means that a single regular expression could match several literal strings. Regular expressions are most often encountered in text editors

(ed(1), ex(1), vi(1)),

where searches are performed for a specific piece of text, or in commands that were created to search for a particular string in a file (most notably

grep(1)). Sh(1)

and

csh(1)

also use metacharacters to match one or more patterns; this is a different mechanism that regular expressions. See

ed(1).

A path name that does not begin with a slash. It indicates that a file's location is given relative to your current working directory, and that the search begins there (instead of at the root directory). An example is dirl/fiIe2, which searches for the directory dirl in your current working directory. Dirl is then searched for the file file2.

1) The highest level directory of the hierarchical file system, from which all other files branch. In HP-UX, the "/" character refers to the root directory. The root directory is the only directory in the file system which is its own parent directory.

2) Each process has associated with it a concept of a root directory for the purpose of resolving path name searches for those paths beginning with" /". A process's root directory need not be the root directory of the root file system, and can be changed by the

chroot(1)

command or

chroot(2)

system call. Such a directory appears to the process involved to have ., pointing to itself.

The mass storage volume which contains the boot area (which contains the HP-UX kernel) and the root directory of the HP-

UX file system.

Every process has a saved user ID which retains the process's effective user ID from the last successful

exec(2),

or from the last super-user call to

setuid(2). Setuid(2)

permits a process to set its effective user ID to this remembered value. Consequently, a process which executes a program with the set-user-ID bit set and with an owner ID of 5 (for example) can set its effective user ID to 5, or to its real user ID, any time until the program terminates. See

exec(2), setuid(2), saved group ID, effective user

ID,

and

set-user-ID bit.

Every process has a saved group ID which retains the process's effective group ID from the last successful

exec(2),

or from the last super-user call to

setgid. Setgid

permits a process to set its effective group ID to this remembered value. Consequently, a process which executes a program with the set-group-ID bit set and with a group ID of 5 (for example) can set its effective group

ID to 5, or to its real group ID, any time until the program terminates. See

exec(2), setuid(2), saved user ID, effective group

ID,

and

set-group-ID bit.

An acronym for Source Code Control System. The Source Code

Control System is a set of HP-UX commands which enable you to store changes to an SCCS file as separate "units" (called

-15 -

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9) GLOSSARY (9)

sees

SDF file secondary prompt select code semaphore identifier deltas).

These units, each of which contains one or more textual changes to the file, can then be applied to or excluded from the

SCCS file to obtain different versions of the file. The commands that make up SCCS are

admin(l), cdc(l), delta(l), get(l), prs(l), rmdel(l), sact(l), sccsdiff(l), unget(1), val(l),

and

what(l).

See

delta,

sees

file.

An ordinary text file which has been modified so that the Source

Code Control System (SCCS) may be used with it. This modification is done automatically by the

See

sees,

delta. admin(l)

command.

An acronym for Structured Directory Format. SDF is implemented on the Series 500 computers only, and provides treestructured access to files through the root directory of the volume.

One or more characters that the Bourne shell

sh(l)

prints on the display, indicating that more input is needed. This prompt is much less often encountered than the shell's primary prompt (see

prompt).

When it occurs, it is usually caused by an omitted right quote on a string (which confuses the shell), or when you enter a shell programming language control-flow construct (such as a for construct) from the command line. By default, the shell's secondary prompt is the greater-than sign

(», but you can re-define it by setting the shell variable PS2 appropriately in your

.profile

file.

On the series 200 and 500 part of an address used for devices .. A number determined by a setting on the interface card to which a peripheral device is connected, or by the particular I/O slot the

I/O card resides in. Multiple peripherals connected to the same interface card share the same select code.

A semaphore identifier (semid) is a unique positive integer created by a

semget(2)

system call. Each semid has a set of semaphores and a data structure associated with it. The data structure is referred to as

semiLds

and contains the following members: struct ipc_perm seIll-perm; /

* operation permission struct

* / ushort sellLJJ.sems; time_t seIll-otime; time_t seIll-ctime;

/* number of sems in set

/* last operation time

* last change time

* /

/ *

Times measured in secs since

* /

00:00:00 GMT, Jan. 1, 1970

SeIIL-perm is a ipc_perm structure that specifies the semaphore operation permission (see below). This structure includes the following members: ushort cuid; ushort cgid; ushort uid; ushort gid; ushort mode;

/ * creator user id

* /

/ * creator group id

* /

/* user id

/* group id

/* ria permission

The value of sem---11sems is equal to the number of semaphores in the set. Each semaphore in the set is referenced by a positive

Hewlett-Packard - 16July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9) GLOSSARY (9) integer referred to as a

seffi-num.

SeIlL..llum values run sequentially from 0 to the value of seIlL..llsems minus 1.

SeIIL-otime is the time of the last seIIL-ctime is the time of the last

semop(2)

operation, and

semctl(2)

operation that changed a member of the above structure.

A semaphore is a data structure that contains the following members: ushort short ushort ushort semval; sempid; semncnt; semzcnt;

/* semaphore value

/ * pid of last operation

* /

#

awaiting semval

> cval

#

awaiting semval = 0

Semval is a non-negative integer. Sempid is equal to the process ID of the last process that performed a semaphore operation on this semaphore. Semncnt is a count of the number of processes that are currently suspended awaiting this semaphore's semval to become greater than its current value. Semzcnt is a count of the number of processes that are currently suspended awaiting this semaphore's semval to become zero.

semaphore operation permissions

In the

semop(2)

and

semctl(2)

system call descriptions, the permission required for an operation is given as "{token}", where

"token" is the type of permission needed interpreted as follows:

00400

00200

Read by user

Alter by user

00060

00006

Read, Alter by group

Read, Alter by others

Read and Alter permissions on a semid are granted to a process if one or more of the following are true:

The process's effective user ID is super-user.

set-group-ID bit

The process's effective user ID matches sem_perm.[c]uid in the data structure associated with

semid

and the appropriate bit of the "user" portion (0600) of sem_perm.mode is set.

The process's effective user ID does not match sem_perm.[c]uid, and either the process's effective group

ID matches sem_perm.[c]gid or sem_perm.[c]gid is in the process's group access list, and the appropriate bit of the "group" portion (060) of sem_perm.mode is set.

The process's effective user ID does not match sem_perm.[c]uid, and the process's effective group ID does not match sem_perm.[c]gid and neither is seIIL-perm.[c]gid in the process's group access list, and the appropriate bit of the "other" portion (06) of seIIL-perm.mode is set.

Otherwise, the corresponding permissions are denied.

A single bit in the mode of every file in the file system. If a file is executed whose set-group-ID bit is set, then the effective group

ID of the process which executed the file is set equal to the real

Hewlett-Packard -17 -

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9) GLOSSARY(9)

set-user-ID bit

group ID of the owner of the file. See

effective group ID, group,

and

real group ID.

A single bit in the mode of every file in the file system. If a file is executed whose set-user-ID bit is set, then the effective user ID of the process which executed the file is set equal to the real user

ID of the owner of the file. See

effective user ID

and

real user

ID. shared memory identifier

A shared memory identifier (shmid) is a unique positive integer created by a

shmget(2)

system call. Each shmid has a segment of memory (referred to as a shared memory segment) and a data structure associated with it. The data structure is referred to as

shmiLds;

some of its members are: struct int ushort ushort short time_t time_t time_t ipc_perm slmL_perm; shII1-Segsz; shID-cpid; shnLlpid; sh~attch; shID-atime; shID-dtime; shID-ctime;

/* operation permission struct

* size of segment

* /

* creator pid

* /

/* pid of last operation

/* number of current attaches

* last attach time

* /

* last detach time

* /

* last change time

* /

/ *

Times measured in secs since

* /

00:00:00 GMT, Jan. 1, 1970

8hm_perm is a ipc_perm structure that specifies the shared memory operation permission (see below). This structure includes the following members: ushort cuid; ushort cgid; ushort uid; ushort gid; ushort mode;

/ * creator user id

* /

/ * creator group id

* /

/* user id

/* group id

/* r/w permission

ShID-segsz specifies the size (in bytes) of the shared memory segment. Shm_cpid is the process id of the process that created the shared memory identifier. 8hm---.lpid is the process id of the last process that performed a

shmop(2)

operation.

Shm_nattch is the number of times the segments are currently attaching to other processes. ShID-atime is the time of the last

shmat

operation, shm_dtime is the time of the last

shmdt

operation, and shID-ctime is the time of the last

shmctl(2)

operation that changed one of the members of the above structure.

shared memory operation permissions

In the

shmop(2)

and

shmctl(2)

system call descriptions, the permission required for an operation is given as "{token}", where

"token" is the type of permission needed and is interpreted as follows:

00400

00200

00060

00006

Read by user

Write by user

Read, Write by group

Read, Write by others

Hewlett-Packard - 18-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

shell shell program shell script signal

single~user

state special file

Hewlett~Packard

GLOSSARY (9)

Read and Write permissions on a shmid are granted to a process if one or more of the following are true:

The process's effective user ID is super~user.

The process's effective user ID matches shID-perm.[cJuid in the data structure associated with shmid and the appropriate bit of the "user" portion (0600) of shID-perm.mode is set.

The process's effective user ID does not match sem_perm.[cJuid, and either the process's effective group

ID matches sem_perm.[cJgid or seID-perm.[cJgid is in the process's group access list, and the appropriate bit of the "group" portion (060) of seID-perm.mode is set.

The process's effective user ID does not match seID-perm.[cJuid, and the process's effective group ID does not match sem_perm.[cJgid and neither is seID-perm.[cJgid in the process's group access list, and the appropriate bit of the "other" portion (06) of seID-perm.mode is set.

Otherwise, the corresponding permissions are denied.

A shell is a command which functions as both a command inter~ preter and an interpretive programming language. A shell is usually automatically invoked (via /etc/passwd)foreveryuserwho in order to provide a user~interface to the

HP~UX operating sys~ tern. See sh(1), csh(1), or rsh(1), and the tutorials supplied with your system for details.

See shell script.

A sequence of shell commands and shell programming language constructs stored in a file and invoked as a user command

(pro~ gram). No compilation is needed prior to execution, because the shell recognizes the commands and constructs that make up the shell programming language. A shell script is often called a shell

program

or a command file. See the shell programming article included in HP~UX

Concepts and Tutorials.

Signals are software interrupts sent to processes, informing them of special situations or events. They are frequently used to syn~ chronize the operation of two or more processes. See signal(2) and kill(2).

A condition of the HP~UX operating system in which the system console provides the only communication mechanism between the system and its user. By default, the Series 200 single~user state is state 1, and the Series 500 multi~user state is state 2. Do not confuse the single~user state, in which the software is limiting a multi~user system to a single~user communication, with a single~user system, which can never communicate with more than one fixed terminal. See multi~user

state.

Often called a device file, this is a file associated with an I/O device. Special files are read and written just like ordinary files, but requests to read or write result in activation of the associated device. Most standard special files reside in /dev; however,

~ July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY

(9)

special processes standard error standard input standard output stream sticky bit sub-directory subordinate directory super block

GLOSSARY

(9) network special files reside in

Inet,

and fifo special files can exist in any directory.

Processes with certain (small) process ID's are special. On a typical system, the !D's of 0,

and 2 are assigned as follows:

Process 0 is the scheduler. Process 1 is the initialization process

init,

and is the ancestor of every other process in the system. It is used to control the process structure. On paging systems with virtual memory process 2 is the paging daemon.

On the Series 500, there is no process 0 and the scheduler does not exist as an identifiable entity. The paging demon also does not exist as an identifiable entity.

The destination of error and special messages from a program.

The standard error file is often called

stderr,

and is automatically opened for writing on file descriptor 2 for every command invoked. By default, the user's terminal is the destination of all data written to stderr, but it can be redirected elsewhere.

The source of input data for a program. The standard input file is often called

stdin,

and is automatically opened for reading on file descriptor 0 for every command invoked. By default, the user's terminal is the source of all data read from stdin, but it can be redirected from another source.

The destination of output data from a program. The standard output file is often called

stdout,

and is automatically opened for writing on file descriptor 1 for every command invoked. By default, the user's terminal is the destination of all data written to stdout, but it can be redirected elsewhere.

A term most often used in conjunction with the standard I/O library routines documented in section 3 of this manual. A stream is simply a file pointer (declared as FILE *stream) returned by the

/open(3S)

library routines.

It mayor may not have buffering associated with it (by default, buffering is assigned, but this may be modified with

sctbuJ(3S)).

A single bit in the mode of every file in the file system.

set, then the data structure and heap storage for the text portion of the file is retained even if no process is currently attaching

(using) to it. The objective is to reduce startup time of future processes that may use the same text file. Only the super-user can set the sticky bit. The sticky bit is read each time the file is executed (via

exec(2)).

A directory that is one (or perhaps more) levels lower in the file system hierarchy than a given directory. Sometimes called a

subordinate directory.

See

sub-directory.

A block on each file system's mass storage medium which describes the file system. The contents of the super-block vary between implementations. Refer to the

System Administrator

Manual

supplied with your system, and the appropriate

/s(5)

entry for details.

Hewlett-Packard

- 20-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

super-user superior directory system call system console terminal affiliation terminal group

Hewlett-Packard

GLOSSARY (9)

The HP-UX system administrator. This user has access to all files, and can perform privileged operations. He has a real and effective user ID of 0, and, by convention, the user name of

root.

See

parent directory.

An HP-UX operating system kernel function available to the user through a high-level language (such as FORTRAN, Pascal, or C). Also called an "intrinsic" or a "system intrinsic". The available system calls are documented in section 2 of the HP-UX

Reference manual.

A keyboard and display (or terminal) given a unique status by

HP-UX and associated with the special file

/dev/console.

All boot ROM or system loader error messages, HP-UX system error messages, and certain system status messages are sent to the system console. Under certain conditions (such as the single-user state), the system console provides the only mechanism for communicating with HP-UX. See

HP-UX Concepts and Tutorzals

and the

System Administrator Manual

provided with your system for details on configuration and use of the system console.

The means by which a process group leader establishes an association between itself and a particular terminal. A terminal becomes affiliated with a process group leader (and subsequently all processes created by the process group leader - see

terminal group)

whenever the process group leader executes (either directly or indirectly) an

open(2)

creat(2)

system call for that a terminal. Then, if the process which is executing

open(2)

creat(2)

is a process group leader, and if that process group leader is not yet affiliated with a terminal, and if the terminal being opened is not yet affiliated with a process group, the affiliation is established.

An affiliated terminal keeps track of its process group affiliation by storing the process group's process group ID in an internal structure.

Two benefits are realized by terminal affiliation. First, all signals sent from the terminal are sent to all processes in the terminal group. Second, all processes in the terminal group can perform

I/O from/to the generic terminal driver

/dev/tty,

which automatically selects the affiliated terminal.

Terminal affiliation is broken with a terminal group when the process group leader terminates, after which the hangup signal is sent to all processes remaining in the process group. Also, if a process (which is not a process group leader) in the terminal group becomes a process group leader via the

setpgrp(2)

system call, its terminal affiliation is broken.

See

process group, process group leader, terminal group,

and

setpgrp(2).

A terminal group is a process group whose process group leader has established affiliation with a particular terminal. Once a process group leader has established affiliation with a terminal, all processes in that process group created after the affiliation

- 21 July 9,1985

GLOSSARY (9)

tty group ID unit number volume number working directory zombie process

GLOSSARY (9) are members of that terminal group. Processes existing before and during the time when affiliation is established do not inherit the affiliation, and are thus not part of the terminal group. A terminal group is sometimes called a tty group.

This grouping is used to terminate a group of related process upon termination of one of the processes in the group; see exit (2) and signal(2).

See process group, process group leader, terminal affiliation, and

setpgrp(2).

See terminal group.

Part of an address used for devices. A number whose meaning is software- and device-dependent, but which is often used to specify a particular disc drive in a device with a multi-drive controller. See the System Administrator Manual supplied with your system for details.

Part of an address used for devices. A number whose meaning is software- and device-dependent, but which is often used to specify a particular volume on a multi-volume disc drive. See the System Administrator Manual supplied with your system for details.

Each process has associated with it the concept of a current working directory. For a shell, this appears as the directory in which you currently reside. This is the directory in which relative path name (Le. when a given path name does not begin with

"/") searches begin. It is sometimes referred to as the current

directory,

or the current working directory.

The state of a process where the only system resource allocated to it is a slot in the process table data structure. This state is arrived at when the process is being terminated. It is a harmless occurrence which rectifies itself the next time that the parent process waits. The ps(l) command lists zombie processes as

"<defunct>".

Hewlett-Packard - 22-

July 9, 1985

, /

PERMUTED INDEX

[ ......................................................................................................................................................... test(1) a64l ............... .............. ............................................... .............. ...... ............ ......... ................... ........ a641(3C) abort ............ ............... ................... ... .......... ...... ........... ......... .......... ................... .......................... abort(3C) abs .................................................................................................................................................. abs(3C) absolute value, floating point ............... ............ .................................................. ........................... floor(3M) absolute value, integer ..................................................................................................................... abs(3C) access ............................................................................................................................................. access(2) access long integer data in machine-independent manner ............................................................. sputl(3X) access modes, change memory segment ................................................................................... memchmd(2) access terminfo database .................................................................................................................. tput(1) access utmp file entry ..... ................. .......................................... ......... ...... ......... .............. ............. getut(3C) accessing discs, description of blocked/unblocked disc interface ........................................................ disc( 4) accounting commands, miscellaneous ............................................................................................ acct(1M) accounting commands, overview .................................................................................................... acct(1M) accounting commands, process ................................................................................................... acctcom(1) accounting: connect-time .......................................................................................................... acctcon(1M) accounting, convert binary wtmp records to ASCII ................................................................... fwtmp(1M) accounting, correct time/date stamps on wtmp records ............................................................. fwtmp(1M) accounting: daily ...................................................................................................................... runacct(1M) accounting file format ......................... ............................ .... ........................... ......... ................... ....... acct( 5) accounting files: merge or add total............ ...... ........ ........................................ .................... acctmerg( 1M) accounting: generate disc usage data by user ID ...................................................................... diskusg(1M) accounting: process accounting ................................................................................................. acctprc(1M) accounting, record login names and times ....................................................................................... utmp(5) accounting records command summary ................................................................................... acctcms(1M) accounting: shell procedures ........................................ .......... ............................ ......................... acctsh( 1M) acctcms .................................................................................................................................... acctcms (1M) acctcom ...................................................................................................................................... acctcom(1) acctcon ..................................................................................................................................... acctcon(1M) acctdisk ......................................................................................................................................... acct(1M) acctdusg ........................................................................................................................................ acct (1M) acctmerg ............................................................................................................................ ,... acctmerg(1M) accton ............................................................................................................................................ acct(1M) acctprc ...................................................................................................................................... acctprc(1M) acctsh ......................................................................................................................................... acctsh(1M) acctwtmp ....................................................................................................................................... acct(1M) acos ................................................................................................................................................ trig(3M) activity, terminate all current system activity ...................................................................... shutdown(1M) adb .................................................................................................................................................... adb(1) add a swap device for interleaved paging/signalling .................................................................... swapon(2) add backing store devices ................................................................................................................. vson(2) add or change environment value .............................................................................................. putenv(3C) add or merge total accounting files ...................................... ................ .................................. acctmerg(1M) address space, allocate and free .......... ........ ........ .......... .......................................... .............. ...... memallc(2) address space, lock/unlock for process ........ ........ ...... ............................................................ ...... memlck(2) addresses, get for program .............................................................................................................. end(3C) adjust ............................................................................................................................................ adjust(1) admin ............................................................................................................................................ admin(1) advance ................ ...................................... .......... ........ ......... .......... ... ................ ... ...... .................. regexp(7) advise OS about segment reference patterns .......................................................................... memadvise(2) alarm .............................................................................................................................................. alarm(2) alarm clock, set ..... ............. ......... ................. .......... ............................................... ......... ................ alarm(2) allocate a block of memory................................ ................................................ .................... ..... malloc(3C) allocate and free address space ........ .......... ...................................... .................. ......................... memallc(2) allocate backing store space to backing store device ....................................................................... vsadv(2) allocate data segment space for process ............................................................................................. brk(2)

- 1 -

Permuted Index

a.out file format, description of ....................................................................................................... a.out(5) append to an existing operating system ........................................................................................ oscp(lM) appointments, reminder service for .............. ......... .......... ......... .......... ........ ................... ............. calendar( 1) ar ......................................................................................................................................................... ar(l) arc cosine function ... .......................... ............. ......... ................... .......... ................ ..................... .... trig( 3M) arc sine function ............................................................................................................................. trig(3M) arc tangent function ............................ ......... ....................................... .................................... ....... trig(3M) archive, conversion to new format . ......... ................................................ ................... ................... .... arcv(1) archive file format, description of ......................................................................................................... ar(5) archive file format, description of cpio archive file format ................................................................ cpio(5) archive files on tape . ....................................... ......... ............................. ................. ................... .......... tar(

1) archive library, find ordering relation for ....................................................................................... lorder(l) archive, table of contents format description ................................................................................. ranlib(5) archives and libraries, create and maintain ........... .................................................. ...... ....................... ar(1) archives, copy out to media .............................................................................................................. cpio(l) archives, extract archive files from media ......................................................................................... cpio(l) arcv .................................................................................................................................................. arcv(l) argument list handling facility, variable ...................................................................................... varargs(7) argv, get next option letter from ................................................................................................ getopt(3C) array, allocate memory space for ................................................................................................ malloc(3C) array, print formatted data into ................................................................................................... printf(3S) array, read and format data from .................................................................................................. scanf(3S) as ......................................................................................................................................................... as(l) asa ..................................................................................................................................................... asa(l)

ASA carriage control characters, interpret ............ ............. ........ ............ ........ .................. .......... ........ asa(1) ascii ...... .................... ..... ........... ....... ............ ........... ..................... ........ .................................... ......... ascii(7)

ASCII, convert base 64 ASCII to long integer ................................................................................ a641(3C)

ASCII, convert binary wtmp records to ..................................................................................... fwtmp(lM)

ASCII, convert floating point value to ........................................................................................... ecvt(3C)

ASCII, convert non-ASCII to ASCII ............................................................................................. conv(3C)

ASCII, convert to numbers ............................................................................................................ atof(3C) asctime ......................................................................................................................................... ctime(3C) asin ................................................................................................................................................ trig(3M) assembler for MC68000 ........................................................................................................................ as(l) assembler/linker executable output file, description of .................................................................... a.out(5) assembly language, translate ......................................................................................................... atrans(l) assert ..................................... .................. ....................................... ........ .................. ................... assert (3X) assign buffering to an open file .................................................................................................... setbuf(3S) assistance, get for SCCS ................................................................................................................... help(l) assure sufficient signal stack space .............................................................................................. sigspace(2) asynchronous terminal emulation ................................................................................................... aterm(l) at ......................................................................................................................................................... at(l) atan ................................. ............................................................................................................... trig( 3M) atan2 ....... ........... ... ................ .......... ......... .......... ............................. ....... .................... ....... .......... ... trig(3M) aterm ........................................... ............................ .................... .................................. ................ aterm

(1) atoa ......... .......... ......... .......... ................... .......................... .............. ...... ......... ................... ......... .... atof(3C) atof ................................................................................................................................................. atof(3C) atoi ................................................................................................................................................. atof(3C) atol ................................................................................................................................................. atof(3C) atrans ............................................................................................................................................ atrans(l) attributes, change program's internal.... .......... ......... .......... ..... .... ................... ......................... ....... chatr(1) automatically release blocked signals and wait for interrupt ...................................................... sigpause(2) awk ................................................................................................................................................... awk(l) backing store devices, add/remove device from those available ........................................................ vson(2) backing store devices, allocate backing store space to .................................................................... vsadv(2)

- 2 -

Permuted Index

backing store usage, advise system about ....................................................................................... vsadv(2) backspaces and reverse line-feeds, interpret for nroff(l) ...................................................................... col(l) backup ...................................................................................................................................... backup(lM) backup Command Set 80 cartridge tape ............................................................................................ tcio(l) backup or archive file system .................................................................................................... backup(lM) banner .......................................................................................................................................... banner(l) banners, make using large letters ................................................................................................. banner(l) base-64 ASCII, convert to long integer ........................................................................................... a641(3C) basename ................................................................................................................................. basename(l) baud rate, settings for terminal .......................................................................................................... tty(4) bcheckrc .......................................................................................................................................... brc(lM) bdiff .......... ......... ......... ..... .............. ........ ........... .......... ........ ..... ..... ......... ..... .... .......... ........... ............ bdiff(

Bell file system consistency check and interactive repair ....... .... ..... ... ....... .... ......... ...... ..... ... .......... biffsck( l)

Bell file system, construct ............................................................................................................ bifmkfs(l)

Bell file system debugger .............................................................................................................. biffsdb(l)

Bell Interchange Format file utilities ................................................................................................... bif(5)

Berkeley compatibility for magnetic tape, description of .................................................................... mt(4) bessel functions ........................................................................................................................... bessel(3M) bfs ...................................................................................................................................................... bfs(l)

BIF directory, list ........ ........ ..... ... .......... ....... .... ....... ........... ........ ........... ......... .......... .... ...... ....... ....... bifls(

BIF directory, make ................................................................................................................... bifmkdir(l)

BIF file, change mode of ........................................................................................................... bifchmod(l)

BIF file copy .................................................................................................................................... bifcp(l)

BIF files or directories, remove .................. ..................................................................................... bifrm(l) bifchmod ................................................................................................................................... bifchmod(l) bifchown .................................................................................................................................... bifchown(l) bifcp ................................................................................................................................................ bifcp(l) bifdf ........ .... ...... ......... .......... ........... ........ ........ ............ ..... ... ......... ......... .......... ........... ... ...... ........ ..... bifdf(

1) biffind .............................................................................................................................. .............. biffind (l) biffis ................................................................................................................................................. biffis(l) biffsck ..... .................. .......... ...... ... ......... ....... ........... ........... ... ... ............ .......... ........ ......... .... ....... .... biffsck(

1) biffsdb ........................................................................................................................................... biffsdb(1) bifmkdir ..................................................................................................................................... bifmkdir(l) bifmkfs ......................................................................................................................................... bifmkfs(l) bifrm ............................................................................................................................................... bifrm(l) big file scanner .... .......... ........ ......... ............ ........ .......... ....... ... .......... ....... ........... ........ ........ ......... ........ bfs(

1) binary search on a sorted table ................................................................................................. bsearch(3C) bit bucket, special file equivalent to .................................................................................................. nUll(4) block of memory, allocate ........................................................................................................... malloc(3C) block of memory, change size of ................................................................................................. malloc(3C) block of memory, deallocate ....................................................................................................... malloc(3C) block signals ............................................................................................................................... sigblock(2) block size, find for mounted file system ........................................................................................... ustat(2) block special file, create ............................................................................................ mknod(2), mknod(lM) blocked disc interface, description of ................................................................................................. disc( 4) blocked signals, release and wait for interrupt ........................................................................... sigpause(2) blocks, find number of free blocks for mounted file system ...................................... ....................... ustat(2) blocks, report number of free disc blocks .......................................................................................... df(lM) boot area, allocate bytes for ....................................................................................................... sdfinit(lM) boot area, copy as from one or more SDF boot areas to another ................................................. oscp(lM) boot area, set or get current settings for system parameters in ................................................ uconfig(lM) brc .................................................................................................................................................. brc(lM) break ................................................................................................................................................... sh(l) break value, get maximum for process ........................................................................................... ulimit(2) break value, set or get ....................................................................................................................... brk(2)

- 3 -

Permuted Index

break-point debugging, enable for child process ............................................................................. ptrace(2) brk ..................................................................................................................................................... brk(2) bsearch .......................................... ........................................................................................... bsearch(3C) buffered file I/O package, description of ........................................................................................ stdio(3S) buffering, assign to open file ..................................................................................................... ... setbuf(3S) buffers, flush those associated with an open file .. ............................................... ........................... fclose(3S) byte offset of next I/O operation on file, set .................................................................................. fseek(3S) byte swapping ............................................................................................................................... swab(3C)

C compiler ........................................................................................................................................... cc(l)

C compiler, preprocessor for .............................................................................................................. cpp(l)

C flow graph, generate .................................................................................................................... cflow(l)

C preprocessor ................................................................................................................................... cpp(l)

C program checker/verifier ................................................................................................................ lint(l)

C program, error message generator for ............................................................................ ; ......... perror(3C)

C program formatter ........................................................................................................................... cb(l) cache buffers, specify size and number of .................................................................................. uconfig(lM) calendar ........ ......... .................. ........................... ............. ......... ....... ........ ........... ....... ................ calendar( 1) call another UNIX/HP-UX system ...................................................................................................... curl) calloc .......................................................................................................................................... malloc(3C) captoinfo ................................................................................................................................ captoinfo(lM) carriage control characters, interpret ASA ......................................................................................... asa(l) cartridge tape, Command Set 80 utility ............................................................................................ tcio(l) cartridge tape initialization ...................................................................................................... mediainit(l) cartridge tape, perform input/output from/to ................................................................................... tcio(l) cartridge tape, unpack/extract files from Command Set 80 ............................................................. upm(l) cat ...................................................................................................................................................... cat(l) cat, compress, uncompress files .................................................................................................. compact(l) catman ..................................................................................................................................... catman(lM) catread ........................................... ... ........................................ ..... .... ....................................... catread(3C) cb ........................................................................................................................................................ cb(l) cc .........................................................................................................................................................cc(l) ccat ........ .................... .......................... ............................... ....... .................. ................... ........... compact (1) cd .............................................................................................................................................. cd(l), sh(l) cdc ..................................................................................................................................................... cdc(l) ceil ............................. ..................................... .......... ......... .......... ............... ................... ............... floor(3M) certify file system consistency ........................................................................................................ fsck(lM) certify SDF volume .................................................................................................................... sdfinit(lM) cflow ................................................................................................................................................ cflow(l) change bars, create file containing. ......... ..................................... .................................................. diffmk( 1) change data segment space allocation ................................................................................................ brk(2) change delta commentary of SCCS delta ........................................................................................... cdc(l) change file mode .......................................................................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2) change file owner or group ........................................................................................................ bifchown(l) change file owner or group ............................................................................................ chown(l), chown(2) change group ID of user ..................................................................................................... newgrp(1), sh(l) change login password ................................................................................................................. passwd(l) change default login shell ....... ......... ................ ........... ............ ....... ...................................... ............. chsh( 1) change memory segment access modes .................................................................................... memchmd(2) change mode of a BIF file ..................... ......... .............................................. ............................. bifchmod( 1) change or add value to environment .......................................................................................... putenv(3C) change or read real-time priority .................................................................................................... rtprio(2) change or set real-time priority ...................................................................................................... rtprio(l) change program's internal attributes .............................................................................................. chatr(l) change root directory for a command ...... .............................. ....... .......................... ....... ............ chroot(1M) change root directory for duration of command ............................................................ chroot(l), chroot(2)

- 4 -

Permuted Index

change SCCS file parameters ......................................................................................................... admin(l) change size of previously-allocated block of memory .................................................................. malloc(3C) change system state ........................................................................................................................ init(lM) change to another user . ............... ................... ............................. ............................ .................. .......... su( 1) change to different operating system or version ...................... ...................................... .......... ..... chsys( 1M) change working directory ............................................................................................ cd(l), sh(l), chdir(2) character classification ................................................................................................................. ctype(3C) character conversion, lower-case to upper-case .............................................................................. conv(3C) character conversion, non-ASCII to ASCII .................................................................................... conv(3C) character conversion, upper-case to lower-case .............................................................................. conv(3C) character count ................................................................................................................................... wc(l) character, description of special characters in terminal interface ........................................................ tty( 4) character, push back into input stream ...................................................................................... ungetc(3S) character, read from buffered open file ........................................................................................... getc(3S) character, search for in string ...................... ........................................................ ........................ string( 3C) character sets, NLS ........................................................................................ ascii(7), kana8(7), roman8(7) character size, settings for terminal .................................................................................................... tty( 4) character special file, create ..................................................................................... mknod(2), mknod(lM) character, write on buffered open file or standard output .............................................................. putc(3S) characters, count number contained in file .......................................................................................... wC(l) characters, process characters from regular expression ........................................................ .......... regexp(7) characters, translate into other characters ........................................................................................... tr(l) chatr ............................................................................................................................................... chatr(l) chdir ................... ........................ ......................................... ....... ........... .................. ........... ............ chdir(2) check C program ............................................................................................................................... lint(l) check file for accessibility ............................................................................................................... access(2) check file system consistency ......................................................................................................... fsck(lM) check integrity of as in SDF boot area(s) .................................................................................... osck(lM) check internal revision numbers of HP-UX files ........................................................................... revck(lM) check password and group files .................................................................................................... pwck(lM) checklist, list of file systems to be checked by fsck(lM) ............................................................. checklist(5) chgrp ............................................................................................................................................. chown(l) child process, enable break-point debugging of .............................................................................. ptrace(2) child process, time execution of ...................................................................................................... times(2) child process, wait for termination of ............................ ....................................................................... sh( 1) chmod .......................................................................................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2) chown ........................................................................................................................... chown(l), chown(2) chroot ........................................................................................................................... chroot(l), chroot(2) chroot ........................................................................................................................................ chroot(lM) chsh ................................................................................................................................................. chsh(l) chsys ............................................................................................................................................ chsys( 1M) classify characters for NLS ........................................... ......... .... ........................................ ..... nl_ctype(3C) clean up uucp spool directory .................................................... .............................................. uuclean( 1M) clear ................................................................................................................................................. clear(l) clear error indicator on open file ............ ............................................................................ ........... ferror(3S) clear i-node by zeroing it out .......................................................................................................... clri(lM) clear terminal screen ........................................................................................................................ clear(l) clear x.25 switched virtual circuit ............................................................................................... clrsvc(lM) clearerr ......................................................................................................................................... ferror(3S) clock ............................................................................................................................................. clock(3C) clock, set/print time and date .......................................................................................................... date(l) close .............................. ................................................................................................................... close( 2) close a file descriptor ....................................................................................................................... close(2) close group file ......................................................................................................................... getgrent(3C) close or flush a stream .................................................................................................................. fclose(3S)

- 5 -

Permuted Index

close password file .................................................................................................................. getpwent(3C) close pipe between process and command .................................................................................... popen(3S) close-an-exec flag, get/set ................................................................................................................. fcntl(2) clri .................................................................................................................................................. clri(lM) clrsvc .......................................................................................................................................... clrsvc(lM) cmp .................................................................................................................................................. cmp(l) code portability between HP-UX implementations, typedefs for .................................................... model(5) code segments, specify maximum number of ............................................................................. uconfig(lM) col ....................................................................................................................................................... col(l) collating sequence tables, NLS character set ................................................. coLseq_8(5), col_scq_16(5) collation, non-ASCII string, used by NLS ............................................................................... nl-Btring(3C) colon (:) command ............................................................................................................................... sh(l) combine object files into program ........................................................................................................ ld(l) comm ............................................................................................................................................. comm(l) command, create/close pipe between process and command ........................................................ popen(3S) command, execute from program ............................................................... '" ....... ....... ................ system(3S) command, execute on another system ............ .............................. ........ .................... ........ .......... ....... uux( 1) command, execute uucp commands on local system ................................................................... uuxqt(1M) command, execute with different root directory ........................................................... chroot(l), chroot(2) command interpreter, standard ........................................................................................................... sh(l) command line options, parse ... ...................................................................................................... getopt (1) command, report error information for . .... ..... ......... ......... ....... ......... .......... .............. ...... ....... ... ....... .... err( 1) command, run at lower or higher priority ............................................................................ nice(l), nice(2) command, run immune to hangups, logouts, and quits ... ....... .................... ............. .... ... ..... .......... nohup(1)

Command Set 80 Cartridge Tape Utility .......................................................................................... tcio(1) command, set environment for .......................................................................................................... env(l) command substitution ......................................................................................................................... sh(l) command summary: per-process accounting records ................................................................ acctcms(lM) command, time the execution of ...................................................................................................... time(l) commands, execute at specified date(s) and time(s) ............................................................ at(l), cron(lM) commands, install in file system ................................................................................................. install(lM) commands, process accounting ................................................................................................... acctcom(l) common lines, find after comparing two files ................................................................................. comm(l) common logarithm ........................................................................................................................ : exp(3M) communication, establish interactive communication with another UNIX/HP-UX system ................. cU(l) compact ..................................................................................................................................... compact(l) compare two directories .............................................................. ................................................. dircmp (1) compare two files .................................................................................................... bdiff(I), cmp(I), diff(1) compare two strings ....................................... ............................................. .......... ......... ........ ..... string( 3C) compare two versions of SCCS file ..... ............ ......... .......... ......... ................... ......................... ...... sccsdiff(1) compile ................. ............................... ...... ... .................... .................. ......... ............. .................... regexp(7) compiled term file format ................................................................................................................. term(5) compiler, C .......................................................................................................................................... cc(l) compiler development ....................................................................................................................... yacc(l) compiler, FORTRAN 77 ........................................................................................................... fc(1), f77(I) compiler, Pascal ................................................................................................................................... pc(l) compiler: terminfo ............................................................. ........................... .................................... tic (1M) compiler-compiler ......................................................... .......... ................. .............................. ........... yacc (1) complementary error function and error function ........................................................................... erf(3M) compress and uncompress files, and cat them ............................................................................ compact(l) compress and uncompress files, and cat them ............................................................................ compact(1) concatenate, copy, and/or print files .................................................................................................. cat(l) concatenate lines in one or more files ................. ................. ....... ... .................. ......... ....................... paste( 1) concatenate two strings ............................................................................................................... string(3C) conditional expressions, evaluate and test ............................................................................... sh(l), test(1)

- 6 -

Permuted Index

config ................. ....... ........ .................... ................. ........................................ ............................. config( 1M) configure an HP-UX system ......................................................................................................... config(1M) configure LP spooler system ......................................................................................................... mklp(1M) connect to remote terminal ............................................................................................................. dial(3C) connect-time accounting ........................................................................................................... acctcon(1M) constants and functions, math ........... .................... ................... ................. ... ....... ........................... math(7) construct a Bell file system .......................................................................................................... bifmkfs(1) construct file system on special file ........ .......... ........... ........................ ............ ....................... ....... mkfs(1M) construct new file system ............................................................................................................ newfs(1M) contents of directory, list ...................................................................................................................... Is(1) context-free grammar, create ............................................................................................................ yacc(1) continue ............................................................................................................................................... sh(1) control characters, interpret ASA carriage ......................................................................................... asa(1) control device ...................................................................................................................... ioctl(2), stty(2) control-flow constructs, shell programming language ........................................................................... sh(1) conventional terminal names ............. ........ ........... .................. ................... ... ......................... .......... term(7) convert archives to new format ........... ........... ........ ................... ........ .......... ........... .......... ........... ..... arcv( 1) convert between 3-byte integers and long integers ......................................................................... 13tol(3C) convert between long and base-64 ASCII ....................................................................................... a641(3C) convert binary wtmp records into ASCII ................................................................................... fwtmp(1M) convert date and time to ASCII ................................................................................................... ctime(3C) convert floating point value to ASCII string .................................................................................. ecvt(3C) convert, reblock, translate, and copy a (tape) file ............................................................................... dd(1) convert string to double-precision integer ................................................................................... strtod(3C) convert string to integer ............................................................................................................... strtol(3C) convert tape file .................................................................................................................................. dd(1) convert termcap description to terminfo description .................. ........... ............................... captoinfo( 1M) copy an open file descriptor ................................................................................................. dup(2), fcntl(2) copy, concatenate, and/or print files .................................................................................................. cat(1) copy files between two systems .......................................................................................... uucp(1), uuto(1) copy files out to media ...................................................................................................................... cpio(1) copy files while simultaneously editing them ...................................................................................... sed(1) copy line from standard input to standard output ............................................................................ line(1) copy, link, or move files ........ ......... ..................... ....... ............ .......... .............. ........................ ........ ...... cp(1) copy operating system from one or more SDF boot areas to another ............................................ oscp(1M) copy string ................................................................................................................................... string(3C) copy tape file ................................. ................... ........................................................... ........................ dd (1 ) copy to or from ElF files ......... .................. ................ ............. ........ ....... ... ....... ........ ... ........... ...... .... bifcp( 1) copy to or from LIF files .................................................................................................................. lifcp(1) core image, examine and/or modify for child process .................................................................... ptrace(2) core image file, description of ............................................................................................................ core(5) cos ......................................... ............................ .............................................. ............................... trig( 3M) cosh ................ ......... ........ ......... ....... ... ....... ............. .................. ........................ ... ........ ... ............... sinh(3M) cosine function ............................................................................................................................... trig(3M) cosine, hyperbolic .......................................................................................................................... sinh(3M) cp ........................................................................................................................................................ cp(1) cpio ................................................................................................................................................... cpio(1) cpio archive format, description of .................................................................................................... cpio(5) cpio archives, unpack/extract from 5.25" flexible discs .................................................................... upm(1) cpio archives, unpack/extract from Command Set 80 cartridge tape ............................................... upm(1) cpp .................................................................................................................................................... cpp(1) cpset ............................................................................................................................................ cpset(1M)

CPU type .................................................................................................................................... machid(1) creat ................................................................................................................................................ creat(2) create a directory ........................................................................................................................... mkdir(1)

- 7 -

Permuted Index

create a directory file ..................................................................................................................... mkdir(2) create a name for a temporary file ........................................................................................... tmpnam(3S) create a new process ......................................................................................................................... fork(2) create a special file entry .............................................................................................................. mknod(5) create an interprocess channel ....................................................................................... :.................. pipe(2) create and open temporary file ................................................................................................... tmpfile(3S) create cat files for the manual .. ................... ........... ......... .................. ........ ........... ........ ............ catman( 1M) create delta (change) for SCCS file .................................................................................................. delta(1) create device files ....................................................................................................................... mkdev(lM) create directory, block/character special, fifo, or ordinary file .................................. mknod(2), mknod(lM) create encryption key ............................................................................................................. makekey(lM) create libraries, archives ........................... ... ........ ... ...... ... ....... ............ ..... ..................... ......... ......... ...... ar( 1) create link to file ............................................................................................................... link(1M),link(2) create message catalog file for modification ....................... .......... ....... ..................... ....... ............. findmsg(1) create mnttab table ................................................................................................................... setmnt(lM) create new file, overwrite existing file .............................................................................................. creat(2) create new operating system from ordinary files ........................................................................... oscp(lM) create or change parameters of SCCS files ................... ........................... ...................................... admin(1) create unique file name ............................................................................................................ mktemp(3C) creation mask, get/set for file ............................................................................. sh(l), umask(l), umask(2) cron ............................................................................................................................................... cron(lM) crontab ........................................................................................................................................ crontab(l)

CRT, facilitate viewing of continuous text on ...................................................... , .......................... more(1)

CRT, information about graphics devices with .......................................................................... graphics(4)

CRT screen handling and optimization routines ......................................................................... curses(3X) crypt ..... ... ...... ........................... .................... ............ .................................... ......... .......... ............ crypt (3C)

C-source error messages into a file ................................................................................................. mkstr(l) ct ......................................................................................................................................................... ct(4) ctermid .. ... ........................... ..................................... ........ .......... ........ .................... ......... .......... ctermid( 3S) ctime ............................................................................................................................................ ctime(3C) cu ........................................................................................................................................................ cU(l) current directory, print name of ....................................................................................................... pWd(l) current events, print ........................................................................................................................ news(l) current user id ............................................................................................................................ whoami(l) current user in utmp file, find .................................................................................................... ttyslot(3C) current working directory, change .............................................................................. cd(l), sh(l), chdir(2) current working directory pathname ......................................................................................... getcwd(3C) current working directory, print name of .......................................................................................... pWd(l) curses .......................................................................................................................................... curses(3X) cursor handling and optimization routines .................................................................................. curses(3X) cuserid ........................................................................................................................................ cuserid(3S) cut ..................................................................................................................................................... cut(l) cut out selected fields of each line of a file ......................................................................................... cut(l) daily accounting ....................................................................................................................... runacct(lM) data access, long integer, machine independent ............................................................................ sputl(3X) data base, relational data base operator ............................................................................................ join(l)

Data Encryption Standard .......................... ................................................................................. crypt(3C) data segment, change space allocation for .......................................................................................... brk(2) data segments, specify maximum number of ............................................................................. uconfig(lM) data types, include file defining data types for system code ................ ..... ....................................... types(7) database access ............................................................................................................................... query(l) datacomm, accept/reject files received through uucp or unto .......................................................... uuto(1) datacomm, copy files between two systems ........................................................................ uucp(l), uuto(l) datacomm, execute command on another system .............................................................................. uux(l) datacomm, list of known system names ........................................................................................... uucp(l)

- 8 -

Permuted Index

datacomm, log of uucp and uux transactions .................................................................................. uucp(1) date .......................................... ........................................................ ....... ......................................... date( 1) date and time, convert to ASCII string ........................................................................................ ctime(3C) date and time, get more precisely ................................................................................................... ftime(2) date, get/set ........................................................................................................................ gettimeofday(2) date, set .......................................................................................................................................... stime(2) date, set and/or print ....................................................................................................................... date(1) dates, reminder service for important ........................................................................................ calendar(1) daylight ........................................................................................................................................ ctime(3C) daylight saving time, time corrected for ....................................................................................... ctime(3C) dd ....................................................................................................................................................... dd(1) deallocate a block of memory ..................................................................................................... malloc(3C) debug damaged file system ............................................................................................................ fsdb(1M) debugger ............................................................................................................................................ adb(1) debugging, enable break-point debugging for child process ............................................................ ptrace(2) decompiler: terminfo .................................................................................................................... untic(iM) delays, settings and controls for terminal output ............................................................................... tty( 4) delta ................................................................................................................................................ delta(1) delta, add to SCCS file .................................................................................................................... delta(1) delta, change commentary of SCCS ................................................................................................... cdc(1) delta, inform user of any deltas being created for specific SCCS file ................................................. sact(1) delta, remove from SCCS file ......................................................................................................... rmdel(1) demand loadable, set for program ......................... ................... ..................... .................................. chatr( 1) deroff ....... ............................ ............................ ....... ........................ ...... ......................... ................. deroff( 1)

DES password encryption ............................................................................................................ crypt(3C) description of environment .................................. .......... ............................. ................................. environ(7) description of /etc/passwd, pwd.h files ........................................................................................ passwd(5) description of group file .................................................................................................................. group(5) description of magic.h and magic numbers ..................................................................................... magic(5) description of OS management commands ............ .................... ................................... .............. osmgr(1M) descriptor, close file ......................................................................................................................... close(2) descriptor, copy/duplicate file ............................................................................................. dup(2), fcntl(2) descriptor, get value of file ........................................................................................................... ferror(3S) device, description of hpib interface to ............................................................................................. hpib( 4) device driver, select virtual device driver .................... .......... ................................................. ... uconfig( 1M) device drivers, list ........................................................................................................................... Isdev(1) device file, create block/character ............................................................................ mknod(2), mknod(1M) device files, create .... ................ .......... ....... .... ...... ........... ........ .... ...... ............ ...... .... .................... mkdev( 1M) device files, perform functions on ......................................................................................... ioctl(2), stty(2) device names, pack/unpack for mknod(2) .................................................................................... mknod(5) device I/O library .................................................................................... gpio_*(3I), hpib_*(3I), io_*(3I) devices, backing store ....................................................................................................................... vson(2) devices, information about those with graphics crt's .................................................................. graphics ( 4) devnm ....................................................................................................................................... devnm(1M) df ...................................................................................................................................................... df(1M) diagnostics, add to program ........................................................................................................ assert(3X) dial ................................................................................................................................................. dial(3C) dial out to a remote terminal .......................................................................................................... dial(3C) dialup security control ................................................................................................................. dialups(5) diff ..................................................................................................................................................... diff(1) differences between files, mark ...................................................................................................... diffmk(1) differential file comparison, 3-way .................................................................................................... diff3(1) diffh ................................................................................................................................................... diff(1) diffmk ............................................................................................................................................ diffmk(1) digitizer, description of hpib interface to .......................................................................................... hpib( 4)

- 9 -

Permuted Index

dircmp .......................................................................................................................................... dircmp(l) directory, change root for duration of command ........................................................... chroot(l), chroot(2) directory, change working ........................................................................................... cd(l), sh(1), chdir(2) directory clean-up for uucp spool directory .............................................................................. uuclean(lM) directory, compare two ................................................................................................................ dircmp(l) directory, create ............................................................................................................ mkdir(l), mknod(2) directory, description of internal SDF format of ................................................................................. dir(5) directory, extract from path name ........................................................................................... basename(1) directory, list contents of ............... ........ ............................. ......... ......... ................... ...................... ....... Is(1) directory, list contents of LIF ............................................................................................................ lifls(l) directory, move ........................................................................................................................... mvdir(lM) directory, print name of current working .......................................................................................... pWd(l) directory, remove ................................................................................................................................ rm(l) directory, remove ........................................................................................................................... rmdir(2) dirname .................................................................................................................................... basename(l) disc blocks, report number of free ..................................................................................................... df(lM) disc description file ...................................................................................................................... disktab(5) disc drivers, information about blocked/unblocked interface ............................................................. disc( 4) disc initialization ...................................................................................................................... mediainit(l) disc storage, preallocate .............................................................................................................. prealloc(l) disc usage accounting by user ID ..................................... ,. ................ ....................... ..... .......... diskusg(1M) disc usage, summarize ......................................................................................................................... du(l) disc, write current contents of memory to .......................................................................... sync(2), sync(l) diskusg ..................................................................................................................................... diskusg(lM) display buffering, specifY number of pages of ............................................................................ uconfig(lM) documentation, on-line ..................................................................................................................... mantI) documents, print using mm macros ................................................................................................... mm(1) dot (.) command .................................................................................................................................. sh(l) drand48 ................................................................................................................................... drand48(3C) driver, information about blocked/unblocked disc interface .............................................................. disc( 4) drivers, list device ........................................................................................................................... lsdev(l) du ....................................................................................................................................................... dU(l) dump, octal or hexadecimal ................................................................................................................. od(1) dumpmsg ................................................................................................................................. dumpmsg(l) dup ................................................................................................................................................... dup(2) dup2 ................................................................................................................................................ dup2(2) duplicate an open file descriptor .......................................................................................... dup(2), fcntl(2) duplicate open file descriptor ........................................................................................................... dup2(2) e .......................................................................................................................................................... ex(l) echo .................................................................................................................................................. echo(l) echo (print) arguments after shell interpretation ............................................................................. echo(l) ecvt .............................................................................................................................. .................. ecvt (3C) ed ........................................................................................................................................................ ed(l) edata ............................................................................................................................................... end(3C) edit ...................................................................................................................................................... ex(l) editing activity, print for SCCS file .................................................................................................. sact(l) editor, stream text ............................................................................................................................. sed(l) editor, text ................................................................................................................................ ed(l), ex(l) editor, visual text ................................................................................................................................. vi(l) effective current user id ............................................................................................................... whoami(l) effective user/group ID's, get for process ....................................................................................... getuid(2) egrep ................................................................................................................................................ grep(l)

EMS .................................................................................................................................................. ems(2)

EMS, description of ........................................................................................................................... ems(2) emulation of asynchronous terminal ............................................................................................... aterm(l)

- 10 -

Permuted Index

enable swapping and paging ..................................................................................................... swapon(1M) encrypt passwords ........................................................................................................................ crypt(3C) encryption key, generate ........................................................................................................ makekcy(1M) end .................................................................................................................................................. end(3C) endgrent .................................................................................................................................. getgrent(3C) endpwent ................................................................................................................................ gctpwent(3C) env .................................................................................................................................................... env(1) environment, description of parameters and usage ............................................................ sh(l), environ(7) environment, install parameters in ...................................................................................................... sh(1) environment, print current ................................................................................................................ env(1) environment, set for duration of one command ................................................................................. env(1) environment, set up at login time ........... .......... ............................ .... ....... ....... ........................ ....... profile( 5) environment variable, get value of ............................................................................................. getenv(3C)

EOF (end-of-file) character, description of ......................................................................................... tty(4)

EOF, indicate receipt of when reading file .................................................................................... ferror(3S)

EOL (end-of-line) character, description of ........................................................................................ tty(4) eqn, tbl, nroff, troff constructs, remove from text .......................................................................... deroff(l) erase character, description of ............. ... ...... .... ........ .... ................ ................... .......... ................. ........ tty( 4) erf .............................................. ..................................................................................... ................. erf( 3M) erfc .................................................................................................................................................. erf(3M) err ....................................................................................................................................................... err(l) errfile .......................................................................... .......................... ......................................... errfile (5) errinfo ........................................................................................................................................... errinfo(2) errinfo, report value for last command failure.... ............ ...... .......... ....... ..... ....... ....... ... ........... ....... ...... err( 1) errno ............................................................................................................................................... errno(2) errno, report value for last command failure .............. ... ....... ..................... .......................................... err(1)

ERROR ... ........... ... ... .......... ....... ........... ........ ......... .... ..... ... ....... ........... ....... .................. .... ...... ...... regexp(7) error function and complementary error function ............................................................................ erf(3M) error handling, mathematical..... ........ .......... .................. .... ...... ............ ....... ....... .... ................ matherr(3M) error indicator ............................................................................................................................... errinfo(2) error indicator for system calls ........................................................................................................ errno(2) error indicator, reset status of ...................................................................................................... ferror(3S) error indicator while reading file ................................................................................................... ferror(3S) error information on last command failure ......................................................................................... err(1) error logging file for system ...................... ...................................................................................... errfile (5) error message generator from C programs .... ......... ................ .... ...... ..... ........ ...... .... ..... ..... .... ...... perror(3C) etext ............................................................................................................................................... end(3C) eval ...................................................................................................................................................... sh(1) evaluate arguments as an expression ................................................................................................ expr(l) ex ........................................................................................................................................................ ex(1) examine text, facilitate on soft-copy terminals ................................................................................ more(1) exec ........................................................................................................................................ sh(l), exec(2) exeel .............................................................................................................................. .. .. ..... . . ..... ... exec (2) exeele ................................................................................................................................................ exec(2) exeelp ........ ................... .............................................. ...................................................................... exec (2) executable file, extract symbol table (name list) entries from ........................................................ nlist(3C) executable file, get size of .................................................................................................................. size(l) executable linker/assembler output file, description of .................................................................... a.out(5) execute a file in current process ........................................................................................................ exec(2) execute command at lower or higher priority ....................................................................... nice(l), nice(2) execute command immune to hangups, logouts, and quits ............................................................ nohup(l) execute command on another system ............... ......... .......... ......... ............ ....... .......... ..... ..... .............. uux( 1) execute command using different root directory ............................................................................ chroot(l) execute commands at specified date(s) and time(s) ............................................................. at(l), cron(lM) execute commands from file ................................................................................................................. sh(l)

- 11 -

Permuted Index

execute new program in existing process ................................................................................ sh(1), exec(2) execute process with real-time priority ........................................................................................... rtprio(l) execute HALGOL programs ......................................................................................................... opx25(lM) execute uucp commands on local system .................................................................................... uuxqt(lM) execute work requests on remote system ....................................................................... uucico(1M), uux(l) execution profile, create for program ......................................................................... profil(2), monitor(3C) execution, suspend process execution for time interval ................................................... slcep(l), sleep(3C) execv .......................... ....... .......... ................... ........... ......... ......... ................. ................... ................. exec(2) execve ............................................................................................................................................... exec(2) execvp .............................................................................................................................................. exec(2)

_exit ................................................................................................................................................. exit(2) exit .......................................................................................................................................... sh(l), exit(2) exit from enclosing for or while loop .................................................................................................... sh(l) exp ................................................................................................................................................. exp(3M) expand ......................................................................................................................................... expand (1) expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa ....................................................... ; .................................. expand(l) exponent, raise 2 to a power ..... .................... ................................... .... .......... ..... .... ......... .......... ... frexp(3C) exponential function ............. .......... ............................. ......... ......... ......... .......... ........ ............... .... ... exp(3M) export .................................................................................................................................................. sh(l) expr .................................................................................................................................................. expr(l) expreserve ............................................................................................................................................ ex(l) expression, evaluate arguments as .................................................................................................... expr(l) exrecover .................................. .................... ....................................................................................... ex( 1)

Extended Memory System description .............................................................................................. ems(2) external symbols, examine execution profile for ................................................................................ prof(l) extract entries from symbol table (name list) of executable file ..................................................... nlist(3C) extract error messages from C source into a file ............................................................................. mkstr(l) extract files from 5.25" flexible discs ................................................................................................ upm(l) extract files from Command Set 80 cartridge tape archives ............................................................. upm(1) extract files from media .................................................................................................................... cpio(l) extract portions of path names .. .................... ........................... .......... ................ ............ ......... basename(1) f77 ........................................................................................................................................................ fc(l) f77 .................................................................................................................................................. see fc(l) fabs ............................................................................................................................................... floor(3M) false .................................................................................................................................................. true (1) fc .......................................................................................................................................................... fc(l) fclose ............................................................................................................................................. fclose(3S) fcntl ................................................................................................................................................. fcntl(2) fcntl(2), description of requests and arguments for .......................................................................... fcntl(7) fcntl.h, description of .. .................. .............. .................. ....... .......... ....... ........................ ....... ............ fcntl(7) fcvt ................................................................................................................................................ ecvt(3C) fdopen ........................................................................................................................................... fopen(3S) feof ............................................................................................................................................... ferror(3S) ferror ... .................. ................ .... ...... ............................... ...... .... ............... ... ...... .... ..... ............ ....... ferror(3S) fflush ............................................................................................................................................. fclose(3S) fgetc ........................ ........................... .......... .................. .......... .................. ..................................... getc (3S) fgets . ............ ...... ............................ .................... ...... ........... ........................... ......... ........................ gets(3S) fgrep ................................................................................................................................................. grep(l) fifo special file, create ............................................................................................... mknod(2), mknod(lM) file, assign another file name to already open file .......................................................................... fopen(3S) file, assign buffering to open .......................................................... ;............................................. setbuf(3S) file attributes file, description of ........................................................................................................... f8(5) file, buffered read from .................................................................................................................. fread(3S) file, buffered write to ..................................................................................................................... fread(3S) file, change group ID of ................................................................................................ chown(l), chown(2)

- 12 -

Permuted Index

file, change mode of ..................................................................................................... chmod(I), chmod(2) file, change owner ......................................................................................................... chown(I), chown(2) file, change pemtission bits .......................................................................................... chmod(1), chmod(2) file, check revision number for ..................................................................................................... revck(IM) file, close a buffered open file ........................................................................................................ fclose(3S) file comparison, three-way differential .............................................................................................. diff3(1) file control ........................................................................................................................................ fcntl(2) file control constants, file containing definitions of ..... .................. .................................................... fcntl(7) file, copy LIF in or out ..................................................................................................................... lifcp(l) file, copy to tape while performing certain conversions ....................................................................... dd(l) file, count words, lines, and characters contained therein ................................................................... wc(l) file, create and open temporary .................................................................................................. tmpfile(3S) file, create device/special ........................................................................................................... mkdev(IM) file, create or overwrite ordinary ..................................................................................................... creat(2) file, create or remove link to/from .................................................................... link(IM), link(2), unlink(2) file, create ordinary....... .......... .................. ......... .......... ......... ... .................................................... mknod(2) file creation mask, set ......................................................................................... sh(I), umask(I), umask(2) file, description of buffered

I/O ..................................................................................................... stdio(3S) file, description of password file, /etc/passwd .............................................................................. passwd(5) file, description of SCCS file format .............................................................................................. sccsfile(5) file descriptor, assign stream to .................................................................................................... fopen(3S) file descriptor, close ......................................................................................................................... close(2) file descriptor, copy /duplicate ............................................................................................. dup(2), fcntl(2) file descriptor, create file pointer using ......................................................................................... fopen(3S) file descriptor, determine if associated with terminal ............................................................... ttyname(3C) file'descriptor, get value of ........................................................................................................... ferror(3S) file, determine accessibility of ........................................................................................................ access(2) file, error logging file for system ................ ............................ ................. ......... ........ ............. .......... errfile( 5) file, find and/or remove duplicate lines in ........................................................................................ uniq(l) file, find spelling errors in ................................................................................................................. spell(l) file format, per-process accounting .................................................................................................... acct(5) file, generate name for temporary........... ... ....... ........... ........ ... ................. ....... .... ..................... tmpnam(3S) file, get information about ................................................................................................................. stat(2) file, get/set status flags for ............................................................................................................... fcntl(2) file, indicate the occurrence of an error while reading ................................................................... ferror(3S) file, indicate when

EOF is encountered when reading from .......................................................... ferror(3S) file, locate in file system ............. ........................ ......... ... ............................. ........ ................. ............. find( 1) file, move to new position in ............................................................................................................ Iseek(2) file name, create file name vs. i-node list ...... ...................... .......... .......................................... ... ncheck(1M) file name, create unique ........................................................................................................... mktemp(3C) file name, extract from path name ........................................................................................... basename(l) file name, find special file for mounted file system on which file lies .......................................... devnm(IM) file name, generate for temporary file ....................................................................................... tmpnam(3S) file name, generate for terminal ................................................................................................. ctermid(3S) file, open for reading or writing ....................................................................................................... open(2) file, open with assigoed buffering .................................................................................................. fopen(3S) file owner or group, change .. ................ ......... ............................... .......................... ........... ........ bifchown( 1) file pointer, create using file descriptor ......................................................................................... fopen(3S) file pointer, move read/write (seek) ................................................................................................. Iseek(2) file pointer, obtain for file ............................................................................................................. fopen(3S) file pointer, re-assign to another file .............................................................................................. fopen(3S) file, print last part of .............. ......... .................. ................... ................................................ ....... ...... tail( 1) file, put line length specifications in text files .................................................................................. fspec(5) file, put margin specifications in text files ........................................................................................ fspec(5) file, put tab specifications in text files ............................................................................................. fspec(5)

- 13 -

Permuted Index

file, read and execute commands from ................................................................................................. sh(l) file, read and format data from .............................. ....................................................................... scanf(3S) file, read character from ......................................................... ......................................................... getc(3S) file, read from ................................................................................................................................... read(2) file, read string from ....................................................................................................................... gets(3S) file, read word from ........................................................................................................................ getc(3S) file, remove ......................................................................................................................................... rm(l) file, remove a LIF ............................................................................................................................ lifrm(l) file, remove extra new-line characters from ...................................................................................... rmnl(l) file, remove selected fields from each line in ....................................................................................... cut(l) file, remove selected table column entries from .................................................................................. cut(l) file, rename

LIF ........................................................................................................................ lifrename(l) file, rewind before next I/O operation ........................................................................................... fseek(3S) file scanner, big ................................................................................................................................... bfs(l) file, search contents of for specified string(s) .................................................................................... grep(l) file, set/clear set-user-ID, set-group-ID, sticky bits ...................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2) file size limit, get for process .......................................................................................................... ulimit(2) file, sort contents of .......................................................................................................................... sort(l) file, split into pieces .......................................................................................................................... split(l) file system, backup file system on cpio archive ......................................................................... backup(lM) file system (Bell) consistency check and interactive repair ............................................................ biffsck(l) file system (Bell) debugger ........................................................................................................... biffsdb(l) file system consistency check and interactive repair ....................................................................... fsck(lM) file system, construct on special file ..... ......... ........... ....... ................................................ ........... ... mkfs (1M) file system debugger ...................................................................................................................... fsdb(lM) file system descriptor file entry ................................................................................................. getfsent(3X) file system, find special file associated with ..... ...................................... ...................... ............. devnm(1M) file system hierarchy.... .................... ......... ................. ........... ....................................................... ..... hier(7) file system, install commands in ................................................................................................. install(lM) file system, list of those to be checked by fsck(lM) ................................................................... checklist(5) file system, mount or unmount .............................................................. mount(lM), mount(2), umount(2) file system name, get for mounted ................................................................................................... ustat(2) file system pack name, get for mounted .......................................................................................... ustat(2) file system shutdown status ....................................................................................................... fsclean(lM) file system, table of mounted file systems .................................................................................... mnttab(5) file, system's "bit bucket" special file ................................................................................................ null (4) file transfer: XMODEM protocol .............................................................................................. umodem(lM) file transfers: KERMIT-protocol ................................................................................................. kermit(lM) file tree walk .................................................................................................................................... ftw(3C) file, update access/modification/change times of ............................................................. touch(l), utime(2) file utilities, Bell Interchange Format ................................................................................................ bif(5) file, write character onto ................................................................................................................ putc(3S) file, write formatted data onto ..................................................................................................... printf(3S) file, write

LIF

volume header on ..................................................................................................... lifinit(l) file, write string onto ...................................................................................................................... puts(3S) file, write to .................................................................................................................................... write(2) file, write word onto .... .......... ...... .............. .......... ............................ ............................ ................... putc(3S) file-creation mode mask, get/set ................................................................................... umask(l), umask(2) fileno ............................................................................................................................................ ferror(3S) files, archive on tape ......... ............................... ............................. .................. ................... ......... ........ tar(1) files, check password and group files ................. ........... ................... ........ ..................................... pwck(1M) files, compare two ................................................................................................... bdiff(l), cmp(l), diff(1) files, compare two and create change bars ..... .................. ............... .................................. ............. diffmk(1) files, compare two and find lines common to both ......................................................................... comm(l) files, compare two and find lines unique to each .................. ............................ .......... ....... ............. comm( 1)

- 14 -

Permuted Index

files, concatenate two or more ............................................................................................................ cat(l) files, copy......... ................... ............ ................ ....... .... ................. ....... ...................................... .......... cat( 1) files, copy and simultaneously edit ............. ............................. ............................. .................... ....... ... sed(1) files, copy between two systems ......................................................................................... uucp(l), uuto(l) files, copy out to media ............ .......... ......................................................................... ................... ... cpio (1) files, description of /etc/profile and $HOMEj.profile .................................................................... profile(5) files, extract from media ................................................................................................................... cpio(l) files, format and print .......................................................................................................................... pr(l) files, merge lines in one or more ...................................................................................................... paste(l) files, move, link, or copy ...................................................................................................................... cp(l) files, print ........................................................................................................................................... cat(l) files, unpack/extract from 5.25" flexible discs .................................................................................. upm(1) files, unpack/extract from Command Set 80 cartridge tape archives ................................................ upm(l) filter reverse line-feeds and backspaces ............................................................................................... col(l) find ................................................................................................................................................... find(l) find current user slot in utmp file ............................................................................................... ttyslot(3C) find duplicate lines in file ................................................................................................................. uniq(l) find files ............................................................................................................................................ find(l) find files in a BIF system .............................................. ; ............................................................... biffind(l) find name of a terminal ........................................................................................................... ttyname(3C) find strings for inclusion in message catalog .................................................................................. findstr(l) findmsg ....................................................................................................................................... findmsg(l) findstr .......................... .................... ....................................... .................. ....... ............................. findstr( 1) fix manual pages for faster viewing with man(l) .......................................................................... fixman(l) fixman ........................................................................................................................................... fisman(l) flag, get/set close-on-exec ................................................................................................................. fcntl(2) flags, mapping pwb/V6 UNIX terminal flags into current HP-UX ..................................................... tty(4) flags, set shell ...................................................................................................................................... sh(l) flexible discs, unpack/extract files from ............... ... ...... ........... .... .... .............. ........................... ....... upm(1) floating point number, split into integer and fractional parts ....................................................... frexp(3C) floating point to ASCII conversion ................................................................................................. ecvt(3C) floor .............................................................................................................................................. floor(3M) flow graph, C, generate ................................................................................................................... cflow(l) flush buffers associated with an open file . ........ ....... ...................................... .... ..... ........... ....... ..... fclose(3S) fmod .............................................. ............................................................................................... floor( 3M) fold long lines for finite-width output device ..................................................................................... fold(l) fopen ............................................................................................................................................. fopen(3S) for loop, exit from enclosing ................................................................................................................ sh(l) for loop, resume the next iteration of .................................................................................................. sh(1) fork ................................................................................................................................................... fork(2) format and print files ........................................................................................................................... pr(l) format C program ............................................................................................................................... cb(l) format, compiled term file ................................................................................................................ term(5) format data into string ................................................................................................................. printf(3S) format data on buffered open file ................................................................................................. printf(3S) format data on standard output ................................................................................................... printf(3S) format, nlist structure ...................................................................................................................... nlist(5) format of an i-node, description of .................................................................................................. inode(5) format of a.out file, description of ................................................................................................... a.out(5) format of core image file, description of ............................................................................................ core(5) format of cpio archive, description of ................................................................................................ cpio(5) format of library/archive file, description of ........................................................................................ ar(5) format of SCCS file, description of ............................................................................................... sccsfile(5) format, privileged values .............................................................................................................. privgrp(5) format SDF volume .................................................................................................................... sdfinit(lM)

- 15 -

Permuted Index

fonnat specifications, put in text file ............................................................................................... fspec(5) format tables for nroff or troff ............................................................................................................ tbl(1) fonnat text ....... ......... ......... ........... .................................... ........... ............................ ......... .......... .... nroff( 1) formatted output from varargs argument list ........................ .......... .............................. ........ ..... vprintf(3S) formatted output with numbered arguments .......................................................................... printmsg(3C) formatter, text, simple ................................................................................................................... adjust(1) formatting text with the man macros ............. ........................ ........... .................. ........... ......... ......... man(7) formatting text with the mm macros ................ .......................... .................... ......... .............. ........... mm(7)

FORTRAN 77 compiler ............................................................................................................ fc(1), f77(1) fprintf ............ ...................................... ........................... ........... ........................... .......... .............. printf(3S) fputc .............................................................................................................................................. putc(3S) fputs ............................................................................................................................................... puts(3S) fread .............. .......... ............................. ..................................... ............................. ......... ......... ..... fread(3S) free ............................................................................................................................................. malloc(3C) free blocks, find for mounted file system ......................................................................................... ustat(2) free disc blocks, report number of .......................... ........................................................ .................. bifdf( 1) free disc blocks, report number of ......... ......................................................... ....... .......... .................. df(1M) free i-nodes, find for mounted file system ........................................................................................ ustat(2) free memory space ...................................................................................................................... memallc(2) freopen .......................................................................................................................................... fopen(3S) frexp ............................................................................................................................................. frexp(3C) fscanf ...... ......... ............................... ......... ........... ............................................. .............................. scanf(3S) fsck ...................................................... ............... ... ........................... ............................ .......... ....... fsck( 1M) fsck ................................................................................................................................................ fsck(1M) fsck(1M), list of file systems to be checked by ........................................................................... checklist(5) fsclean ....................................................................................................................................... fsclean(1M) fsdb ............................................................................................................................................... fsdb(1M)

[seek .............................................................................................................................................. fseek(3S) fstat .................................................................................................................................................. stat(2) fstat(2)/stat(2), description of structure returned by these calls ....................................................... stat(7) ftell ................................................................................................................................................ fseek(3S) ftime ............................................................................................................................................... ftime(2) ftw ..... ............................................... ............................................. ................... .......... ..... ............ .... ftw(3C) functions and constants, math .................................. ......... ........... ......... .......... ............................... math(7) fwrite ............................................................................................................................................. fread(3S) fwtmp ........................................................................................................................................ fwtmp(1M) gamma ............................... ............. ......... .......... .............. .................................. ................ ....... gamma(3M) gcvt ................................................................................................................................................ ecvt(3C) gencat ........................................................................................................................................... gencat(1) general terminal interface .............................................................................................................. termio( 4) generate a fonnatted message-catalog file ...................... .............. ............................ ................. .... gencat( 1) generate C flow graph ..................................................................................................................... cflow(1) generate encryption key ......................................................................................................... makekey(1M) generate uniformly-distributed pseudo-random numbers ......................................................... drand48(3C) get ...................................................................................................................................................... get(1) get date and time more precisely .................................................................................................... ftime(2) get entries from symbol table (name list) of executable file ........................................................... nlist(3C) get file system descriptor file entry ........................................................................................... getfsent(3X) get group access list ................................................................................................................. getgroups(2) get message from a catalog ........................................................................................................ getmsg(3C) get message queue .............................................................................................. :......................... msgget(2) get name of current host ........... ..... ................ ........... .................... ........................... ........... gethostname(2) get password file entry ............. ............................................... ........................... .......... .......... getpwent (3C) get pathname of current working directory ................................................................................ getcwd(3C) get real/effective user, real/effective group IDs .............................................................................. getuid(2)

- 16 -

Permuted Index

get set of semaphores ................................................................................................................... semget(2) get shared memory segment ......................................................................................................... shmget(2) get special attributes for group ... ............................ ........... ......... ......... .................... ............... getprivgrp( 1) get x.25 line ............................................................................................................................... getx25(lM) getc ................................................................................................................................................. getc(38)

GETC ........................................................................................................................................... regexp(7) getchar ............................................................................................................................................ getc(38) getcwd ....................................................................................................................................... getcwd(3C) getegid ........................................................................................................................................... getuid(2) getenv ........................................................................................................................................ getenv(3C) geteuid .......................................................................................................................................... getuid(2) getfsent .................................................................................................................................... getfsent(3X) getgid ............................................................................................................................................ getuid(2) getgrent ................................................................................................................................... getgrent(3C) getgrgid ................................................................................................................................... getgrent(3C) getgrnam ................................................................................................................................. getgrent(3C) get groups ....................... ................... ......... ................... .................... ....................................... getgroups (2) gethostname ........................................................................................................................ gethostname(2) getitimer ..... .............. ............ ....... ... ...... .......... ........... ... .... .................... ... ................. ......... ....... getitimer(2) getlogin .................................................................................................................................... getlogin(3C) getmsg ....................................................................................................................................... getmsg(3C) getmsg, insert calls using findstring output .............................................................................. insertmsg(1) getopt ............................ ................... .......... ................................................................................... getopt (1 ) getopt ......................................................................................................................................... getopt(3C) getpass ...................................................................................................................................... getpass(3C) getpgrp .......................................................................................................................................... getpid(2) getpid ............................................................................................................................................ getpid(2) getppid .......................................................................................................................................... getpid(2) getprivgrp ............................................................. getprivgrp(1), getprivgrp(2), setprivgrp(1M), privgrp(5) getpw .......................................................................................................................................... getpw(3C) getpwent ................................................................................................................................ getpwent(3C) getpwnam ............................................................................................................................... getpwent(3C) getpwuid ................................................................................................................................ getpwent(3C) gets .... ........ ....... ........................................ .......... .......... ..... .... .................. ... ........ ......... ....... ..... ....... gets(3S) get/set date and time .......................................................................................................... gettimeofday(2) get/set special attributes for group ......................................................................................... getprivgrp(2) get/set value of interval timer ................................................................................................... getitimer(2) gettimeofday ....................................................................................................................... gettimeofday(2) getty ............................................................................................................................................ getty(1M) getuid ............................................................................................................................................ getuid(2) getut ............................................................................................................................................. getut(3C) getw ..................................................................... ............ ............................................................... getc (38) getx25 ........................................................................................................................................ getx25(1M) gmtime ......................................................................................................................................... ctime(3C) goto, non-local ............................................................................................................................ setjmp(3C) grammar, create context-free ............................................................................................................ yacc(1) graphics devices, information for those with crt's ....................................................................... graphics(4) grep .................................................................................................................................................. grep(1) group ............................................................................................................................................. group(5) group access list, set ................................................................................................................. setgroups(2) group, change ID of user ................. ......... ...... .............................................................................. newgrp( 1) group file, close ........................................................................................................................ getgrent(3C) group file, description of /etc/group ............................................................................................... group (5) group file, read one line from ................................................................................................... getgrent(3C) group file, rewind ..................................................................................................................... getgrent(3C)

- 17 -

Permuted Index

group file, search for matching group ID ................................................................................. getgrent(3C) group file, search for matching group name ............................................................................. getgrent(3C) group ID, change for file ............................................................................................... chown(l), chown(2) group ID, change for user .................................................................................................. newgrp(l), sh(1) group ID, get for process ............................................................................................................... getpid(2) group ID, print .................................................................................................................................... id(l) group ID, search group file for matching ................................................................................. getgrent(3C) group ID, set ................................................................................................................................. setuid(2) group ID, set for process ............................................................................................................. setpgrp(2) group memberships, show ............................................................................................................. groups(l) group name, search group file for matching ............................................................................. getgrent(3C) group/password file checkers ....................................................................................................... pwck(lM) groups ........................................................................................................................................... groups(l) group special attributes, get .................................................................................................... getprivgrp(l) group special attributes, set ................................................................................................. setprivgrp(lM) grpck ........................................................................................................................................... pwck(lM) grp.h .............................................................................................................................................. group(5) gsignal ........................................................................................................................................ ssignal(3C) gtty ................................................................................................................................................... stty(2) handling facility, variable argument list ..................................................................................... varargs(7) hangups, run command immune to ............................................................................................... nohup(l) hardware name, get ..................................................................................................... uname(l), uname(2) hardware trap numbers, list of ..................................................................................................... trapno(2) hash search tables . ....... ........... ......... ........... ....... ................ ........................ ....... ................. ....... hsearch(3C) header, write LIF volume on file ..................................................................................................... lifinit(l) heap size, change for program ...... ........ ........ ...................... .................... .................. ........ ........ ....... chatr(1) help .................................................................................................................................................. help(l) help, get for SCCS routines .............................................................................................................. help(l) hexadecimal, octal dump ..................................................................................................................... od(l) hier ....................... ....... ....... .... ............... ... ......... .......... ..... ..... ........ ................ ..... ........ ........ ....... ....... hier(7) hierarchy, file system . .......... ...... ............ ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... .......... ....... ............ ....... ......... hier(7) host name, get ..................................................................................................................... gethostname (2) host name, set ...................................................................................................................... sethostname(2) host system, set/print name of current .................................................................................... hostname(l) hostname .................................................................................................................................. hostname(l) hpib interface, description of ........................................................................................................... hpib( 4) hpnls ..... ............ ......... ......... ............. .... ............... .................................. ....... ........ ........ ......... .... ...... hpnls(7)

HP-UX implementations, conditional compilation depending on ................................................... model(5)

HP-UX implementations, definition of constants which identify .................................................... model(5)

HP-UX machine identification ....................................................................................................... model(5)

HP-UX revision information, get ................................................................................................. revision(l)

HP-UX version name, get ............................................................................................ uname(1), uname(2) hsearch ..................................................................................................................................... hsearch(3C) hyperbolic functions ................... .................... .................. .......... ......... ................... ...... ........ .... ..... sinh(3M) hypot .......................................................................................................................................... hypot(3M) hypotenuse, function for calculating ........................................................................................... hypot(3M) id ......................................................................................................................................................... id(l)

ID's, set user and group ................................................................................................................. setuid(2) init ................................................................................................................................................. init(lM)

INIT .. ........... ..................................... ................... ... .......... ..... ... .................... ...... .... ... ............ ...... regexp(7) init(lM), control information for .................................................................................................. inittab(5) initgroups ............................................................................................................................. initgroups(3C) initialization of system state and processes ..................................................................................... init(lM) initialize group access list ...................................................................................................... initgroups(3C) initialize hard disc, flexible disc, or cartridge tape media ......... ....................................... ......... mediainit(1)

- 18 -

Permuted Index

initialize SDF volume ................................................................................................................. sdfinit(lM) initialize terminal type and mode on login .. ......... ....................... ........ ........... ................. ...... ............ tset(1) inittab .......................................................................................................................................... inittab(5) i-node, clear i-node by zeroing it out ............................................................................................... clri(lM) i-node, description of i-node format ................................................................................................ inode(5) i-node, enable access to i-node for file system repair ...................................................................... fsdb(lM) i-nodes, create file name vs. i-node list ...................................................................................... ncheck(lM) i-nodes, find number of free i-nodes in mounted file system ............................................................ ustat(2) input and format data from buffered opcn file .............................................................................. scanf(3S) input and format data from standard input .................................................................................. scanf(3S) input and format data from string ................................................................................................ scanf(3S) input commands to shell ...................................................................................................................... sh(l) input control, description of input control for terminal ...................................................................... tty( 4) input/output between process and command .............................................................................. popen(3S) input/output, description of buffered file ....................................................................................... stdio(3S) input/output operation, get current byte offset of ......................................................................... fseek(3S) input/output operation, reposition next ........................................................................................ fseek(3S) input/output, output character/word to open file or standard output ........................................... putc(3S) input/output, push character back into input stream ................................................................. ungetc(3S) input/output redirection ...................................................................................................................... sh(l) input/output, write string to open file or standard output ............................................................. puts(3S) insert calls to getmsg using findstring output ..... ..................................... ................... .......... .... insertmsg( 1) install ......................................................................................................................................... install(lM) install commands into file system ............................................................................................... install(lM) install object files in binary directories ......................................................................................... cpset(lM) integer, get largest integer smaller than x ..................................................................................... floor(3M) integer, get smallest integer larger than x ..................................................................................... floor(3M) integers, convert between 3-byte and long ..................................................................................... l3tol(3C) integer trap control ................................................................................................................ intrapoff(3M) integrity check of operating system in SDF boot area(s) ............................................................... osck(1M) interactive IMAGE database access ................................................................................................. query(l) interactively write (talk) to another user ........................................................................................ write(l) interface, description of hpib ............................................................................................................ hpib( 4) interface to blocked/unblocked disc, description of ........................................................................... disci 4) interface to terminal I/O, description of ............................................................................................. tty( 4) interleave factor, establish for SDF volume ................................................................................ sdfinit(lM) interprocess communication, create .................................................................................................. pipe(2) inter-process communication facilities status ..................................................................................... ipcs(l) inter-process communication routines ......................................................................................... stdipc(3C) interrupt character, description of ...................................................................................................... tty(4) intrapoff ................................................................................................................................. intrapoff(3M)

I/O between process and command ............................................................................................. popen(3S)

I/O, description of bufl'ered file ..................................................................................................... stdio(3S)

I/O operation, get current byte offset of ........................................................................................ fseek(3S)

I/O operation, reposition next ....................................................................................................... fseek(3S)

I/O, output character/word to open file or standard output .......................................................... putc(3S)

I/O, push character back into input stream ............................................................................... ungetc(3S)

I/O redirection .................................................................................................................................... sh(l)

I/O: GPIO routines (device I/O library) ..................................................................................... gpio_ *(31)

I/O: HP-IB routines (device I/O library) .................................................................................... hpib_ *(31)

I/O: I/O routines (device I/O library) ............................................................................................ io_ *(31)

I/O, write string to open file or standard output ........................................................................... puts(3S) ioctl .................................................................................................................................................. ioctl(2) ioctl(2) system calls, description of ..................................................................................................... tty(4) iomap ............................................................................................................................................ iomap(4)

- 19 -

Permuted Index

ipcrm .............................................................................................................................................. ipcrm(l) ipcs ................................................................................................................................................... ipcs(l) isalnum ........................................................................................................................................ ctype(3C) isalpha ........... .................................................................................................................... ........... ctype(3C) isascii ............................................... ............................ .................................. .............................. ctype(3C) isatty .................................................... ................................................................................... ttyname(3C) iscntrl ........................................................ ................... ................................................................ ctype(3C) isdigit ........................................................................................................................................... ctype(3C) isgraph ......................................................................................................................................... ctype(3C) islower ......................................................... ...... ............. ............................ .................................. ctype(3C) isprint ....................................... ............................................................................................. ...... ctype(3C) ispunct ................................................................................................ ........................... .............. ctype(3C) isspace .......................................................................................................................................... ctype(3C) issue identification file ..................................................................................................................... issue(5) isupper ........... ........................................................ ...................................... .................. .............. ctype(3C) isxdigit ......................................................................................... ......... ....... ................................ ctype(3C) jO ................................................................................................................................................ bessel(3M) j1 ................................................................................................................................................ bessel(3M) jn ................................................................................................................................................ bessel(3M) join .................................................................................................................................................... join(l) join, perform join of two data base relations ....................................................................... .............. join(1) kana8 ............................................................................................................................................. kana8(7) kermit ........................................................................................................................................ kermit(lM) key, generate encryption ........................................................................................................ makekey(lM) kill ...................................................................................................................................................... kill(l) kill character, description of ............................................................................................................... tty( 4) killall ............................................................ ............................................................................... killall (1M)

I ............................................................................................................................................................ Is(l)

13tol ............................................................................................................................................... 13tol(3C)

164a ................................................................................................................................................ a641(3C) langid ....................................... ................... .................. .......... ......... .......................................... ... langid(7) langinfo .................................................................................................................................... langinfo(3C) language identification variable ..................................................................................................... langid(7) language information ............................ ........ ................. ....................... ......................... ........... langinfo(3C) last-accessed time, update for file .................................................................................... touch(l), utime(2) last-changed time, update for file .............. ......................................................................... ............ touch(1) last-modified time, update for file ................................................................................... touch(l), utime(2)

Id ......................................................................................................................................................... Id(l)

Idexp ............................................................................................................................................ frexp(3C) leave ................................................................................................................................................ leave(l) length of string, get ..................................................................................................................... string(3C) lex ...................................................................................................................................................... lex(l) lexical analysis of text, generate programs for .................................................................................... lex(l) libraries and archives, create and maintain .......................................................................................... ar(l) library file format, description of ......................................................................................................... ar(5) library file format, description of cpio archive format ....................................................................... cpio(5) library, find ordering relation for object ......................................................................................... lorder(1) library, table of contents format description .................................................................................. ranlib(5)

LIF directory, list contents of ............................................................................................................ lifls(l)

LIF file, remove ............................................................................................................................... lifrm(l)

LIF file, rename ........................................................................................................................ lifrename(l)

LIF files, copy in or out .................................................................................................................... lifcp(l)

LIF volume header, write on file ..................................................................................................... Iifinit(l) lifcp .................... .............................................................................................................................. Iifcp( 1) lifini t ............................................................................................................................................... lifini t ( 1 )

- 20 -

Permuted Index

lills .............................................................................................................................. ....................... lills (1 ) lifrename ................................................................................................................................... lifrename(l) lifrm ................................................................................................................................................. lifrm(l) line .................................................................................................................................................... line(l) line, copy from standard input to standard output ........................................................................... line(l) line count ............................................................................................................................................ wc(l) line length, put line length specifications in text files ...................................................................... fspec(5) linear search and update ........................ ................................ ....... ............................................. Isearch(3C) lines, count number contained in file .................................................................................................. wc(l) lines, find common lines in two files ............................................................................................... comm(l) lines, find unique lines in two files ................................................................................................. comm(l) lines, merge in one or more files ...................................................................................................... paste(l) link .................................................................................................................................... link(IM), link(2) link, copy, or move files ....................................................................................................................... cp(l) link, create to or remove from file ..................................................................... link(IM), link(2), unlink(2) link editor ............................................................................................................................................ ld(l) link information utility, object files ............................................................................................ linkinfo(l) linker .................................................................................................................................................... Id(l) linker/assembler executable output file, description of .................................................................... a.out(5) linkinfo ........................................................................................................................................ linkinfo(l) lint .. ............................................ ............................. ........... ............................................................... lint ( 1) list active processes in system .............................................................................................................. ps(l) list contents of ElF directories .......................................................................................................... bills(l) list contents of directories ..................................................................................................................... Is(l) list contents of LIF directory ............................................................................................................. lills(l) list current users on system .............................................................................................................. who(l) list device drivers ............................................................................................................................ Isdev(l) list file names with associated i-nodes ....................................................................................... ncheck(IM) list spooled uucp transactions grouped by transaction ...................................................................... uuls(l) list users and their current processes ......................................................................................... whodo(1M)

II ........................................................................................................................................................... Is(l)

In ......................................................................................................................................................... cp(l) localtime ...................................................................................................................................... ctime(3C) locate files in file system .................................................................................................................... find(l) locate source, binary, and/or manual for program ....................................................................... whereis(l) lock ................................................................................................................................................... lock(l) lock process, text, or data in memory....................... ........... ............................... ............................ plock(2) lock terminal ..................................................................................................................................... lock(l) lockf ................ ................ ...................... ....................................... ......... ........................................... lockf(2) lock/unlock process address space or segment ............................................................................. memlck(2) log .................................................................................................................................................. exp(3M) log gamma function .................................................................................................................. gamma(3M) log results of work requests on remote system ........................................................................... uucico(IM) loglO ............................................................................................................................................... exp(3M) logarithm, common ......................................................................................................................... exp(3M) logarithm, natural .......................................................................................................................... exp(3M) logging file for system errors .......................................................................................................... errfile(5) logging in on HP-UX ....................................................................................................................... login(l) logical block, set number of bytes per logical block .................................................................... sdfinit(IM)

Logical Interchange Format description ............................................................................................... lif(5) login ................................................................................................................................................ login(l) login, establish baud rate and communication with terminal during ............................................ getty(IM) login name, get ..................................................................................................... logname(I), getlogin(3C) login name, get ASCII string representing .. ............. .................. ...... ... .................................. ..... cuserid(3S) login name, print .................................................................................................................................. id(l)

- 21 -

Permuted Index

login name, record for each user (accounting) ................................................................................. utmp(5) login shell, change default ................................................................................................................ chsh(l) login time, record for each user (accounting) .................................................................................. utmp(5) logname ...................................................................................................................................... logname(l) logouts, run command immune to ................................................................................................. nohup(l) long integer, convert to base-64 ASCII ........................................................................................... a641(3C) long integer data access, machine independent ............................................................................. sputl(3X) long integers, convert to/from 3-byte integers ............................................................................... 13tol(3C) longjmp ...................................................................................................................................... setjmp(3C) lorder ............................................................................................................................................. lorder(l) lower-case to upper-case character conversion ............................................................................... conv(3C)

Is ........................................................................................................................................................... Is(l)

Isdev ................................................................................................................................................ lsdev(l)

Isearch .......... ................... ................... ......... ......... ........ ........... ................. ............................ ..... lsearch(3C) lseek ................................................................................................................................................. Iseek(2)

Isf ......................................................................................................................................................... ls(l)

Isr ......................................................................................................................................................... ls(l) lsx ......................................................................................................................................................... ls(l) ltol3 ............................................................................................................................................... 13tol(3C) m4 ...................................................................................................................................................... m4(1) machid ......................................................................................................................................... machid(l) machine ID, get ........................................................................................................... uname(I), uname(2) machine processor type ................................................................................................................ machid(l) machine-dependent values ...................... ......... ........ .................... ........... ................. ......... ............. values(7) macro processor .................................................................................................................................. m4(1) macros for formatting entries in the HP-UX Reference manual ........................................................ man(7) macros for formatting text ...... ........... ....... .................... ... .................. ....... .......... ......... ......... ............ mm(7) magic numbers, description of ........................................................................................................ magic(5) magic.h, description of ................................................................................................................... magic (5) magnetic tape, description of raw interface and controls .................................................................... mt( 4) magnetic tape, manipulate and/or position ........................................................................................ mt(l) mail .................................................................................................................................................. mail(l) mail, read or send to other users ...................................................................................................... mail(l) maintain libraries, archives .................................................................................................................. ar(l) maintain, update, recompile programs ............................................................................................ make(l) make ............................................................................................................................................... make(l) make a BIF directory ................................................................................................................. bifmkdir(l) make file system on special file ..................................................................................................... mkfs(IM) make posters in large letters ......................................................................................................... banner(l) make unprintable characters in a file visible or invisible ..................................................................... vis(l) makekey ................................................................................................................................. makekey(IM) malloc ......................................................................................................................................... malloc(3C) man .................................................................................................................................................. man(l) man macros, description of ............. ....... ......... ... ........... .......................... ..................... ....... ....... ....... man(7) manage binary search trees ............................................................................ ,. .......... ............... tsearch(3C) manage hash search tables ....................................................................................................... , hsearch(3C) manipulate wtmp records .......................................................................................................... fwtmp(IM) mantissa, get from floating point value .......... ...................... ...... .......... ................................. ........ frexp(3C) manual, create preformatted manual pages for on-line ............................................................. catman(IM) manual, on-line ................................................................................................................................. man(l) manual page (on-line), locate for program ................................................................................... whereis(l) map characters into other characters during copy to standard output ............................................ , .... tr(l) mapping, physical address ............................................................................................................. iomap(4) margins, put margin specifications in text files ................................................................................ fspec(5) mark Command Set 80 cartridge tape ............................................................................................... tcio(l)

- 22 -

Permuted Index

mark SDF operating system file as loadable/non-loadable ........................................................ osmark(1M) mark/unmark volume as HP-UX root volume ....................................................................... rootmark(1M) mask, get/set file-creation .................................................................................. sh(1), umask(1), umask(2) master device information table ......... .......... ........... .......... ....... ................... ......... .................... ..... master( 5) math ............................................................................................................................................... math(7) math functions and constants ......................................................................................................... math(7) mathematical error handling ................................................................................................... matherr(3M) matherr ................................................................................................................................... matherr(3M)

MC68000 assembler ............................................................................................................................. as(l) mediainit .................................................................................................................................. mediainit(l) memadvise ............................................................................................................................. memadvise(2) memallc ...................................................................................................................................... memallc(2) memberships, show group ............................................................................................................. groups(l) memchmd ............................................................................................................................... memchmd(2) memfree ..................................................................................................................................... memallc(2) memlck ........................................................................................................................................ memlck(2) memory .................................................................................................................................... memory(3C) memory, allocate a block of ........................................................................................................ malloc(3C) memory, allocate for array ......................................................................................................... malloc(3C) memory, change size of previously-allocated block ..................................................................... malloc(3C) memory, deallocate block of ....................................................................................................... malloc(3C) memory management, inform operating system about segment reference patterns ................ memadvise(2) memory management, modify segment length .......................................................................... memvary(2) memory operations ................................................................................................................... memory(3C) memory segment access modes, change ................................................................................... memchmd(2) memory space, allocate and free ................................................................................................. memallc(2) memory, write to disc ......................................................................................................... sync(2), sync(l) memulck ...................................................................................................................................... memlck(2) memvary ................................................................................................................................... memvary(2) merge contents of several files ........................................................................................................... sort(l) merge lines in one or more files ....................................................................................................... paste(l) merge or add total accounting files ........................................................................................ acctmerg(lM) mesg ................................................................................................................................................ mesg(l) message catalogs: MPE/RTE ..................................................................................................... catread(3C) message control operations ............................................................................................................ msgctl(2) message operations ........................................................................................................................ msgop(2) messages, permit/deny to your terminal ......................................................................................... mesg(1) messages, read or send to other users ............................................................................................... mail(l) messages, send to all users ............................................................................................................. wall(lM) messages, send to another user interactively ................................................................................... write(l) mkdev ........................................................................................................................................ mkdev(lM) mkdir ............................................................................................................................................. mkdir(l) mkdir ............................................................................................................................................. mkdir(2) mkfs ............................................................................................................................................. mkfs(lM) mklp ............................................................................................................................................ mklp(lM) mknod ...................................................................................................................... mknod(2), mknod(lM) mknod.h, description of ................................................................................................................ mknod(5) mkstr ............................................................................................................................................. mkstr(l) mktemp ................................................................................................................................... mktemp(3C) mm ................................................................................................................................................... mm(l) mm macros, description of ................................................................................................................ mm(7) mm macros, print documents formatted with ................................................................................... mm(l) mnttab table, create .................................................................................................................. setmnt(lM) mnttab.h, description of .............................................................................................................. mnttab(5) mod function, floating point .......................................................................................................... floor(3M)

- 23 -

Permuted Index

mode, change for file ......................... , .......................................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2) model, Native Language Support .................................................................................................... hpnls(7) model.h, description of ................................................................................................................... model(5) modem ......................................................................................................................................... modem(4) modem control special file ............................................................................................................ modem(4) modf ............................................................................................................................................. frexp(3C) modify parameters of SCCS files ................................................................................................... admin(1) modify segment length .............................................................................................................. memvary(2) monitor ............... ........ ...... ............ ......... .......... ............................ .................................... ........ monitor(3C) monitor uucp network ................................................................................................................ uusub(lM) more ................................................................................................................................................ more(l) mount ....................................................................................................................... mount(lM), mount(2) mount or unmount file system ............................................................... mount(lM), mount(2), umount(2) mounted devices, create table of ........... .......... .......... ................. ... .......................... .................. setmnt(1M) mounted devices, table of those mounted by mount(lM) ............................................................ mnttab(5) mounted file system, find special file associated with ................................................................. devnm(lM) mounted file system statistics ......................................................................................................... ustat(2) move a directory ....... ......... ..... ....... ........................... ............ ................. ......................... ............ mvdir(lM) move, link, or copy files ....................................................................................................................... cp(l) move read/write file pointer; seek .................................................................................................... Iseek(2) move to new working directory ................................................................................... cd(l), sh(1), chdir(2) msgctl ........................................................................................................................................... msgctl(2) msgget .......................................................................................................................................... msgget(2) msgop ............................................................................................................................................ msgop(2) mt ....................................................................................................................................................... mt(l) mUltiple line-feeds, remove from output ............................................................................................. ssp(l) mv ....................................................................................................................................................... cp(l) mvdir .......................................................................................................................................... mvdir(lM) name, get login ..................................................................................................... logname(l), getiogin(3C) name list (symbol table), extract entries from executable file's name list ...................................... nlist(3C) name list (symbol table), print from object file .................................................................................. nm(1)

Native Language Support model ..................................................................................................... hpnls(7) natural logarithm ........................................................................................................................... exp(3M) ncheck ....................................................................................................................................... ncheck(lM) network, monitor uucp activity on ... ........... .......... ..................... ........ ......... ................... ............ uusub(1M) network special file, create ....................................................................................... mknod(2), mknod(lM) new file system ............................................................................................................................ newfs(lM) newfs ........................................................................................................................................... newfs(lM) newfs ........................................................................................................................................... newfs(lM) newgrp ............................................................................................................................... newgrp(l), sh(l) new-line character, description of ....................................................................................................... tty( 4) new-line characters, remove extras from file .................................................................................... rmnl(l) news ................................................................................................................................................ news(l) news, print current events ............................................................................................................... news(l) nice ...................................................................................................................................... nice(l), nice(2) nlist ..................................... ............... ......... ......... ............................... .......................................... nlist(3C) nlist structure format ................... ....... ..................... ............................ ......... ........................... ... ..... nlist (5)

NLS character classification ................................................................................................... nl_ctype(3C)

NLS character set collating sequence tables ................ ........... ....... .................... ..... col--seq_8, col--seq_16

NLS character sets ......................................................................................... ascii(7), kana8(7), roman8(7)

NLS model.... ........... .................. ............................. ..................... ...... ........................... ........... ....... hpnls(7)

NLS native language information ............................................................................................. langinfo(3C)

NLS non-ASCII string collation .................. .................. ...................................... .................... nl--string(3C)

NLS translate characters ......................................................................................................... nl_conv(3C) nl--string ............................................................................................................................... nLstring(3C)

- 24 -

(

Permuted Index

nm ..................................................................................................................................................... nm(1) nodename, get ........................................................................................... revision(1), uname(1), uname(2) nodename, set/print name of current ....................................................................................... hostname(1) nohup ............................................................................................................................................ nohup(1) non-ASCII string collation used by NLS ................................................................................. nL.Etring(3C) nroff ........... ......... ......................... ............................... ........... .................. .......... .......... .................... nroff( 1) nroff, format tables for .......... ........... .......... ............................................... .......................................... tbl( 1) nroff, interpret output from nroff for printing .................................................................................... col(1) nroff, troff, tbl, cqn constructs, remove from text .......................................................................... deroff(1) numbered-argument print output formatting ......................................................................... printmsg(3C) object code, locate for program .................................................................................................... whereis(1) object file, debugger for ..................................................................................................................... adb(1) object file, extract symbol table (name list) entries from ............................................................... nlist(3C) object file, get size of ......................................................................................................................... size(1) object file link information utility ...................... ..................................................... ..................... linkinfo( 1) object file, print symbol table (name list) of ...................................................................................... nm(1) object file, remove symbol table and relocation bits from ................................................................ strip(1) object files, combine into program ....................................................................................................... Id(1) object library, find ordering relation for ......................................................................................... lorder(1) octal, hexadecimal dump ..................................................................................................................... od(1) od ........................................................................................................................................................ od(1) on-line manual command ................................................................................................................. man(l) on-line manual, create preformatted manual pages for ............................................................. catman(1M) open ................................................................................................................................................. open(2) open a file and assign buffering to it ............ ... ......... .......... ........ ................................................... fopen(3S) open file, assign buffering to ........................................................................................................ setbuf(3S) open file descriptor, duplicate .......................................................................................................... dup2(2) open file for reading or writing ........................................................................................................ open(2) operating system, append to an existing operating system ............................................................ oscp(IM) operating system, change to different operating system, check integrity of as or different version of same as ................................. chsys(1M)) as in SDF boot area(s) ........................................................ osck(1M) operating system, copy from one or more SDF boot areas to another ........................................... oscp(IM) operating system, create new operating system from ordinary files ............................................... oscp(1M) operating system management package description .................................................................... osmgr(IM) operating system, mark as loadable or non-Ioadable ................................................................. osmark(1M) operating system, shut down as with optional re-boot ............................................................ stopsys(1M) operating system, split into one or more ordinary files . ... ........ .................. ....... ............................. oscp( 1M) optarg ......................................................................................................................................... getopt(3C) opterr .............................................. ........ ............ .......... ................................... .......... ................ getopt (3C) optimization routines: CRT screen and cursor control ................................................................ curses (3X) optind ............................................ .............................. .......................... ................... .................. get opt (3C) option letter, get from argv ........................................................................................................ getopt(3C) options, parse command line ...................... .................... .......... ................ ..................... ... ............. getopt(1) options, set for terminal .... ................................................................... ............................ ................. stty( 1) options, set shell .................................................................................................................................. sh(l) opx25 .......................................................................................................................................... opx25(IM) ordering relation, find for object library or archive file .................................................................. lorder(1) ordinary file, create ...................................................................................................................... mknod(2) ordinary file, create or overwrite ..................................................................................................... creat(2) as, append to an existing operating system .... ...................................................... ........ ......... ...... oscp(1M) as, change to different as or different version of same as ........................................................ chsys(1M) as, check integrity of operating system in SDF boot area(s) ........................................................ osck(1M) as, copy from one or more SDF boot areas to another ................................................................ oscp(1M) as, create new operating system from ordinary files ..................................................................... oscp(IM) as management package description .......................................................................................... osmgr(IM)

- 25 -

Permuted Index

as, mark as loadable or non-loadable ...................................................................................... osmark(lM) as, shut down operating system with optional re-boot ............................................................ stopsys(lM) as, split operating system into one or more ordinary files ............................................................ oscp(lM) osck ............................................................................................................................................... osck(lM) oscp ............................................................................................................................................... oscp(lM) osmark ...................................................................................................................................... osmark(lM) osmgr ......................................................................................................................................... osmgr(lM) output character or word to open file or standard output .............................................................. putc(3S) output, description of formatted/unformatted output to printer ......................................................... lp( 4) output, description of system handling of terminal output ................................................................. tty( 4) output, print formatted data into string ...................................................................................... printf(3S) output, print formatted data on buffered open file ....................................................................... printf(3S) output, print formatted data on standard output ........................................................................ printf(3S) output string to open file or standard output ................................................................................. puts(3S) overlay program onto existing process and execute ................................................................ sh(l), exec(2) overview of accounting commands ................................................................................................. acct(lM) owner, change for file .................................................................................................... chown(l), chown(2) page ................................................................................................................................................. more(l) page size, set for paged data ........ .................... ........... .............................................................. uconfig( 1M) paged data, set for program ............................ .......... .......... ........ .................. .................................. chatr(1) paging and swapping enable ..................................................................................................... swapon(lM)

PAM ................................................................................................................................................. pam(l) parameter substitution ........................................................................................................................ sh(l) parameters, environment ................................................................................................... sh(l), environ(7) parameters, install in environment ...................................................................................................... sh(l) parameters, mark as readonly .............................................................................................................. sh(l) parameters, perform left-shift on positional ......................................................................................... sh(l) parameters, set for terminal .............................................................................................................. stty(l) parameters, set for terminal on login. .......... ................... ........... ......... ................. ...... ..... .......... ......... tset(1) parent process ID, get for process ................... ............................................... ......... ....................... getpid (2) parity, settings for terminal ................................................................................................................ tty( 4) parse command line options .......................................................................................................... getopt(l)

Pascal compiler ................................................................................................................................... pc(l) passwd ......................................................................................................................................... passwd(l) password, change login ................................................................................................................ passwd(l) password encryption ..................................................................................................................... crypt(3C) password file, close ................................................................................................................. getpwent(3C) password file, description of ......................................................................................................... passwd(5) password file, get line containing matching user ID ................. .... ......... ................. ..................... getpw(3C) password file, output line similar to those contained in ......................................................... putpwcnt(3C) password file, read one line from ............................................................................................ getpwent(3C) password file, rewind .............................................................................................................. getpwent(3C) password file, search for matching user

ID .......................... ... ........ ................... ................ ..... getpwent(3C) password file, search for matching user name ......................................................................... getpwent(3C) password, read from /dev /tty or standard input ...................................................................... getpass(3C) password/ group file checkers ................................................... ........ .................. .................... ...... pwck (1M) paste ............................................................................................................................................... paste(l) path name, get for terminal ..................................................................................................... ttyname(3C) path name, isolate directory name from ................................................................................... basename(l) path name, isolate file name from ............................................................................................ basename(l) pattern, find and process within text ................................................................................................ awk(l) pattern, search contents of file for .................................................................................................... grep(l) pause .............................................................................................................................................. pause(2) pause, suspend process for interval ............................................................................................... sleep(3C) pc ........................................................................................................................................................ pc(l)

- 26 -

Permuted Index

pclose ........................................................................................................................................... popen(3S)

PEEKC ....... ......... ...................................................... ... ............... ............ ...................................... regexp(7) periodic, automatic sync ................................................................................................................ syncer(1) permission bits, change for file ..................................................................................... chmod(1), chmod(2) per-process accounting file format ..................................................................................................... acct(5) perror .......................................................................................................................................... perror(3C) personal applications manager, a command shell .............................................................................. pam(1) physical address mapping .............................................................................................................. iomap(4) pipe .................................................................................................................................................. pipe(2) pipe, create/close between process and command ........................................................................ popen(3S) pipe, get intermediate data from ................. ............................................ ................... ............ ............ tee(1) pipeline, create ................................................................................................................................. pipe(2) pipeline, get intermediate data from ................................................................................................... tee(1) place error messages from C source into a file ....... ....... .............................. ................................ .... mkstr( 1) plock ............................................................................................................................................... plock(2) plotter, description of hpib interface to ............................................................................................ hpib( 4) popen ........................................................................................................................................... popen(3S) port, database listing terminal type connected to each ................................................................ ttytype(5) portable code between HP-UX implementations, typedefs for ....................................................... model(5) position magnetic tape ..... ....... ........ .......... .......... ........ .................. .................... .................... ........ ...... mt( 1) positional parameters, perform left-shift on ......................................................................................... sh(1) posters, make using large letters ................................................................................................... banner(1) pow ................................................................................................................................................ exp(3M) power function ............................................................................................................................... exp(3M) powerfail .................................... ............................................... ..................................... ................. brc (1M) pr ......................................................................................................................................................... pr(1) prealloc ...................................................................................................... .................... ............. prealloc

(1) preallocate disc storage ......... ............................ ................... ................... .................................... prealloc (1) preprocessor for C compiler .... ........ .................. ............................ ......... .......... .......... ................ ........ cpp(1) print and format files ...... ......... ....... ......... ......... ............ .................. ..... .............. ......... .......... .... ........... pr(

1) print and summarize an SCCS file ..................................................................................................... prs(1) print arguments after shell interpretation ........................................................................................ echo(1) print, copy, and/or concatenate files .................................................................................................. cat(1) print current SCCS file editing activity ............................................................................................ sact(1) print documents formatted with mm macros .................................................................................... mm(1) print effective current user id ...................................................................................................... whoami(1) print formatted data on standard output, open file, or string ...................................................... printf(3S) print formatted output from varargs argument list .................................................................... vprintf(3S) print formatted output with numbered arguments ................................................................. printmsg(3C) print last part of file .......................................................................................................................... tail(l) print list of users and their current processes ............................................................................ whodo(1M) print name list (symbol table) of object file ....................................................................................... nm(1) print name of current working directory..... ......... .......... ................... ....... ......... ................ ................ pwd( 1) print news items .............................................................................................................................. news(1) print time and date .......................................................................................................................... date(1) print user, group IDs and names .......................................................................................................... id(1) printer, description of formatted/unformatted output ......................................................................... Ip(4) printer, description of hpib interface to ............................................................................................ hpib(4) printer options, set .. ......... ......... .......... ... ........ ............ ..... .... .............. .......... ....... ............... .......... ....... slp( 1) printf ............................................................................................................................................ printf(3S) printmsg ................................................................................................................................. printmsg(3C) priority, run command at lower or higher ............................................................................ nice(1), nice(2) privileged values format ............................................................................................................... privgrp(5) procedures: shell procedures for accounting ........................................................... ,. ...... ... .......... acctsh(1M) process accounting .................................................................................................................... acctprc(1M)

- 27 -

Permuted Index process accounting commands .................................................................................................... acctcom(l) process and system state initialization ............................................................................................ init(lM) process, change data segment space allocation for ............................................................................. brk(2) process, change root directory of .................................................................................. chroot(l), chroot(2) process, create a new ........................................................................................................................ fork(2) process, create/close pipe between process and command ............................................................ popen(3S) process, enable break-point debugging of child process .................................................................. ptrace(2) process, format of core image of terminated process ......................................................................... core(5) process, get ID, group ID, and parent process ID of ...................................................................... getpid(2) process, get real/effective user and real/effective group ID's for .................................................... getuid(2) process, get/set file size limit for .................................................................................................... ulimit(2) process group ID, set ................................................................................................................... setpgrp(2) process, lock/unlock address space or segment ............................................................................ memlck(2) process number, get ............................................................................................. ;......................... getpid(2) process, overlay new program onto existing ........................................................................... sh(1), exec(2) process, print accumulated user and system time elapsed for .............................................................. sh(l) process, send SIGIOT to .............................................................................................................. abort(3C) process, send signal to ........................................................................................... kill(I), kill(2), abort(3C) process, set group ID for ............................................................................................................. setpgrp(2) process status, report ......................................... .................. .......... ...................................................... pst l) process, suspend execution for interval of time ............................................................... sleep(I), sleep(3C) process, suspend until signal ........................................................................................................... pause(2) process, terminate ........................................................................... kill(I), sh(I), exit(2), kill(2), abort(3C) process, time execution of ............................................................................................................... times(2) process, wait for completion of .................................................................................. sh(1), wait(l), wait(2) processes, list active ............................................................................................................................. ps(l) processes, send signal to all user processes ................. ............. .................... ................................ killall(1M) processes, specify maximum number of processes per user .............................. .................... ...... uconfig(1M) processes, terminate all user processes .................................................................................. shutdown(IM) processor type .......................... .................................................................................................... machid( l) prof .............................................................. ..................................................................................... prof( I) profil ............................................................................................................................................... profil(2) profile, create for program during execution .............................................................. profil(2), monitor(3C) profile data, display ........................................................................ .................................................. prof( I) profile files, description of /etc/profile and $HOMEj.profile ......................................................... profile(5) program, add diagnostics to ........................................................................................................ assert (3X) program, change internal attributes of ............................................................................................ chatr(l) program, check/verify C .................................................................................................................... lint(l) program, create execution profile for ......................................................................... profil(2), monitor(3C) program, create from object files .......................................................................................................... Id(l) program, debugger for ....................................................................................................................... adb(l) program, execute command from ................................................................................................ system(3S) program, force action associated with signal to be taken ............................................................ ssignal(3C) program, format C .............................................................................................................................. cb(l) program, generate for lexical analysis of text ...................................................................................... lex(l) program, get particular addresses associated with .......................................................................... end(3C) program, get size of ........................................................................................................................... size(l) program, locate source, binary, and/or on-line manual page for .................................................. whereis(l) program, maintain, update, and recompile ...................................................................................... make(l) program, overlay onto existing process and execute ............................................................... sh(I), exec(2) program, run immune to hangups, logouts, and quits ................................................................... nohup(l) program, set up signal handling for ............................................................................ signal(2), ssignal(3C) program verification . ........ .......... ...... .............. ................... .................. .................................... .... assert(3X) provide semaphores and record locking on files ........................... ........ ............................................. lockf(2) provide truth value about your processor type ............................................................................ machid(1)

- 28 -

Permuted Index

prs ...................................................................................................................................................... prs(l) ps ......................................................................................................................................................... ps(l) pseudo-random number generator ............................................................................................ drand48(3C) pseudo-random numbers .......................................................................................................... drand48(3C) pseudo-terminal driver ....................................................................................................................... pty( 4) ptrace ............................................................................................................................................ ptrace(2) pty ..................................................................................................................................................... pty( 4) public UNIX-to-UNIX file copy ......................................................................................................... uuto(l) push character back into input stream .................................. ........... ........ ........ ..................... ..... ungetc(3S) putc ................................................................................................................................................ putc(3S) putchar .......................................................................................................................................... putc(3S) putenv ....................................................................................................................................... putenv(3C) putpwent ............................................................................................................................... putpwent(3C) puts ................................................................................................................................................ puts(3S) putw ............................................................................................................................................... putc(3S) pwck ............................................................................................................................................ pwck(lM) pwd .................................................................................................................................................. pWd(l) pwd.h ........................................................................................................................................... passwd(5)

Pythagorean theorem function .................................................................................................... hypot(3M) qsort ................................... .......... ....... ......... ..................... .......... ........................... ...................... qsort(3C) query .............................................................................................................................................. query(l) quit character, description of .............................................................................................................. tty( 4) quits, run command immune to .................................................................................................... nohup(l) quoting, as used by the shell ................................................................................................................ sh(l) rand .............................................................................................................................................. rand(3C) random number generator ....................................................................................................... drand48(3C) random number generator ............................................................................................................. rand(3C) randomized library /archive, table of contents format description .................................................. ranlib(5) ranlib.h, description of ................................................................................................................... ranlib(5) raw interface to disc, description of ................................................................................................... disc( 4) raw mode, description of raw mode interface to magnetic tape .......................................................... mt( 4) raw mode, description of raw output to printer ................................................................................... Ip(4) rc .................................................................................................................................................... brc(lM) read ........................................................................................................................................ sh(l), read(2) read and format data from buffered open file ................................................................................ scanf(3S) read and format data from standard input .................................................................................... scanf(3S) read and format data from string .................................................................................................. scanf(3S) read character from buffered open file ............................................................................................ getc(3S) read error indicator on open file ................................................................................................... ferror(3S) read from a file using buffers ...... ...................................... ..................................... ................... ..... fread(3S) read from file .................................................................................................................................... read(2) read from standard input .................................................................................................................... sh(l) read operation, reposition next ...................................................................................................... fseek(3S) read password from / dey /tty or standard input ........ ................... ............................................ getpass(3C) read text in convenient chunks on soft-copy terminal ..................................................................... more(l) read word from buffered open file ................................................................................................... getc(3S) read-ahead, set number of buffers allocated to .................................................... ...................... uconfig(1M) readonly ............................................................................................................................................... sh(l) read/write file pointer, move (seek) ................................................................................................. Iseek(2) real group

ID,

get for process ........................................................................................................ getuid(2) real user

ID,

get for process ........................................................................................................... getuid(2) realloc ......................................................................................................................................... malloc(3C) real-time priority, change or read ................................................................................................. rtprio(2) real-time priority, execute process with ........................................................................................ rtprio(l) reblock tape file ................................................................................................................................... dd(l)

- 29 -

Permuted Index

reboot ........................................................................................................................................ reboot(IM) reboot ............................................................................................................................................ reboot(2) re-boot operating system after shut-down ................................................................................ stopsys(IM) reboot system ............................................................................................................................. reboot(IM) reboot the system .......................................................................................................................... reboot(2) record locking and semaphores on files ............................................................................................ lockf(2) record login names, login times, and tty names for user ................................................................. utmp(5) regexp.h, description of ................................................................................................................. regexp(7) regular expression compile and match routines . .......... ....... ................ ............ ....... ... ....... ......... ..... regexp(7) relational database operator .............................................................................................................. join(l) release blocked signals and wait for interrupt ............................................................................ sigpause(2) release Command Set 80 cartridge tape ............................................................................................. tcio(l) release number, get current ....................................................................... revision(I), uname(I), uname(2) relocation bits, remove from object file .... ... ...... .... ...... ... .... ... ........ ............ ........ ........ ............ ........ ... strip(1) remind you when you have to leave ................................................................................................ leave(l) remind you when you have to leave ................................................................................................ leave(l) reminder service ............................ ........... ..................................... ............................................. calendar( 1) remote system, execute work requests on ...................................................................... uucico(1M), uux(l) remove a directory file .................................................................................................................... rmdir(2) remove a LIF file ... ................ ......... ......... ... ........... ............... ....... .... ................................... .......... ... Iifrm(1) remove backing store devices ........................................................................................................... vson(2) remove BIF files or directories ........................................................................................................ bifrm (1) remove delta from SCCS file .......................................................................................................... rmdel(l) remove duplicate lines in file ............................................................................................................ uniq(l) remove extra new-line characters from file ....................................................................................... rmnl(l) remove files or directories .................. ...... ... ......... ....... ... .............. ..... .................. ................... ............. rm(1) remove link to file .......................................................................................................... Iink(IM), unlink(2) remove message queue .................................................................................................................... ipcrm(l) remove multiple line-feeds from output .......................... ................. .......... ........... ..... .......... .... ...... ..... ssp(1) remove nroff/troff, tbl, and eqn constructs ........................................................... ; ......................... deroff(l) remove selected fields from each line of a file ..................................................................................... cut(l) remove selected table column entries from file ................................................................................... cut(l) remove semaphore set .................................................................................................................... ipcrm(l) remove shared memory id .............................................................................................................. ipcrm(l) remove symbol table and relocation bits from object file ................................................................. strip(l) rename LIF files ........................................................................................................................ Iifrename(l) repair file system inconsistencies ................................................................................... fsck(1M), fsdb(IM) report inter-process communication facilities status .......................................................................... ipcs(l) report number of free disc blocks ..................................................................................................... bifdf(l) report CPU time used ................................................................................................................... c1ock(3C) reserve a terminal ............................................................................................................................. 10ck(l) reset error indicator on open file .. ............ .......... .................. ......... .................................... ......... ... ferror(3S)

RETURN . .................. ...................... ......... ...................................... ....... ....... .... ......... ........ ........... regexp(7) revck ........................................................................................................................................... revck(IM) reverse line-feeds and backspaces, interpret for nroff(l) ...................................................................... col(l) reverse previous

get(1)

of SCCS file ................................................................................................ ungct(l) reVISIon ....................................................................................................................................... revision(l) revision information, get HP-UX ................................................................................................. revision(l) revision numbers, check for HP-UX files ..................................................................................... revck(lM) rewind .. .... .......... ......................... ........ ............................ ............................ ........ ...................... .... fseek(3S) rewind a file . ..................... ................... ......... .......... ........... ......... ...... ....... ..... ............................ ..... fseek(3S) rewind group file ...................................................................................................................... getgrent(3C) rewind magnetic tape ......................................................................................................................... mt(l) rewind password file ............................................................................................................... getpwent(3C) rm ....................................................................................................................................................... rm(l)

- 30 -

Permuted Index

rmail ................................................................................................................................................. mail(1) rmdel .............................................................................................................................................. rmdel(1) rmdir .................................................................................................................................................. rm(1) rmdir .............................................................................................................................................. rmdir(2) rmnl ................................................................................................................................................. rmnl(1) romanS ................................................................... ................. ........... ........ ........... ...................... romanS(7) root directory, change for duration of command ........................................................... chroot(1), chroot(2) root volume, mark/unmark volume as HP-UX root volume .................................................. rootmark(1M) rootmark ............................................................................................................................... rootmark(1M) rtprio ............................................................................................................................................. rtprio(1) run a command at low priority ............................................................................................ nice(1), nice(2) run a command immune to hangups, logouts, and quits ............................................................... nohup(1) run daily accounting ................................................................................................................ runacct(1M) runacct ..................................................................................................................................... runacct(1M)

CPU time report ........................................................................................................................... c1ock(3C)

CS/80 cartridge tape special file ............................................................................................................ ct( 4)

GPIO routines (device I/O library) ............................................................................................. gpio_*(3I)

HALGOL programs ..................................................................................................................... opx25(1M)

HP-lB routines (device I/O library) ............................................................................................ hpib_ *(31)

IMAGE database access .................................................................................................................. query(1)

I/O routines (device I/O library) .................................................................................................... io_*(31)

KERMIT-protocol file transfer program ...................................................................................... kermit(1M)

LP spooler system, configure ........................................................................................................ mklp(1M)

MPE/RTE-style message catalog support .................................................................................. catread(3C)

UUCP system snapshot ................................................................................................................ uusnap(1)

XMODEM protocol file transfer program. ............... ... ...... ... .... ...... ........ ....... .................. .......... umodem(1M)

XMODEM protocol file transfer program ................................................................................. umodem(1M) sact ................................................................................................................................................... sact(1) sbrk ................................................................................................................................................... brk(2) scan text for pattern and process ...................................................................................................... awk(1) scanf .............................................................................................................................................. scanf(3S) sees, ask for help concerning .......................................................................................................... help(1)

SCCS file, change delta commentary of ........... .......... ............ ...... ... ...... .................. .... ....... ... ....... ...... cdc( 1)

SCCS file, check for validity........ .......... ......... ............ .............. .... ...... .......... ................................ ...... val( 1)

SCCS file, compare two versions of .. ..... .... ......... ...... ............. ................... ....... ................. ..... ....... sccsdiff(1)

SCCS file, create delta (change) for ...... ...... ............ ....... ........ ............ ................. ... ................ .......... delta(1)

SCCS file, description of sces file format ................................................................................... sccsfile(5) secs file, get identification information from ............ .......... ............ ....... .... ......... .......... ..... ............ w hat( 1) sces file, get version of ..................................................................................................................... get(l)

SCCS file, print and summarize .. ......... ........ ....................................... .................. ................... .......... prs( 1)

SCCS file, print current editing activity for ...................................................................................... sact(1) secs file, print delta summary of ...................................................................................................... get(1) sees file, remove delta from ......................................................................................................... rmdel(1) sees file, reverse previous get(1) of .............................................................................................. unget(1) sees files, create or change parameters of ................................................................................... admin(1) sccsdiff .............................. ................................... ................................................ ........................ sccsdiff( 1) schedule commands at specified daters) and timers) ........................................................... at(l), cron(lM) screen handling and optimization routines .................................................................................. curses(3X)

SDF boot area, copy as from one or more SDF boot areas to another ........................................ oscp(lM)

SDF, description of ............................................................................................................................. dir(5)

SDF, description of SDF volume .......................................................................................................... fs(5)

SDF volume, format, initialize, and certify ................................................................................ sdfinit(lM) sdfinit ......................................................................................................................................... sdfinit(lM) search an ASCII file for pattern ........................ ......... ........... ....... ......... ..... ....... ......... ..... ............ ...... grep(1)

- 31 -

Permuted Index

search tables, hash-coded .......................................................................................................... hsearch(3C) security control, dialup ................................................................................................................ dialups(5) sed ..................................................................................................................................................... sed(l) seek to new position in file ............................................................................................................... Iseek(2) segment length, modify ............................................................................................................. memvary(2) segment, lock/unlock for process ................................................................................................. memlck(2) segment reference patterns, inform operating system about ................................................... memadvise(2) select ............................................................................................................................... ............... select(2) select/reject common lines of two files ........................................................................................... comm(l) semaphore control operations ........................ ................................................................................ semctl(2) semaphore operations .................................................................................................................... semop(2) semaphores and record locking on files ............................................................................................ lockf(2) semaphores, get ............................................................................................................................ semget(2) semctl ............................................................................................................................................ semctl(2) semget .......................................................................................................................................... semget(2) semop ............................................................................................................................................ semop(2) send mail to users or read mail ........................................................................................................ mail(l) send signal to all user processes ............ ................. .................................................................. .... killall(1M) set ........................................................................................................................................................ sh(l) set current signal mask ........................................................................................................... sigsetmask(2) set group access list .................................................................................................................. set groups (2) set name of host cpu ............................................................................................................ sethostname(2) set options for terminal port ............................... ........ ...................................................................... stty(l) set or change real-time priority ...................................................................................................... rtprio(1) set or print name of current host system ................................................................................. hostname(l) set printer options .............................................................................................................................. slp(1) set process's alarm clock ................................................................................................................ alarm(2) set special attributes for group ............................................................................................. setprivgrp(lM) set system parameters ..................... ......... ........ ........... ....... .......... .......... ......... ................. ........ uconfig( 1M) set tabs on a terminal ....................................................................................................................... tabs(l) set the modes of a terminal .......................................................................................................... getty(1M) set time and date .............................................................................................................. date(1), stime(2) set user and group IDs ................................................................................................................... setuid(2) setbuf ........................................................................................................................................... setbuf(3S) setgid ............................................................................................................................................. setuid(2) setgrent ......................................................... .......................................................................... getgrent(3C) set-group-ID bit, set/clear for file ................................................................................ chmod(l), chmod(2) setgroups .............................. ...... ................................................. ................... .......................... setgroups(2) sethostname .......... .................. ....... ...................................................................................... sethostname(2) setitimer .................................................................................................................................... setitimer(2) setjmp ........................................................................................................................................ setjmp(3C) setkey ........................................................................................................................................... crypt(3C) setmnt ....................................................................................................................................... setmnt(lM) setpgrp ........................................................................................................................................ setpgrp(2) setprivgrp ............................................................................................................................. setprivgrp(lM) setprivgrp ...................................................................................................... setprivgrp(1M), setprivgrp(2) setpwent ............................................................. .................. .................................................. getpwent(3C) settimeofday ........................................................................................................................ settimeofday(2) setuid ...................................................................... ....................................................................... setuid(2) set-user-ID bit, set/clear for file ................................................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2) sh ......................................................................................................................................................... sh(1) shareable, mark or unmark program code as .................................................................................. chatr(1) shared memory control operations ................................................................................................ shmctJ(2) shared memory operations ............................................................................................................ shmop(2) shared memory segment, get ........................................................................................................ shmget(2)

- 32 -

Permuted Index

shell ..................................................................................................................................................... sh(1) shell, change default login ................................................................................................................ chsh(1) shell command, issue from program ................................................................................... ......... system(3S) shell, command, Personal Applications Manager .............................................................................. pam(1) shell, input commands to ..................................................................................................................... sh(1) shell procedures for accounting ........................ ... ....................................................................... acctsh( 1M) shell programming language ................................................................................................................ sh(1) shell scripts, system initialization .................................................................................................... brc(1M) shell, set/clear flags to ......................................................................................................................... sh(1) shift ..................................................................................................................................................... sh(1) shmctl ........................................................................................................................................... shmctl(2) shmget ......................................................................................................................................... shmget(2) shmop ........................................................................................................................................... shmop(2) show group memberships .............................................................................................................. groups(1) shut down operating system with optional re-boot ................................................................... stopsys(1M) shutdown .............................................................................................................................. shutdown(1M) shutdown status of specified file system .................................................................................... fsclean(1M) sigblock ......... ........ ................... ................. ........... .................... ................. ................. ..... ...... ...... sigblock( 2) sign on .......... .................... ....... ......... ......... .......... ........ ......... .... ................. ................... .......... ......... login( 1) signal .............................................................................................................................................. signal(2) signal facilities, software ............................................................................................................ sigvector(2) signal, force action associated with signal to be taken .............. ...... ............ .................. ........ ...... ssignal(3C) signal handling for program, set up ............................................................................ signal(2), ssignal(3C) signal mask, set ...................................................................................................................... sigsetmask(2) signal, send SIGIOT to process .................................................................................................... abort(3C) signal, send to all user processes .................................................................................................. killall(1M) signal, send to process ........................................................................................... kill(1), kill(2), abort(3C) signal, set trap for ............................................................................................................................... sh(1) signal stack space ....................................................................................................................... sigspace(2) signal, suspend process until receipt of ........................................................................................... pause(2) signgam .......................................................................................... .......................................... gamma(3M) signs, make using large letters ........................................................ ..................... ......................... banner( 1) sigpause ....................................................... .................... ........ ..................... ........ .......... ............ sigpause( 2) sigsetmask . ........ ...................... ................ ................. ................................ ........ ...................... sigsetmask( 2) sigspace ...................................................................................................................................... sigspace(2) sigvector .................................................................................................................................... sigvector(2) simple text formatter ..................................................................................................................... adjust(1) sin ........ ............ ........ ................................... ........... .......... ......... ................. .................... ................ trig( 3M) sine function ...... ............................................. ....................... ..... .................................... ................ trig(3M) sine, hyperbolic .............................................................................................................................. sinh(3M) sinh .................. ............................................. ................................................................................ sinh(3M) size .................................................................................................................................................... size(1) size of an object file ........................................................................................................................... size(1) sleep ................................................................................................................................................ sleep(1) sleep .................... ................... .... .............. .................. ..................... .......... .................................... sleep(3C) sip ....................................................................................................................................................... slp(1) snapshot of the UUCP system ...................................................................................................... uusnap(1) software signal facilities ............................................................................................................. sigvector(2) sort ................................................................................................................................................... sort(1) sort algorithm ................................ ............................ ................................................................... qsort(3C) sort and/or merge files ...................................................................................................................... sort(1) sort, topological ............................................................................................................................... tsort(1) source code, locate for program ................................................................................................... whereis(1) spaces, convert to tabs, and vice versa ........................................................................................ expand(1) special characters in terminal interface, description of ....................................... ................................ tty( 4)

- 33-

Permuted Index

special file, create block/character/network ......................................... mkdev(lM), mknod(2), mknod(1M) special file, create fifo ............................................................................................... mknod(2), mknod(lM) special file, identify for file name on mounted file system .......................................................... devnm(lM) special file, modem control ........................................................................................................... modem(4) special file, CS/80 cartridge tape ........................................................................................................... ct( 4) special file, system "bit bucket" ........................................................................................................ null (4) special files, perform functions on ........................................................................................ ioctl(2), stty(2) special files, utilities used in creating special files ......................................................................... mknod(5) spell ................................................................................................................................................. spell(l) spellin .............................................................................................................................. ........ . ........ spell (1 ) spelling errors, find ........................................................................................................................... spell(l) spellou t ........................... ... ....... ..................... .................. ........... ......... ......................... ....... ............ spell (1 ) split ......................... ............... .... ..... .......................................... .................. ............ ...... ................ ... split( 1) split a file into pieces ........................................................................................................................ split(l) split operating system into one or more ordinary files ..... ................... ........................................... oscp(1M) spool directory clean-up for uucp ............................................................................................. uuclean(lM) sprintf ........................................................................................................................................ ,. printf(3S) sput! ............................................................................................................................................. sput!(3X) sqrt ................................................................................................................................................. exp(3M) square root function ..................................... .................. ...... ............. ....... ................... .......... ... ...... exp(3M) srand ............................................................................................................................................. rand(3C) sscanf .............. ................... ............................ ........ ................... ... ................................... ......... ..... scanf(3S) ssignal ........................................................................................................................................ ssignal(3C) ssp ...................................................................................................................................................... ssp(l) stack size, specify size in bytes .......................... ..... ................... ... .................. ........ ....... .... ........ uconfig(1M) standard input, copy one line from to standard output ..................................................................... line(l) standard input, read from .................................................................................................................... sh(l) standard inter-process communication package ........................................................................... stdipc(3C) start character, resume output, description of .................................................................................... tty( 4) stat ................................................................................................................................................... stat(2) stat(2)/fstat(2), description of structure returned by these calls ....................................................... stat(7) state, defining system states for init(lM) .................................................................................... inittab(5) state, initialization of system state and processes ............... ......... ............................. ............... ....... init( 1M) stat.h, description of .................... .... ......... ................................... ........ .......... ......... ................. ......... stat(7) status flags, get/set for file ............................................................................................................... fcntl(2) status, get for file .............................................................................................................................. stat(2) status, inter-process communication facilities .................................................................................... ipcs(l) stdio .............................................................................................................................................. stdio(3S) stdipc .......................................................................................................................................... stdipc(3C) step ............................................ ............. ......... ..................................... .............. ..... ......... ..... ....... regexp(7) sticky bit, set/clear for file ........................................................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2) stime ............................................................................................................................................... stime(2) stop character, suspend output, description of ................................................................................... tty( 4) stop operating system with optional re-boot ............................................................................. stopsys(lM) stopsys ........................................................ .......... .................................................................... stopsys (1M) strcat ... ......... ................. .................. ........... ......... ..................................... ......................... .......... string(3C) strchr ........................................................................................................................................... string(3C) strcmp . ....... ....... .... .................. .................. ............................ .................. ..... ................ ....... ........ string(3C) strcpy ... ........ ...... ... ........ ................ ..................... ........... ...... ......... ................... .......... ... ...... ......... string(3C) strcspn ......................................................................................................................................... string(3C) stream, close or flush .................................................................................................................... fclose(3S) stream text editor ... ....... ..................... ....... ........... .................. ...... .... .......... .............. .... ........ ............. sed( 1) string collation, non-ASCII, used by NLS ............................................................................... nL.string(3C) string, copy .................................................................................................................................. string(3C) string, get length of ..................................................................................................................... string(3C)

- 34 -

Permuted Index

string, print formatted data into .................................................................................................. printf(3S) string, read and format data from ................................................................................................. scanf(3S) string, read from buffered open file ................................................................................................. gets(3S) string, search contents of file for specified ... .... ....... .......... ........... ................... ....... ............ ....... ........ grep( 1) string, search for particular character in ..................................................................................... string(3C) string to double-precision integer conversion ............................................................................... strtod(3C) string, write to open file or standard output .................................................................................. puts(3S) strings, compare two ................................................................................................................... string(3C) strings, concatenate two ............... ............................................................................................... string(

3C)

string-to-integer conversion .......................................................................................................... strtol(3C) strip ................................................................................................................................................. strip(l) strip multiple line-feeds from output .................................................................................................. ssp(1) strlen ........................................................................................................................................... string(3C) strncat ......................................................................................................................................... string(3C) strncmp ....................................................................................................................................... string(3C) strncpy ........................................................................................................................................ string(3C) strpbrk ........................................................................................................................................ string(3C) strrchr ....................... ............................. ..................................................................................... string( 3C) strspn .......................................................................................................................................... string(3C) strtod .......................................................................................................................................... strtod(3C) strtok ........................................................................................................................................... string(3C) strtol ............................................................................................................................................ strtol(3C) structure, definition of structure returned by stat(2) and fstat(2) .................................................... stat(7)

Structured Directory Format, description of ....................................................................................... dir(5)

Structured Directory Format, description of SDF volume .................................................................... fs(5)

Structured Directory Format volume, format, initialize, and certify .......................................... sdfinit(lM) stty ................................................................................................................................................... stty(l) stty ................................................................................................................................................... stty(2) sttyv6 . ........... ....... ................... ... ....... .................. ................... ... ..... ... ..... ....... ................. ... ....... ..... sttyv6( 4) su ......................................................................................................................................................... sU(l) summarize and print SCCS file .......................................................................................................... prs(l) superblock, description of superblock in SDF volume ........................................................................... fs(5) suspend process execution for interval of time ................................................................ sleep(l), sleep(3C) suspend process until signal ............................................................................................................ pause(2) swab ............................................................................................................................................. swab(3C) swap bytes .................................................................................................................................... swab(3C) swap device, add .......................................................................................................................... swapon(2) swap time, set for virtual segment . ........ .... .............. ... ....... ... ............................ ....... ......... ........ uconfig(1M) swapon ..................................................................................................................................... swapon(lM) swapon ........................................................................................................................................ swapon(2) swapping and paging enable .................................................................................................... swapon(lM) symbol table, extract entries from executable file's symbol table (name list) ................................. nlist(3C) symbol table, print from object file .................................................................................................... nm(l) symbol table, remove from object file .......... ........ ........................ ......... ........ ................. ............. ..... strip (1 ) symbols, examine execution profile for ................. ........ ... .................... ........... ......................... .......... prof(1) sync .................................................................................................................... sync(2), sync(l), syncer(l) syncer .................................................................. ...................................................................... syncer( 1M) sync, automatic periodic ............................................................................................................ syncer(lM) synchronous I/O multiplexing ........................................................................................................ select(2) sys_errlist .................................................................................................................................. perror(3C) sYS-1lerr ..................................................................................................................................... perror(3C) system ........................................................................................................................................ system(3S) system activity, terminate all current activity ...................................................................... shutdown(lM) system calls, error indicator for ....................................................................................................... errno(2) system configuration ................................................................................................................... config(lM)

- 35 -

Permuted Index

system error logging file ................................................................................................................. errfile(5)

System III compatibility for magnetic tape, description of ................................................................. mt( 4) system initialization shell scripts ................... ................... .............................................................. brc (1M) system name, get ....................................................................................... revision(1), uname(l), uname(2) system names, list of those known to uucp .. ................................................ .................................... uucp(1) system parameters, set or list ................................................................................................... uconfig(lM) system reboot ............................................................................................................................. reboot(lM) system reconfiguration .............................................................................................................. uconfig( 1M) system state, defining states for init(lM) ..................................................................................... inittab(5) system state, initialization of .......................................................................................................... init(lM) table of contents format description for archives/libraries ............................................................. ranlib(5) table of devices mounted by mount(lM) ..................................................................................... mnttab(5) table of mounted devices, create ............................................................................................... setmnt(lM) table search, binary .... ........... ............ ...... ... ..... .................... ............ ................................... ...... bsearch(3C) tables, format for nroff/troff ............................................................................................................... tbl(l) tabs .................................................................................................................................................. tabs(l) tabs, expand to spaces, and vice versa ......................................................................................... expand(l) tabs, put tab specifications in text files ........................................................................................... fspec(5) tabs, set on terminal ......................................................................................................................... tabs(l) tail ..................................................................................................................................................... tail(l) tan ......................... .......... ......... .......... ......... ........... ....... .................... ................ ............. ............... trig(3M) tangent function .... ................ ... ..... ..... ...... ............ ....... ........... ......... ............................. .................. trig(3M) tangent, hyperbolic ............. .... .......... ......................... ........... ...... ......... ... ................ ............ ........... sinh(3M) tanh ............................................................................................................................................... sinh(3M) tape, archive files on ........................................................................................................................... tar(l) tape, Command Set 80 cartridge utility ............................................................................................ tcio(l) tape density, how to set for magnetic tape ......................................................................................... mt(4) tape, description of magnetic tape raw interface and controls .................................. ................ .......... mt( 4) tape file archiver ................................................................................................................................. tar(l) tape file, convert, reblock, translate and/or copy ................................................................................ dd(l) tape initialization ..................................................................................................................... mediainit(l) tape, manipulate and/or position ........................................................................................................ mt(1) tape, unpack/extract files from Command Set 80 cartridge ............................................................. upm(l) tar ...................................................................................................................................................... tar(l) tbl ....................................................................................................................................................... tbl(l) tbl, nroff, troff, eqn constructs, remove from text .......................................................................... deroff(1) tcio .................................................................................................................................................... tcio(l) tee ...................................................................................................................................................... tee(l) temporary file, create and open .................................................................................................. tmpfile(3S) temporary file, generate name for ................ ........................ .................................. .................. tmpnam(3S) termcap ................................................................................................................ termcap(3C), terminfo(5) termcap description to terminfo description, convert ........................................................... captoinfo(lM) terminal capabilities, database for

editor ............................................................................... terminfo(5) terminal capabilities in terminfo(5), access ............................................................................. termcap(3C) terminal commands, description of ioctl(2) system call commands ..................................................... tty( 4) terminal, database listing terminal type for each port ................................................................. ttytype(5) terminal dependent initialization ....................................................................................................... tset(l) terminal, description of general interface to ....................................................................................... tty( 4) terminal driver, pseudo- ..................................................................................................................... pty(4) terminal emulation, asynchronous .................................................................................................. aterm(l) terminal, establish communication with terminal for login .......................................................... gettY(lM) terminal, facilitate viewing of continuous text on ............................................................................ more(l) terminal, find baud rate of terminal during login process ............................................................ getty(lM) terminal flags, mapping between pwb/V6 UNIX and current HP-UX ................................................ tty(4) terminal, generate file name for ................................................................................................. ctermid(3S)

- 36 -

Permuted Index

terminal, get path name of ...................................................................................................... ttyname(3C) terminal, get path name of user's ............................................................................................ ........... tty( 1) terminal input control, description of ................................................................................................. tty(4) terminal interface, general ............................................................................................................. termio( 4) terminal interface, version 6/PWD-compatibility ........................................................................... sttyv6( 4) terminal, permit/deny messages to .................................................................................................. mesg(1) terminal screen, clear ....................................................................................................................... clear(1) terminal screen handling and optimization routines .................................................................... curses(3X) terminal, set options for .................................................................................................................... stty(1) terminal, set tabs on ......................................................................................................................... tabs(1) terminal, set type and mode on login ................................................................................................ tset (1) terminal, test file descriptor for association with ..................................................................... ttyname(3C) terminals, list of recognized terminal names ................................................ .................................... term(7) terminals, list of supported terminals in terminfo(5) ....................................................................... term(7) terminate a process ......................................................................... kill(1), sh(1), exit(2), kill(2), abort(3C) terminate all users' processes ................................................................................................ shutdown(1M) terminfo compiler ....... ......... ........... .................. ............ ...... ................................................ .............. tic( 1M) terminfo database access ................................................................................................................. tput(1) terminfo description from termcap description, convert ....................................................... captoinfo(1M) termio ........................................................................................................................................... termio( 4) test .......................................................................................................................................... sh(1), test(1) test conditional expressions ..................................................................................................... sh(1), test(1) text editor ................................................................................................................................. ed(1), eX(1) text editor, database of terminal capabilities for

vi .................................................................... terminfo(5) text editor, stream ............................................................................................................................. sed(1) text editor (variant of ex for casual users) ........................................................................................ edit(1) text editor, visual ................................................................................................................................. vi(1) text, facilitate CRT viewing of continuous ...................................................................................... more(1) text file, put format specifications in ............................................................................................... fspec(5) text, find spelling errors in ............................................................................................................... spell(1) text format specifications, put in text file ........................................................................................ fspec(5) text formatter ....... ......................... ............... ....... ............ ................ ... .......... ................................... nroff( 1) text formatter, simple .................................................................................................................... adjust(1) text formatting, description of man macros ...................................... ........ ............................ ............ man(7) text formatting, description of mm macros ...................................... ................................................. mm(7) text formatting, remove nroff/troff/tbl/eqn constructs from text .................................................. deroff(1) text, generate programs for lexical analysis of .................................................................................... lex(1) text pattern scanning and processing language ................................................................................. awk(1) text, print using mm macros ............................................................................................................. mm(1) tgetent ..................................................................................................................................... termcap(3C) tgetflag .................................................................................................................................... termcap(3C) tgetnum ................................................................................................................................... termcap(3C) tgetstr ...................................................................................................................................... termcap(3C) tgoto ........................................................................................................................................ termcap(3C) three-way differential file comparison ............................................................................................... diff3(1) tic ................ ......... .......... ............................ ....... .......... ................... ... .......... ............... ..................... tic( 1M) time .................................................................................................................................................. time(1) time .................................................................................................................................................. time(2) time a command .............................................................................................................................. time(1) time and date, convert to ASCII string ........................................................................................ ctime(3C) time and date, get more precisely ................................................................................................... ftime(2) time, corrected for daylight saving time and time zone ................ ................................................ ctime(3C) time execution of a process and its child processes ......................................................................... times(2) time, get seconds since 00:00:00 GMT, January 1, 1970 ................................................................... time(2) time, get/set ....................................................................................................................... gettimeofday(2)

- 37 -

Permuted Index

time, print elapsed user and system time for process ........................................................................... sh(1) time, set and/or print ....................................................................................................... date(l), stime(2) time to leave ................................................................................................................................... leave(l) time zone, time corrected for ........................................................................................................ ctime(3C) time/date stamps, correct those on wtmp records ..................................................................... fwtmp(lM) times ..................................................................................................................................... sh(I), times(2) timezone ....................................................................................................................................... ctime(3C) tmpfile ........................................................................................................................................ tmpfile(3S) tmpnam ................................................................................................................................... tmpnam(3S) toascii ............................................................................................................................................ conv(3C)

_tolower ....................................................................................................................................... conv(3C) tolower .......................................................................................................................................... conv(3C) topological sort ................................................................................................................................ tsort(l) touch ....................... ... ........................... ........ ......... ........... ................... .......... ........ ........... ....... ...... touch( l)

_toupper ....................................................................................................................................... conv(3C) toupper ......................................................................................................................................... conv(3C) tput .................................................................................................................................................. tput(l) tputs ........................................................................................................................................ termcap(3C) tr .......................................................................................................................................................... tr(l) transfer files between two systems ....... .................. .............................. ................. ............. uucp(1), uuto(1) translate assembly language .......................................................................................................... atrans(l) translate characters during copy from standard input to standard output ........................................... tr(1) translate characters for NLS .................................................................................................... nl_conv(3C) translate tape file ................................................................................................................................ dd(l) trap ..................................................................................................................................................... sh(I) trap numbers for hardware ........................................................................................................... trapno(2) trap, set for particular signal ............................................................................ sh(I), signal(2), ssignal(3C) trapno ........................................................................................................................................... trapno(2) trapno, report value for last command failure .................................................................................... err(I) trigonometric functions ................ ..................................... ................... ................ .......................... trig(3M) troff, format tables for ........................................................................................................................ tbl(I) troff, nroff, t bl, eqn constructs, remove from text ................... ..................................... .................. deroff( I) true ................................................................................................................................................... true(l) truth value about your processor type .. ........ ......................................... .......... ......................... ... machid( 1) truth values ...................................................................................................................................... true(I) tset .................................................................................................................................................... tset(I) tsort .. ................................................................. ......... .......... ............................ ................... ............ tsort (1) tty ...................................................................................................................................................... tty(I) tty name, record for each user (accounting) ................................................................................... utmp(5) tty port, database listing terminal type connected to each .......................................................... ttytype(5) ttyname ................................................................................................................................... ttyname(3C) ttyslot ........................................................................................................................................ ttyslot(3C) tune a file system ....................................................................................................................... tunefs(IM) type declarations, data type definitions for system code . .................... ............................................ types(7) typedefs for code portability between HP-UX implementations ..................................................... model(5) types.h, description of .... .............. ...... ......... .......... .......... ..................................... ......... .................. types(7) tzname ......................................................................................................................................... ctime(3C) tzset ............................................................................................................................................. ctime(3C) uconfig ...................................................................................................................................... uconfig(IM) ul ......................................................................................................................................................... ul(I) ulimit ............................................................................................................................................. ulimit(2) umask ................................................................................................................. sh(I), umask(I), umask(2) umodem .................................................................................................................................. umodem(IM) umount ................................................................................................................... mount(IM), umount(2) uname .......................................................................................................................... uname(I), uname(2)

- 38 -

Permuted Index

unblocked disc interface, description of ............................................................................................. disc( 4) uncompact ................................................................................................................................. compact(l) uncompiler: terminfo .................................................................................................................... untic(lM) underlining, translate underscores to terminal escape sequence ............................................................ ul(1) underscores, translate to terminal escape sequence for underlining ...................................................... ul(l) unexpand ..................................................................................................................................... expand(l) unget .............................................................................................................................................. unget(l)

UNGETC ..................................................................................................................................... regexp(7) ungetc ......................................................................................................................................... ungetc(3S) uniformly-distributed pseudo-random number generator ......................................................... drand48(3C) uniq .................................................................................................................................................. uniq(l) unique lines, find after comparing two files .................................................................................... comm(l)

UNIX/HP-UX system, establish communication with another ............................................................ cU(l) unlink ............................................................................................................................ link(lM), unlink(2) unlock/lock process address space or segment ............................................................................. memlck(2) unmount or mount file system ............................................................... mount(lM), mount(2), umount(2) unpack cpio archives from

media ............................................................................................... upm(l) unprintable characters in a file visible or invisible .............................................................................. vis(l) untic ........ ................................... ........... ... ..... .............. ........................... .......... ........................... untic( 1M) update access/modification/change times of file .............................................................. touch(l), utime(2) update, maintain, recompile programs ............................................................................................ make(l) update super-block ............................................................................................................. sync(2), sync(l) upm .............................................................................................................................. : .................. upm(l) upper-case to lower-case character conversion ............................................................................... conv(3C) use findstring output to insert calls to getmsg ......................................................................... insertmsg(l) user crontab file .......................................................................................................................... crontab(l) user environment, description of .................................................................................................. environ(7) user ID, get line from password file with matching ..................................................................... getpw(3C) user ID, print ....................................................................................................................................... id(l) user ID, search password file for matching .......... ................................ ................................... getpwent(3C) user ID, set .................................................................................................................................... setuid(2) user name, print ................................................................................................................................... id(l) user name, search password file for matching ......................................................................... getpwent(3C) user processes, terminate all ................................................................................................. shutdown(lM) user, switch to another ........................................................................................................................ su(l) users, print list of current ................................................................................................................. who(l) users, print list of users and their current processes .................................................................. whodo(lM) ustat ...... ................... .................................................. ......................... ........................ ................... ustat (2) utilities, Bell Interchange Format file operations ................................................................................ bif(5) utime .............................................................................................................................................. utime(2) utmp accounting file, description of ................................................................................................ utmp(5) utmp file current user slot .......................................................................................................... ttyslot(3C) utmp.h, description of ..................................................................................................................... utmp(5) uucico ........................................................................................................................................ uucico(lM) uuclean .................................................................................................................................... uuclean(lM) uucp ................................................................................................................................................ uucp(l) uucp command execution ............................................................................................................ uuxqt(lM) uucp network, monitor activity .................................................................................................. uusub(lM)

~~~~ :~~tO::i::%~:~ I~!~a;:f~.~ ........ ~:· ................................... · ~~~Ie:~~~~l uucp transactions grouped by transaction, list ................................................................................. uuls(l) uucp/uux transactions, log of .......................................................................................................... uucp(l) uulog ............................................................................................................................................... uucp(l) uuls ................................................................................................................................................... uuls(l) uuname ............................................................................................................................................ uucp(l)

- 39 -

Permuted Index

uupick .............................................................................................................................................. uuto(l) uusnap ......................................................................................................................................... uusnap(l) uusub ......................................................................................................................................... uusub(lM) uuto ................................................................................................................................................. uuto(l) uux .................................................................................................................................................... uux(l) uuxqt .......................................................................................................................................... uuxqt(lM) val ...................................................................................................................................................... val(l) validate password and group files ................................................................................................ pwck(lM) validate SCCS file .............................................................................................................................. val(l) values ............................................................................................................................................ values(7) values, machine-dependent ............................................................................................................ values (7) varargs ........................................................................................................................................ varargs(7) varargs argument list, print formatted output from .................................................................. vprintf(3S) variable argument list handling facility .. ..................................................................................... varargs(7) verify C program ............................................................................................................................... lint(l) verify Command Set 80 cartridge tape .............................................................................................. tcio(l) verify file system consistency ......................................................................................................... fsck(lM) verify password and group files ...... ...................................... ........................................ ................ pwck(lM) version 6/PWD-compatibility terminal interface ..... .......... ................... ................. ........ ........... ...... sttyv6 ( 4) version name, get for HP-UX ....................................................................................... uname(l), uname(2) version number, get .................................................................................................................... revision(l) versions, compare two SCCS file versions ........ .................. ........... ........ ........ .................... ........... sccsdiff( 1) vfork ................................................................................................................................................. fork(2) vi .......................................................................................................................................................... vi(l) vi editor, database of terminal capabilities for ........................................................................... terminfo(5) view ..................................................................................................................................................... vi(l) viewing text, facilitate on soft-copy terminals ................................................................................. more(l) virtual memory page pool, specify maximum size of .................... ..................................... ........ uconfig(lM) virtual memory usage, set or clear for program .............................................................................. chatr(l) virtual memory working set ratio, set ....................................................................................... uconfig(lM) virtual segment, establish time segment remains memory resident ........................................... uconfig(1M) vis ....................................................................................................................................................... vis(l) visual text editor ..................... .......................................... ........................................... ........................ vi(l) volume, description of SDF volume superblock .................................................................................... fs(5) volume, format, initialize, and certify SDF volume .................................................................... sdfinit(lM) volume header, write

LIF

on file ..................................................................................................... lifinit(l) volume, mark/unmark as HP-UX root volume ...................................................................... rootmark(lM) vprintf ...................... ........................................................ ........ ........... ....................................... vprintf(3S) vsadv .............................................. ...................................... ........................ ............ ................ ..... vsadv(2) vsoff .............................................................................................................................. ................... vson (2) vson ................................................................................................................................................. vson(2) wait .......................................................................................................................... sh(l), wait(l), wait(2) wait for completion of process ................................................................................... sh(l), wait(l), wait(2) walk a file tree ................................................................. .................... .................................... ........ ftw(3C) wall ................................................................ ................... ....... ................... ............................... ... wall( 1M) wc ....................................................................................................................................................... wc(l) wc ....................................................................................................................................................... wc(l) what ................................................................................................................................................ what(l) whereis ........................................................................................................................................ whereis(l) while loop, exit from enclosing ............................................................................................................. sh(l) while loop, resume the next iteration of ............................................................................................... sh(l) who ................................................................................................................................................... whorl) whoami ................................................................... c................................................................... whoami(l) whodo ........................................................................................................................................ whodo(lM) word count .......................................................................................................................................... wc(l)

- 40 -

Permuted Index

word, read from buffered open file .................................................................................................. getc(3S) word, write on buffered open file or standard output ..................................................................... putc(3S) words, count number contained in file ................................................................................................ wc(1) working directory, change ........................................................................................... cd(l), sh(l), chdir(2) working directory, print name of ...................................................................................................... pwd(1) write ................................................................................................................................. write(l), write(2) write character on buffered open file or standard output ............................................................... putc(3S) write current contents of memory to disc ........................................................................... sync(2), sync(1) write interactively to another user .................................................................................................. write(l) write LIF volume header on file ...................................................................................................... lifinit(l) write on a file .................................................................................................................................. write(2) write operation, reposition next ..................................................................................................... fseek(3S) write password file entry ....................................................................................................... putpwent(3C) write string to open file or standard output ................................................................................... puts(3S) write to a file using buffers ............................................................................................................ fread(3S) write to all users ............................................................................................................................ wall(1M) write word on buffered open file or standard output ...................................................................... putc(3S) wtmp accounting file, description of ............................................................................................... utmp(5) wtmp records, convert from binary to ASCII ............................................................................ fwtmp(lM) wtmp records, correct time/date stamps on ............................................................................... fwtmp(lM) wtmpfix ..................................................................................................................................... fwtmp(lM) x.25 line, get .............................................................................................................................. getx25(lM) xd ........................................................................................................................................................ od(l) yO . ......... ............................................... ............................ .............................................. ............ bessel (3M) y1 ............................................................................................................................................... bessel(3M) yacc .................................................................................................................................................. yacc(l) yn ............................................................................................................................................... bessel(3M)

- 41 -

Permuted Index

- 42 -

MANUAL COMMENT CARD

HP-

UX Reference

Manual Reorder No. 09000-90008

Name:

Company:

Address:

Phone No:

Please note the latest printing date from the Printing History (page ii) of this manual and any applicable update(s); so we know which material you are

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 37 LOVELAND, COLORADO

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

Hewlett-Packard Company

Fort Collins Systems Division

Attn: Customer Documentation

3404 East Harmony Road

Fort Collins, Colorado 80525

NO POSTAGE

NECESSARY

IF MAILED

INTHE

UNITED STATES

o u o

r/iOW

HEWLETT

HP Part Number

09000-90008

Printed in U.S.A. 6/86

09000-90657

For Internal Use Only

Živjo! Sem AI chatbot, posebej usposobljen za pomoč pri Hewlett-Packard HP-UX Family User Manual. Temeljito sem pregledal dokument in vam lahko pomagam najti točne informacije, ki jih potrebujete, ali razložim vsebino na jasen in preprost način. Ne glede na to, ali iščete navodila o določenih funkcijah, korake za odpravljanje težav ali splošno uporabo, lahko zastavite svoja vprašanja. Več podrobnosti kot navedete o svojih pomislekih ali potrebah, natančneje in učinkoviteje vam lahko pomagam!

Pomočnik tipka

Pomočnik je prekinil povezavo. Poskusite znova pozneje.

Izgleda, da ste prišli do dokumenta, ki je napisan v več jezikih, vključno z jezikom, ki ni vaš materni jezik. Uporabite lahko naslednje povezave, da začasno skrijete strani brez jezika, ki ga želite.

Oglas

Flio-

HEWLETT

HP-UX Reference

Vol. 3: Sections 4, 5, 7, and 9 for

HP Part Number 09000-90008

Printing History

autobackup(lM) and core files support

NOTICE

WARRANTY

t,

SRQ

TLK

LTN

TCT

DCL

PPOLL

**

o

#

<=

°

«

=

#

s_la

#

#

<:

:>.

#

#

#

#

&

/

&

/

t

t:t

•

U

»

*/

sees, sees

sees

sees

sees,

#

#

MANUAL COMMENT CARD

HP-

Please note the latest printing date from the Printing History (page ii) of this manual and any applicable update(s); so we know which material you are

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

r/iOW

HEWLETT

HP Part Number

Povezano

XENIX System V User's Guide

Bull AIX 4.3 Specialized reference

HP-UX User Manual: AI Chat & PDF Access

Bull AIX 5.2 Specialized reference

Bull AIX 5.3 Specialized reference

INTERACTIVE UNIX System V/386 Release 3.2 Reference Manual

UNICOS Reference Manual

Bull AIX 4.3 Specialized reference

Tru64 UNIX User Manual - ULTRIX to Tru64 UNIX Migration

HP-UX 9000 Series 300 System Administrator Manual

Memorex MRX/OS Control Program Manual | AI Chat

HP-UX 9000 Series 300 System Administrator Manual